15.12.2012 Views

External Control Manual - Panasonic Electric Works Corporation of ...

External Control Manual - Panasonic Electric Works Corporation of ...

External Control Manual - Panasonic Electric Works Corporation of ...

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

ME-LPS-EX-3 No.9000-0027-35V<br />

2012.4<br />

panasonic-electric-works.net/sunx<br />

FAYb Laser Marker<br />

SERIES<br />

<strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> <strong>Manual</strong>


Preface<br />

Thank you for purchasing Laser Marker .<br />

For full use <strong>of</strong> this laser marker safely and properly, please read this manual carefully.<br />

This product has been strictly checked and tested prior to its delivery. However, please make sure that this product operates<br />

properly before using it.<br />

In case that the product becomes damaged or does not operate as specifi ed in this manual, contact the dealer you<br />

purchased it or our sales agency.<br />

� Symbol Indications<br />

This manual uses a variety <strong>of</strong> symbols to explain safety precautions, instructions, and references for operating personnel.<br />

Before reading this manual, fully understand the contents <strong>of</strong> these indications.<br />

� Note<br />

2<br />

This symbol denotes a general prohibition notice.<br />

This symbol denotes a general action which operators must take.<br />

“CHECK” denotes any instructions or precautions for using this product.<br />

“REFERENCE” denotes any hints for operation, detail explanations, or references.<br />

1. Before using this product, or before every starting operation, please confi rm the correct functioning and performance <strong>of</strong><br />

this product.<br />

2. This manual is subject to LP-S series. Note that the illustration may vary with model.<br />

3. Contents <strong>of</strong> this manual could be changed without notice. This manual must not be partially or totally copied or revised.<br />

4. If there are any questions, mistakes, or comments in this manual, please notify us.<br />

5. Please remind that we have not responsibility <strong>of</strong> any results <strong>of</strong> operations in regardless <strong>of</strong> the above 4 clause.<br />

� Setting ranges<br />

This manual describes the setting ranges for LP-S500.Items where different setting ranges are specifi ed for different models<br />

are marked with an asterisk (*).<br />

For setting ranges for each model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series” (P.212 and onwards).<br />

� Trademarks<br />

� Windows is a registered trademark or trademark <strong>of</strong> Micros<strong>of</strong>t <strong>Corporation</strong> in the United States and other countries.<br />

� QR Code is a registered trademarks <strong>of</strong> DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.<br />

� “Adobe ® ,” “Adobe ® Logo,” “Adobe Reader ® ,” and “Adobe ® Illustrator ® ” are registered trademarks <strong>of</strong> U.S.A. Adobe Systems<br />

Incorporated and other countries.<br />

� All other product names and companies provided in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks <strong>of</strong> their<br />

respective companies.


Quality Use <strong>of</strong> Each <strong>Manual</strong><br />

This laser marker is prepared for the following manuals. Read the corresponding manual for the target, and operate this<br />

laser marker fully. Also, store these manuals after reading them.<br />

�Starting Guide<br />

This manual describes the safety precautions for using the laser marker and the items required for the introduction and<br />

installation <strong>of</strong> the laser marker.<br />

�Operation <strong>Manual</strong><br />

This manual describes the items required for the operation <strong>of</strong> the laser marker.<br />

The following contents, cautions, basic active operation, screen operation for setting marking contents, and measurement<br />

for error are described in this manual.<br />

Mainly the users that operate this laser marker for actual marking procedure shall be required for reading this manual.<br />

�<strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> <strong>Manual</strong><br />

This manual describes the external control <strong>of</strong> the laser marker.<br />

• <strong>Control</strong> from I/O connector<br />

Describes the signal layout <strong>of</strong> I/O connector, I/O rating, timing chart, example <strong>of</strong> control, etc.<br />

• <strong>Control</strong> from communication port (RS-232/Ethernet)<br />

Describes the signal layout <strong>of</strong> the connector, communication data format, communication command, example <strong>of</strong><br />

control, etc.<br />

Mainly the machine builder and system integrator shall be required for reading this manual.<br />

Operation <strong>Manual</strong> and <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> are included on an attached CD-R “Laser Marker PDF<br />

<strong>Manual</strong>”. The hardcopy versions <strong>of</strong> the manuals are available for pay. For details, please contact our sales<br />

agency.<br />

To read the PDF manual, Adobe Reader (Version 7 or later) <strong>of</strong> Adobe Systems Incorporated is required.<br />

3


Contents<br />

4<br />

Preface …………………………………………………… 2<br />

Quality Use <strong>of</strong> Each <strong>Manual</strong> …………………………… 3<br />

1-1 Operation Method for Laser Marker ……………… 8<br />

1-1-1 Operation Method Using <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> ………………… 8<br />

1-1-2 Operation Procedure Using Laser Marker ………………… 9<br />

1-1-3 Shift to Remote Mode …………………………………………10<br />

1-1-4 Shift to RUN Mode ……………………………………………11<br />

1-1-5 DIP Switch ……………………………………………………12<br />

2-1 Basics ………………………………………………… 14<br />

2-1-1 Before <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> <strong>of</strong> Laser Marker by I/O ……………14<br />

2-1-2 Terminal Connector ……………………………………………15<br />

2-1-3 Input/Output Terminal …………………………………………20<br />

2-1-4 Signals and Details <strong>of</strong> I/O Connector ………………………22<br />

2-1-5 Signals and Details <strong>of</strong> Interlock Connector …………………23<br />

2-1-6 Connecting Sample with <strong>External</strong> Devices …………………24<br />

2-1-7 Input Rating and Input Circuit ………………………………26<br />

2-1-8 Output Rating and Output Circuit ……………………………27<br />

2-2 Input/Output Operation …………………………… 28<br />

2-2-1 Input Signal ……………………………………………………28<br />

2-2-2 Output Signal …………………………………………………32<br />

2-2-3 Power …………………………………………………………33<br />

2-3 Timing Chart ………………………………………… 34<br />

2-3-1 Basic Input/Output ……………………………………………34<br />

2-3-2 Trigger Marking ………………………………………………35<br />

2-3-3 Equidistant Marking (Flying Object Marking) ………………35<br />

2-3-4 Guide Laser ……………………………………………………36<br />

2-3-5 Select File ………………………………………………………37<br />

2-3-6 Time Hold ………………………………………………………38<br />

2-3-7 Counter End ……………………………………………………38<br />

2-3-8 Count-up/Count-down ………………………………………39<br />

2-3-9 Counter Reset …………………………………………………40<br />

2-3-10 Rank/Offset Marking …………………………………………41


2-3-11 Laser Stop1 …………………………………………………42<br />

2-3-12 Laser Stop2 …………………………………………………43<br />

2-3-13 Serial Data Marking …………………………………………46<br />

2-3-14 Serial Offset Marking ………………………………………46<br />

3-1 Basics ………………………………………………… 48<br />

3-1-1 Before <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> <strong>of</strong> Laser Marker<br />

by Communication Port ……………………………………48<br />

3-1-2 Communication Port Connector ……………………………49<br />

3-1-3 Communication Port Specifi cation …………………………50<br />

3-1-4 Setting <strong>of</strong> Communication Conditions ………………………51<br />

3-1-5 Connecting Sample with <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong>ler ………………52<br />

3-1-6 Connection Check ……………………………………………54<br />

3-1-7 <strong>Control</strong> Sample ………………………………………………55<br />

3-1-8 Communication Data Format ………………………………58<br />

3-1-9 Communication Sequence ……………………………………62<br />

3-2 Communication Command and Function ………… 64<br />

3-2-1 Command List …………………………………………………64<br />

3-3 Command Description ……………………………… 66<br />

3-4 LP-F10/F10W Mode …………………………… 139<br />

3-4-1 Selecting DIP Switch ……………………………………… 139<br />

3-4-2 LP-F10/F10W Mode Command List ……………………… 140<br />

3-5 Each Command Description in<br />

LP-F10/F10W Mode …………………………… 142<br />

3-6 Notes ……………………………………………… 191<br />

3-6-1 Marking Operation and Command Transmission ……… 191<br />

3-6-2 Combined Use <strong>of</strong> RS-232C and I/O Connector ………… 192<br />

Troubleshooting ……………………………………… 194<br />

Error Indication ……………………………………… 204<br />

Alarm ……………………………………………………………… 204<br />

Warning …………………………………………………………… 207<br />

Input Setting Value by Series<br />

(LP-S Standard Mode) ……………………………… 212<br />

5


6<br />

Input Setting Value by Series<br />

(LP-F10/F10W Mode) ………………………………… 216<br />

Character Code Table ……………………………… 220<br />

ASCII Code ………………………………………………………… 220<br />

Original Font ……………………………………………………… 221<br />

JIS Level-1 Font …………………………………………………… 222<br />

JIS Level-2 Font …………………………………………………… 228<br />

Index …………………………………………………… 238


1<br />

Before <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong>


1-1 Operation Method for Laser Marker<br />

1-1-1 Operation Method Using <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong><br />

8<br />

CAUTION<br />

It is obligated by IEC/FDA/JIS that laser products shall incorporate a key-actuated master control. Actuation<br />

<strong>of</strong> our laser marker is basically controlled by the key switch located on the front <strong>of</strong> the controller box.<br />

However, in considering situations when the laser marker is operating as a part <strong>of</strong> a larger system, the laser<br />

marker turns on if the key switch is already in ON position, and power is supplied. In this case, be sure that<br />

the external system controls the operation <strong>of</strong> the laser marker with a key-actuated master control.<br />

In case <strong>of</strong> controlling the laser marker with the external control device, the following three connecting methods are<br />

applicable.<br />

<strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> using I/O *1 <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> using<br />

communication port *1<br />

ABCI<br />

ABCI<br />

RUN Mode *2<br />

(Console or monitor is used)<br />

*1 It is available to combine I/O and the communication port for external control.<br />

*2 It perceives the marking starting signal from the external device, but other than it are controlled by the console or monitor.<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> Marking<br />

Other than external control, the manual marking can be performed using the console (option) or the personal computer<br />

installed Laser Marker NAVI plus.<br />

ABCI<br />

ABCD<br />

ABCD


1-1-2 Operation Procedure Using Laser Marker<br />

This section describes the basic operation procedures using external control.<br />

� Flow Chart<br />

<strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> using I/O<br />

<strong>Control</strong>ler remote switch ON<br />

Turn ON key switch <strong>of</strong> laser marker controller<br />

<strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> using<br />

communication port<br />

� �<br />

Shift to remote mode.<br />

Refer to “3-1-3 Shift to Remote Mode” <strong>of</strong> <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />

RUN Mode<br />

(Console or monitor is used)<br />

� �<br />

Select File Select File<br />

Select fi le No. using external control.<br />

Select fi le on console and<br />

Monitor screen.<br />

� �<br />

Start Laser pumping Start Laser pumping<br />

Turn ON the laser using the external control.<br />

* After the start <strong>of</strong> pumping, marking is not started for about 20 seconds<br />

with LP-S*** type and about 15 seconds with LP-S***W type.<br />

Press the laser pumping switch<br />

on the controller.<br />

* After the start <strong>of</strong> pumping,<br />

marking is not started for about<br />

20 seconds with LP-S*** type<br />

and about 15 seconds with LP-<br />

S***W type.<br />

� �<br />

Open shutter Start RUN mode<br />

Turn ON the shutter using the internal control.<br />

READY Output ON<br />

The trigger is ready for reception.<br />

Trigger Input ON<br />

The product starts marking.<br />

Marking<br />

Select “RUN” on the monitor<br />

screen, and Press “START”.<br />

� �<br />

�<br />

�<br />

• For turning into remote mode, there are two methods other than turning on the remote switch <strong>of</strong> the controller,<br />

(1) inputting remote <strong>of</strong> terminal block and (2) turning on the key switch for remote.<br />

For details, refer to “3-1-3 Shift to Remote Mode” <strong>of</strong> <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />

• It is available to combine I/O and the communication port for external control.<br />

9


1-1-3 Shift to Remote Mode<br />

In case <strong>of</strong> controlling the laser marker by external control such as I/O and communication port, it needs to shift the laser<br />

marker to “Remote Mode”. Before performing the external control by either method shown below, shift the laser marker to<br />

“Remote Mode”.<br />

Press remote switch in front <strong>of</strong> controller.<br />

Turn ON “Remote Input” from the terminal block.<br />

10<br />

* Check that DIP switch No. 5 is OFF.<br />

“1-1-5 DIP Switch” (P.12)<br />

* Check that DIP switch No. 5 is ON.<br />

“1-1-5 DIP Switch” (P.12)<br />

Turn ON the key switch <strong>of</strong> the controller, and shift the mode <strong>of</strong> the laser marker into the<br />

remote one automatically.<br />

* Check that DIP switch No. 5 is OFF, and No. 6 is ON.<br />

“1-1-5 DIP Switch” (P.12)


1-1-4 Shift to RUN Mode<br />

When the laser marker is activated in “RUN Mode”, the internal shutter is opened, and the device is ready for receiving<br />

trigger from input terminal.Since the setting contents <strong>of</strong> the trigger is refl ected in “RUN Mode”, start “RUN Mode” after<br />

performing “Trigger Setting” (Refer to Operation <strong>Manual</strong>).<br />

Shift the mode <strong>of</strong> the laser marker into “RUN Mode” following the following screens.<br />

Operator Adjusting Screen Maintenance Inspection<br />

Screen<br />

File Screen Character Setting Screen<br />

Function Setting Screen Marking Condition Screen Laser Setting Screen Trigger Setting Screen<br />

Common Setting Screen Image Display<br />

The � shows that the condition is already set.<br />

Pressing “START” on operation screen changes the marking mode into “RUN Mode”. The internal shutter<br />

<strong>of</strong> the laser marker is opened by pressing “START”, and the laser marker is ready for receiving trigger from<br />

input terminal.<br />

Shift Procedure to RUN Mode<br />

1 Change<br />

2 Press<br />

the marking mode into “RUN”.<br />

“START”.<br />

The internal shutter <strong>of</strong> the laser marker is opened by<br />

pressing “START”, and the laser marker is ready for<br />

receiving trigger from input terminal.<br />

11


1-1-5 DIP Switch<br />

Connecting Sample with <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong>ler<br />

No.1 Switch for system reservation. Keep OFF <strong>of</strong> this switch.<br />

No.2 Selects external control method <strong>of</strong> “Laser Pumping” and “Shutter <strong>Control</strong>”.<br />

ON indicates “Laser Pumping” and “Shutter <strong>Control</strong>” are externally controlled using<br />

communication port.<br />

OFF indicates “Laser Pumping” and “Shutter <strong>Control</strong>” are controlled using input terminal.<br />

* Turn on this switch when using the laser radiation command (SPT).<br />

No.3 Sets buzzer for error occurrence.<br />

ON This setting does not sound buzzer when occurring error.<br />

OFF This setting sounds buzzer when occurring error.<br />

No.4 Selects valid/invalid for password lock when shifting screen from operation to each setting one.<br />

ON Sets invalid for password lock.<br />

OFF Sets valid for password lock.<br />

Refer to “When password is forgotten” for the detail.<br />

No.5 Selects shifting method for the remote mode.<br />

ON <strong>Control</strong>s switching to the remote mode from the input terminal block.<br />

OFF In case <strong>of</strong> shifting mode into remote mode using the remote switch on the front <strong>of</strong> the<br />

controller. (To set No.6 to ON, set No.5 to OFF.)<br />

No.6 Selects status when the key switch is turned ON.<br />

ON Shifts to the remote mode by setting the key switch to ON.<br />

OFF Does not shift to the remote mode by turning the key switch ON.<br />

(To set No.5 to ON, set No.6 to OFF.)<br />

CAUTION<br />

No.7<br />

No.8<br />

12<br />

If the DIP switch No.5 and No.6 are used while turned on, construct a system for re-pumping the laser manually<br />

as safety protection measures after stop <strong>of</strong> the laser radiation.<br />

The command mode <strong>of</strong> the serial communication switches over according to the combination <strong>of</strong> ON and OFF <strong>of</strong><br />

the No.7 and No.8.<br />

LP-S Mode LP-F10 Mode LP-F10W Mode<br />

No.7…OFF<br />

No.8…OFF<br />

No.7…ON<br />

No.8…OFF<br />

• The DIP switch is located in rear <strong>of</strong> the controller. (P.32)<br />

• The all DIP switch is set to OFF side at factory shipment.<br />

• Switch the DIP switch with the power be shut down.<br />

No.7…OFF<br />

No.8…ON


2<br />

<strong>Control</strong> by I/O


2-1 Basics<br />

2-1-1 Before <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> <strong>of</strong> Laser Marker by I/O<br />

This paragraph explains the procedures necessary prior to external control <strong>of</strong> laser marker by I/O.<br />

� Flow Chart<br />

14<br />

1 Check DIP Switch.<br />

When you control “Laser Pumping” and “Shutter <strong>Control</strong>” by input terminal, check that the No.2 DIP<br />

swith is in OFF position.<br />

* Set DIP switch (No. 2) to ON when “Laser pumping” and “Shutter <strong>Control</strong>” is controlled by communication<br />

port.<br />

2 Turn ON the key switch <strong>of</strong> laser marker controller.<br />

3 Turn ON the remote switch.<br />

Change the mode to remote mode.<br />

4 <strong>External</strong>ly control the laser marker.<br />

<strong>Control</strong> the laser marker in accordance with the description in this section.<br />

• The following two methods are available to change the mode to the remote mode without turning on<br />

the remote switch on the controller; 1) Input the remote input (REMOTE IN) on the input terminal block,<br />

and 2) Turn on the key switch. Refer to “1-1-3 Shift to Remote Mode” (P.10).<br />

• The laser marker can be controlled by I/O and communication port combined. The external control<br />

method should be decided for “Laser <strong>Control</strong>” and “Shutter <strong>Control</strong>” by No.2 DIP switch beforehand.


2-1-2 Terminal Connector<br />

� Input Terminal/Output Terminal<br />

User Side Input Terminal BLZF5.08/20/180LR SN OR<br />

User Side Output Terminal BLZF5.08/14/180LR SN OR<br />

<strong>Control</strong>ler Side Input Terminal SL-SMT5.08/20/180LF BOX3.2 SN SW<br />

<strong>Control</strong>ler Side Output Terminal SL-SMT5.08/14/180LF BOX3.2 SN SW<br />

� I/O Connector<br />

<strong>Control</strong>ler Side<br />

(Female Connector)<br />

Attached connector HDCB-37 PF (05)<br />

Attached connector cover HDC-CTH 1<br />

Applicable connector on main body FDCD-37 S<br />

� Interlock Connector<br />

2<br />

3<br />

1<br />

<strong>Control</strong>ler Side<br />

(Female<br />

Connector)<br />

1 2<br />

3<br />

On the controller<br />

(Female<br />

Connector)<br />

On the controller<br />

(Female Connector)<br />

1. Turn a hook<br />

2. Demountable Input/Output<br />

Weidmueller Japan Co.,Ltd.<br />

* This view is facing the connecting surface.<br />

* This view is facing the connecting surface.<br />

Hirose Electoric Co., Ltd.<br />

Attached connector SRCN6A13-3P Japan Aviation Electronics<br />

Industry, Ltd.<br />

Applicable connector on main body SRCN2A13-3S<br />

For the interlock connector connecting samples, refer to “Interlock Connector Connecting Samples” on P.18.<br />

15


Connecting Samples (Independent Operation <strong>of</strong> Laser Marker)<br />

� at NPN<br />

• Connect X1[24V], X2[IN COM.] and Y1[0V], Y2[OUT COM.] as I/O power supply for marking.<br />

• Connect X16[LASER STOP2A], X17[LASER STOP2B] and X18[OUT COM.] to release the emergency stop function.<br />

(Opening status between X16 - X17 - X18 activates emergency stop and changes the status <strong>of</strong> the device into invalid for<br />

marking.)<br />

• Connect X14[LASER STOP1] and X15[OUT COM.] to release the erroneous irradiation prevention function for the laser.<br />

(Opening the status between X14 - X15 closes the internal shutter, and changes the status <strong>of</strong> the device into invalid for<br />

marking.)<br />

• The following 3 connections are short-circuited by a short bar at factory shipment.<br />

16<br />

Y1:0V<br />

Y2:OUT COM<br />

X1:24V<br />

X2:IN COM<br />

X6:TRIG.IN<br />

X12:OUT COM<br />

X14:LASER STOP1<br />

X15:OUT COM.<br />

X16:LASER STOP2A<br />

X17:LASER STOP2B<br />

X18:OUT COM.<br />

X16[LASER STOP2A] ― X17[LASER STOP2B] ― X18[OUT COM.]<br />

X14[LASER STOP1] ― X15[OUT COM.]<br />

X11[SHUTTER(B)] ― X12[OUT COM.]<br />

To Sensor<br />

• Short-circuiting IN COM. and OUT COM. in supplying power might cause the short out and also cause<br />

the trouble with the laser marker.<br />

• IN COM. and OUT COM. on the I/O connector are connected with IN COM. and OUT COM. on the<br />

Input/Output terminal respectively and internally. Therefore, inverting the power supply wiring for the<br />

Input/Output terminal and the I/O connector might cause a short circuit, resulting in the failure <strong>of</strong> the<br />

laser marker.<br />

• Please make sure to check the power wiring before running the laser marker.<br />

• “Output simulation” and monitorable “I/O check monitor” can simulate ON/OFF state on each connector.<br />

Please use these functions in checking the wiring. (Refer to the Operation <strong>Manual</strong>.)<br />

When the laser marker is to be controlled by external power such as PLC, connect + side <strong>of</strong> the external<br />

power to X2 [IN COM.] and - side to Y2 [OUT COM.]. In this case, make sure to connect nothing to<br />

X1:24V or Y1:0V.<br />

For details, refer to “2-1-6 Connecting Sample with <strong>External</strong> Devices” on P.24.<br />

VDD<br />

OUT<br />

0V<br />

To <strong>Manual</strong> Door<br />

To Emergency Stop Switch<br />

To Emergency Stop Switch


� at PNP<br />

Y2:OUT COM X2:IN COM<br />

Y3:24V<br />

X1:24V<br />

X3:0V<br />

X6:TRIG.IN<br />

X14:LASER STOP1<br />

X15:OUT COM.<br />

X16:LASER STOP2A<br />

X17:LASER STOP2B<br />

X18:OUT COM.<br />

• Connect X2[ IN COM.] andX3[0V], Y2[OUT COM.] and Y3[24V] as I/O power supply for marking.<br />

(NPN power is wired by a short bar at factory shipment. Wire after removing a short bar.)<br />

• Connect X16[LASER STOP2A], X17[LASER STOP2B] and X18[OUT COM.] to release the emergency stop function.<br />

(Opening status between X16 - X17 - X18 activates emergency stop and changes the status <strong>of</strong> the device into invalid for<br />

marking.)<br />

• Connect X14[LASER STOP1] and X15[OUT COM.] to release the erroneous irradiation prevention function for the laser.<br />

(Opening the status between X14 - X15 closes the auto-shutter, and changes the status <strong>of</strong> the device into invalid for<br />

marking.)<br />

• The following 5 connections are short-circuited by a short bar at factory shipment.<br />

To Sensor<br />

X16[LASER STOP2A] ― X17[LASER STOP2B] ― X18[OUT COM.]<br />

X14[LASER STOP1] ― X15[OUT COM.]<br />

X11[SHUTTER(B)] ― X12[OUT COM.]<br />

• Short-circuiting IN COM. and OUT COM. in supplying power might cause the short out and also cause<br />

the trouble with the laser marker.<br />

• IN COM. and OUT COM. on the I/O connector are connected with IN COM. and OUT COM. on the<br />

Input/Output terminal respectively and internally. Therefore, inverting the power supply wiring for the<br />

Input/Output terminal and the I/O connector might cause a short circuit, resulting in the failure <strong>of</strong> the<br />

laser marker.<br />

• Please make sure to check the power wiring before running the laser marker.<br />

• “Output simulation” and monitorable “I/O check monitor” can simulate ON/OFF state on each connector.<br />

Please use these functions in checking the wiring. (Refer to the Operation <strong>Manual</strong>.)<br />

When the laser marker is to be controlled by external power such as PLC, connect + side <strong>of</strong> the external<br />

power to Y2 [OUT COM.] and - side to X2 [IN COM.]. In this case, make sure to connect nothing to<br />

X1:24V or Y1:0V.<br />

For details, refer to “2-1-6 Connecting Sample with <strong>External</strong> Devices” on P.24.<br />

VDD<br />

OUT<br />

0V<br />

To <strong>Manual</strong> Door<br />

To Emergency Stop Switch<br />

To Emergency Stop Switch<br />

17


Interlock Connector Connecting Samples<br />

Interlock<br />

Input Terminal<br />

(<strong>Control</strong>ler)<br />

• The laser pumping is shut-<strong>of</strong>f by opening “1” and “3” in the interlock connector.<br />

• Connect 1.[INTERLOCK COM.] and 3.[INTERLOCK] on the contact for starting marking.<br />

(Between “1” and “3” are short-circuited by short bar at factory shipment.)<br />

18<br />

1 2<br />

3<br />

1. INTERLOCK COM<br />

3. INTERLOCK<br />

• Interlock connector input is connected to the operating coil <strong>of</strong> the internal relay. Connect 1.[INTERLOCK<br />

COM.] and 3.[INTERLOCK] in the interlock connector on the dry connecting point. Do not connect by the<br />

non-contact input such as a transistor.<br />

• Interlock Connectors have no interconnection with input/output terminal and common in the I/O<br />

connector.<br />

When primary AC power supply <strong>of</strong> the system is performed as a safety measure, process AC power cable to<br />

set the switch as follows.<br />

AC Power Cable<br />

Emergency Stop Switch<br />

Relay<br />

To Emergency<br />

Stop Switch


MEMO<br />

19


2-1-3 Input/Output Terminal<br />

� INPUT<br />

Term. No. Signal Name Description<br />

20<br />

X2 IN COM. Input common Input common.<br />

X4 RESERVE System reservation Do not connect externally.<br />

X5 REMOTE IN Remote input<br />

X6 TRIG. IN trigger input<br />

X7 ENC. A Encoder input (A)<br />

X8 ENC. B Encoder input (B)<br />

X9 LASER IN Laser pumping input<br />

X10 SHUTTER A Shutter control input (A)<br />

The mode is being the remote mode while it remains in ON position.<br />

(Turn <strong>of</strong>f the input when the remote mode is not selected.)<br />

Starts marking by edge <strong>of</strong> input ON. Performs marking during input<br />

ON at proportional marking.<br />

A phase <strong>of</strong> encoder input.<br />

(This is not usable for LP-S***W type. Do not connect externally.)<br />

B phase <strong>of</strong> encoder input.<br />

(This is not usable for LP-S***W type. Do not connect externally.)<br />

Pump laser during input ON.* After the start <strong>of</strong> pumping, marking<br />

is not started for about 20 seconds with LP-S*** type and about 15<br />

seconds with LP-S***W type.<br />

Open the internal shutter inside the head during input ON. (The<br />

terminal control is available during shutter control Input (B) ON.)<br />

X11 SHUTTER B Shutter control input (B) <strong>Control</strong> by the shutter control input (A) is available during input ON.<br />

The input becomes ON by short-circuiting between shutter control<br />

X12 OUT COM. Output common input (B) and OUT COM. Normally, use these terminals in input ON.<br />

X13 ALARM RES. Alarm reset input<br />

Remove the cause <strong>of</strong> alarm, and reset it and automatically recover<br />

the system at ON.<br />

X14 LASER STOP 1 Laser Stop 1 Opening the status between X14 - X15 closes the internal shutter,<br />

and changes the status <strong>of</strong> the device into invalid for marking. The<br />

X15 OUT COM. Output common short-circuiting between X14 - X15 to operate marking.<br />

X16 LASER STOP 2A Laser Stop 2 Input (A)<br />

X17 LASER STOP 2B Laser Stop 2 Input (B)<br />

X18 OUT COM. Output common<br />

X19 RESERVE System reservation Do not connect externally.<br />

X20 RESERVE System reservation Do not connect externally.<br />

� OUTPUT<br />

Opening the status between X16 - X18 (Laser Stop 2 input (A) or<br />

Laser Stop 2 Input (B)) activates the emergency stop, and changes<br />

the status <strong>of</strong> the device into invalid for marking X16 - X18.<br />

(Setting a redundant circuit on the equipment side is available.)<br />

Term. No. Signal Name Description<br />

Y2 OUT COM. Output common Common terminal for each output.<br />

Y4 STAND BY Standby output<br />

Y5 REMOTE OUT Remote output Output ON at remote mode.<br />

Y6 READY Marking ready output<br />

Output ON during laser pumping. Output ON in approximately 70<br />

seconds after key Switch ON is activated.<br />

Output ON when marking function available (TRIG. IN input<br />

acceptable status).


Term. No. Signal Name Description<br />

Y7 MARKING Marking output This signal is turned to ON during marking (laser radiation).<br />

Y8 MARK END Marking end output<br />

Y9 LASER OUT Laser pumping output Output ON during laser pumping.<br />

Output ON at the end <strong>of</strong> marking One-shot output with the length <strong>of</strong><br />

2 to 510 msec preset.<br />

Y10 SHUTTER OUT Shutter opening output Output ON during shutter opening<br />

Y11 RESERVE System reservation Do not connect externally.<br />

Y12 WARNING Warning output<br />

Y13 ALARM Alarm output<br />

Y14 RESERVE System reservation Do not connect externally.<br />

� Power Supply<br />

Output OFF at warning occurrence. “Trigger Warning detection<br />

during marking” is output with one-shot.<br />

Output OFF at alarm occurrence. The detailed description for the<br />

alarm is displayed with a code at 7-segment <strong>of</strong> controller.<br />

Term. No. Signal Name Description<br />

X1<br />

Y3<br />

X3<br />

Y1<br />

24V OUT +24V<br />

0V OUT 0V<br />

I/O power supply for marking +24VDC (Max. 300mA)<br />

(X1 and Y3 are connected internally. Use as the power supply when<br />

operating laser marker alone. Do not connect extenal power.)<br />

Power supply for external device 0V<br />

(X1 and Y3 are connected internally. Use as the power supply when<br />

operating laser marker alone. Do not connect extenal power.)<br />

• Respective inputs are bidirectional photo-coupler inputs. The regulation for input ON is based on the ON<br />

status <strong>of</strong> photo-coupler.<br />

• Respective outputs are photo-coupler outputs. The regulation for output ON is based on the ON status <strong>of</strong><br />

photo-coupler.<br />

• Connect X2[IN COM.] and Y2 [OUT COM.] to the power supply.<br />

at NPN X2[IN COM.] ― +V, Y2[OUT COM.] ― GND<br />

at PNP X2[IN COM.] ― GND, Y2[OUT COM.] ― +V<br />

* For further details, please refer to “Connection Sample (In case <strong>of</strong> operating only laser marker)” (P.24).<br />

Do not mix the connecting pattern for NPN and PNP<br />

• Make sure <strong>of</strong> using X3 or Y1 in GND <strong>of</strong> X1 and Y3. Do not mix the connecting pattern for NPN and PNP.<br />

• X12, X15, X18, and Y2 are connected internally.<br />

• Short-circuiting IN COM. and OUT COM. in supplying power might cause the short out and also cause<br />

the trouble with the laser marker.<br />

21


2-1-4 Signals and Details <strong>of</strong> I/O Connector<br />

� INPUT<br />

22<br />

No. Signal Name Description<br />

1 IN COM. Input common<br />

2 SET Set input<br />

3 D0<br />

Internally connected to the IN COM. on the input terminal block. It is<br />

not necessary to be connected if connected at the input terminal block.<br />

Switched to ON when setting the fi le No., parallel data No., count-up<br />

value, count-down value and count reset.<br />

4 D1<br />

5<br />

6<br />

D2<br />

D3<br />

� File No.<br />

Specifi es the fi le saved in the controller. Specify the fi le No. by D0 to<br />

D15 while inputting SELECT 0 to 2 and set it by SET.<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

D4<br />

D5<br />

D6<br />

D7<br />

D8<br />

D9<br />

D10<br />

D11<br />

Number input<br />

File No.<br />

Parallel data No.<br />

Counter Reset No.<br />

Count-up<br />

Count-down<br />

(Denote the number to be<br />

selected by binary number, and<br />

select by ON/OFF. For details,<br />

refer to “Input Signal on I/O<br />

Connector” (P.29))<br />

� Parallel data No.<br />

Specifi es the parallel data value for rank <strong>of</strong>fset at D0 to D15. Specify<br />

the parallel data No. by D0 to D15 while inputting SELECT and set it<br />

by SET.<br />

� Counter Reset No.<br />

Specifi es the counter No. to be reset. Specify the counter No. to be<br />

reset by D0 to D7 while inputting SELECT 0 to 2 and set it by SET to<br />

reset it.<br />

� Count-up<br />

Specifi es the step-up value <strong>of</strong> counter. Specify the counter number at<br />

D0 to D7, and step value to be counted up at D8 to D15 and set it by<br />

SET to count up by step value specifi ed while inputting SELECT 0 to 2.<br />

� Count-down<br />

Specifi es the step-down value <strong>of</strong> counter. Specify the counter number<br />

15 D12<br />

at D0 to D7, and step value to be counted down at D8 to D15 and<br />

set it by SET to count down by step value specifi ed while inputting<br />

16 D13<br />

SELECT 0 to 2.<br />

17 D14<br />

18 D15<br />

19 RESERVE System reservation Do not connect externally.<br />

20 SELECT0 Select 0 input<br />

21 SELECT1 Select 1 input<br />

22 SELECT2 Select 2 input<br />

Specify the object <strong>of</strong> number input.Input the number and set it while<br />

inputting to select 0 to 2 (SELECT 0 to SELECT 2), depending on the<br />

object <strong>of</strong> number input as follows:<br />

SELECT 0 SELECT 1 SELECT 2<br />

File No. OFF OFF OFF<br />

Parallel data No. ON OFF OFF<br />

Count-up OFF ON OFF<br />

Count-down ON ON OFF<br />

Counter Reset No. OFF OFF ON<br />

23 TIME HOLD Time hold input Performs marking <strong>of</strong> date, expiry, and lot, refl ecting the input ON time.<br />

24<br />

25<br />

RESERVE System reservation Do not connect externally.<br />

26 GUIDE Guide Laser Input<br />

27<br />

28<br />

29<br />

RESERVE System reservation Do not connect externally.<br />

Radiates guide laser selected by select input the number and set it<br />

while inputting to select 0 to 1 (SELECT 0 to SELECT 1), depending on<br />

the object <strong>of</strong> number input as follows:<br />

SELECT 0 SELECT 1<br />

Dual Pointer OFF OFF<br />

Guide laser (Marking character string) ON OFF<br />

Guide Laser (Marking Area) OFF ON<br />

Work image ON ON


� OUTPUT<br />

No. Signal Name Description<br />

30 RESERVE System reservation Do not connect externally.<br />

31 GAP Date gap output<br />

32 CEND 0/4 Counter 0/4 end output<br />

33 CEND 1/5 Counter 1/5 end output<br />

34 CEND 2/6 Counter 2/6 end output<br />

35 CEND 3/7 Counter 3/7 end output<br />

Turned to ON as a warning if the date being marked is different from<br />

that set by the internal clock when the laser marker is operated for the<br />

second successive day.<br />

Turned to ON when reaching to the end value <strong>of</strong> counter 0/4.<br />

* CEND 0 is selected as a default setting for this terminal. CEND 0/<br />

CEND 4 can be switched in the environment setting.<br />

Turned to ON when reaching to the end value <strong>of</strong> counter 1/5.<br />

* CEND 1 is selected as a default setting for this terminal. CEND 1/<br />

CEND 5 can be switched in the environment setting.<br />

Turned to ON when reaching to the end value <strong>of</strong> counter 2/6.<br />

* CEND 2 is selected as a default setting for this terminal. CEND 2/<br />

CEND 6 can be switched in the environment setting.<br />

Turned to ON when reaching to the end value <strong>of</strong> counter 3/7.<br />

* CEND 3 is selected as a default setting for this terminal. CEND 3/<br />

CEND 7 can be switched in the environment setting.<br />

36 SET OK Setting completion output Output ON at the end <strong>of</strong> marking. This is One-shot output.<br />

37 OUT COM. Output common<br />

Internally connected to the OUT COM. on the input terminal block. It is<br />

not necessary to be connected if connected at the input terminal block.<br />

IN COM. and OUT COM. on the I/O connector are connected with IN COM. and OUT COM. on the Input/<br />

Output terminal internally. If the power supply for I/O connector and for Input/Output terminal are set<br />

inversely, the short out might be occurred, and laser marker might be broken. Be sure to check the wiring<br />

before starting the laser marker without fail.<br />

2-1-5 Signals and Details <strong>of</strong> Interlock Connector<br />

No. Signal Name Description<br />

1<br />

INTERLOCK-<br />

COM.<br />

Interlock common Common signal for interlock.<br />

2 N.C. ― Do not connect externally.<br />

3 INTERLOCK Interlock Input<br />

Connecting to INTERLOCK-COM. can emit laser. The laser pumping is<br />

shut-<strong>of</strong>f in the construction <strong>of</strong> hardware by opening.<br />

• Interlock connector input is connected to the operating coil <strong>of</strong> the internal relay. Connect 1[INTERLOCK<br />

COM.] and 3[INTERLOCK] in the interlock connector on the dry connecting point. Do not connect by the<br />

non-contact input such as a transistor.<br />

• Interlock Connectors have no interconnection with input/output terminal and common in the I/O<br />

connector.<br />

23


2-1-6 Connecting Sample with <strong>External</strong> Devices<br />

This paragraph exemplifi es a basic interface sample with external device such as a sequencer.<br />

� NPN Connection Sample (In case <strong>of</strong> operating only laser marker)<br />

0V<br />

24<br />

PLC<br />

Input (X1)<br />

Input (X0)<br />

Input (X2)<br />

Y2:OUT COM<br />

Y5:REMOTE OUT<br />

Y6:READY<br />

Y13:ALARM<br />

ABCI<br />

X2:IN COM<br />

X6:TRIG.IN<br />

• Connect X2[IN COM.] and Y2[OUT COM.] as I/O power supply for marking. When the external power<br />

such as PLC controls the laser marker, connect an external power (+) to X2 [IN COM.], and connect an<br />

external power (-) to Y2 [OUT COM.].<br />

• Do not connect externally to X1 and Y3[24V], and X3 and Y1[0V] <strong>of</strong> Input/Output terminal.<br />

• Connect X16[LASER STOP2A], X17[LASER STOP2B] and X18[OUT COM.] to release the emergency<br />

stop function. (Opening status between X16 - X17 - X18 activates emergency stop and changes the<br />

status <strong>of</strong> the device into invalid for marking.)<br />

• Connect X14[LASER STOP1] and X15[OUT COM.] to release the erroneous irradiation prevention<br />

function for the laser. (Opening the status between X14 - X15 closes the auto-shutter, and changes the<br />

status <strong>of</strong> the device into invalid for marking.)<br />

• At the factory shipments, the following three positions are already short-circuited by short bars. When<br />

connecting to any external devices, remove the short bar(s) from the terminals to be used, to connect the<br />

devices.<br />

X16[LASER STOP2A] ― X17[LASER STOP2B] ― X18[OUT COM.]<br />

X14[LASER STOP1] ― X15[OUT COM.]<br />

X11[SHUTTER(B)] ― X12[OUT COM.]<br />

PLC<br />

X9:LASER IN<br />

X10:SHUTTER (A)<br />

X11:SHUTTER (B)<br />

24V<br />

PLC<br />

Output (Y3)<br />

Output (Y0)<br />

Output (Y1)<br />

Output (Y2)


� PNP Connection Sample (In case <strong>of</strong> operating only laser marker)<br />

24V<br />

PLC<br />

Input (X1)<br />

Input (X0)<br />

Input (X2)<br />

Y2:OUT COM<br />

Y5:REMOTE OUT<br />

Y6:READY<br />

Y13:ALARM<br />

X2:IN COM<br />

X6:TRIG.IN<br />

X9:LASER IN<br />

X10:SHUTTER (A)<br />

X11:SHUTTER (B)<br />

• Connect X2[IN COM.] and Y2[OUT COM.] as I/O power supply for marking. When the external power<br />

such as PLC controls the laser marker, connect an external power (+) to X2 [IN COM.], and connect an<br />

external power (-) to Y2 [OUT COM.].<br />

• Do not connect externally to X1 and Y3[24V], and X3 and Y1[0V] <strong>of</strong> Input/Output terminal.<br />

• Connect X16[LASER STOP2A], X17[LASER STOP2B] and X18[OUT COM.] to release the emergency<br />

stop function. (Opening status between X16 - X17 - X18 activates emergency stop and changes the<br />

status <strong>of</strong> the device into invalid for marking.)<br />

• Connect X14[LASER STOP1] and X15[OUT COM.] to release the erroneous irradiation prevention<br />

function for the laser. (Opening the status between X14 - X15 closes the auto-shutter, and changes the<br />

status <strong>of</strong> the device into invalid for marking.)<br />

• At the factory shipments, the following three positions are already short-circuited by short bars. When<br />

connecting to any external devices, remove the short bar(s) from the terminals to be used, to connect the<br />

devices.<br />

X16[LASER STOP2A] ― X17[LASER STOP2B] ― X18[OUT COM.]<br />

X14[LASER STOP1] ― X15[OUT COM.]<br />

X11[SHUTTER(B)] ― X12[OUT COM.]<br />

• Short-circuiting IN COM. and OUT COM. in supplying power might cause the short out and also cause<br />

the trouble with the laser marker.<br />

• IN COM. and OUT COM. on the I/O connector are connected with IN COM. and OUT COM. on the<br />

Input/Output terminal respectively and internally. Therefore, inverting the power supply wiring might<br />

cause a short circuit, resulting in the failure <strong>of</strong> the laser marker.<br />

• Please make sure to check the power wiring before running the laser marker.<br />

• Make sure that the power is turned OFF at wiring.<br />

• Do not apply the voltage exceeding the maximum applied voltage, or devices may be broken.<br />

• Do not apply the electric current for input (output) terminal exceeding the maximum output current, or<br />

devices may be broken.<br />

• “Output simulation” and monitorable “I/O check monitor” can simulate ON/OFF state on each connector.<br />

Please use these functions in checking the wiring. (Refer to the Operation <strong>Manual</strong>.)<br />

0V<br />

PLC<br />

Output (Y3)<br />

Output (Y0)<br />

Output (Y1)<br />

Output (Y2)<br />

25


2-1-7 Input Rating and Input Circuit<br />

The input rating and input circuit for the Input terminal and I/O connector are shown as follows:<br />

� Input Rating<br />

26<br />

Item Terminal Block, I/O Connector Input<br />

Input Form Bidirectional photo-coupler<br />

Operation<br />

ON voltage<br />

OFF Voltage<br />

Difference <strong>of</strong> voltages between input and input common: +8V or more<br />

Difference <strong>of</strong> voltages between input and input common: +4V or less<br />

Rated Input Voltage +24VDC ± 10%<br />

� Input Circuit<br />

Internal Circuit<br />

� NPN Sample<br />

Input<br />

� PNP Sample<br />

Input<br />

Input Common<br />

(IN COM.)<br />

Each Input<br />

Each Input<br />

Input Common<br />

(IN COM.)<br />

680Ω<br />

4.7KΩ*<br />

Input<br />

Input Common<br />

* : The resistance for X7, X8 encoder input terminals 2.7KΩ<br />

<strong>External</strong> Power<br />

(+24VDC)<br />

NPN Open<br />

Collector Output<br />

<strong>External</strong> Power<br />

(+24VDC)<br />

PNP Open<br />

Collector Output<br />

• Each input common (IN COM.) on the input terminal block and I/O connector are connected internally.<br />

• Wiring LASER STOP 1/LASER STOP 2 terminal by dry contact is recommended.<br />

• The product can compatible with both NPN transistor and PNP transistor. However, mixing use <strong>of</strong> NPN/<br />

PNP is impossible. Operate the product after selecting either NPN or PNP.<br />

• Do not short-circuit. It might cause the trouble with the laser marker.<br />

• Supply power to input commons (IN COM.) and output commons (OUT COM.).


2-1-8 Output Rating and Output Circuit<br />

The output rating and output circuit for the output terminal block and I/O connector are shown as follows:<br />

� Output Rating<br />

Item Output Terminal I/O Connector Output<br />

Output Form NPN/PNP Photo-coupler (insulated output)<br />

Protection function for<br />

short-circuit<br />

None<br />

Max. Output Current 50mA 20mA<br />

Max. Applied Voltage +30VDC<br />

Residual Voltage +2.0VDC or less<br />

� Output Circuit<br />

Internal Circuit<br />

� NPN Sample<br />

Output<br />

� PNP Sample<br />

Output<br />

Each Output<br />

Output Common<br />

(OUT COM.)<br />

Output Common<br />

(OUT COM.)<br />

Each Output<br />

Output<br />

Output Common<br />

<strong>External</strong> Power +30VDC MAX<br />

Load<br />

Load<br />

:Terminal Block Output MAX 50mA<br />

I/O Connector Output MAX 20mA<br />

<strong>External</strong> Power +30VDC MAX<br />

:Terminal Block Output MAX 50mA<br />

I/O Connector Output MAX 20mA<br />

• Each output common (OUT COM.) on the input/output terminal block and I/O connector are connected<br />

internally.<br />

• The product can compatible with both NPN transistor and PNP transistor. However, mixing use <strong>of</strong> NPN/<br />

PNP is impossible. Operate the product after selecting either NPN or PNP.<br />

• Do not short-circuit. It might cause the trouble with the laser marker.<br />

• Supply power to input commons (IN COM.) and output commons (OUT COM.).<br />

27


2-2 Input/Output Operation<br />

2-2-1 Input Signal<br />

� Input Terminal: INPUT<br />

Terminal block<br />

No.<br />

28<br />

X2<br />

X5<br />

X6<br />

X7/X8<br />

X9<br />

X10<br />

X11/<br />

X12<br />

X13<br />

X14/<br />

X15<br />

X16/<br />

X17/<br />

X18<br />

Input common (IN COM.)<br />

Name / Description<br />

Input common. In case <strong>of</strong> NPN connection, this terminal is connected to the “+ (plus)” side <strong>of</strong> power which is used for control. In<br />

case <strong>of</strong> PNP connection, this terminal is connected to the “- (minus)” side <strong>of</strong> power which is used for control.<br />

Remote input (REMOTE IN)<br />

This terminal is switched to ON when selecting the remote mode. (Turn it to OFF when selecting the mode other than remote<br />

mode.)<br />

The mode is being the remote mode while it remains in ON position.<br />

Set the DIP switch to select the remote mode with the remote input (REMOTE IN) from the terminal block.<br />

(Refer to “1-1-3 Shift to Remote Mode” (P.10).)<br />

Trigger input (TRIG. IN)<br />

Marking start signal. Marking is started by the edge <strong>of</strong> trigger input ON while marking ready output (READY) is ON.<br />

This signal also performs marking while the input is ON at even interval marking.<br />

Encoder input A phase/B phase (ENC.A/ENC.B)<br />

Encoder input at marking to movable bodies. Input up to 100kHz is possible for A and B phases respectively.<br />

• Use the [ENC.A] for input and connect the [ENC.B] to Input common if either <strong>of</strong> these encoders are used.<br />

• No. 7[ENC. A] and No.8 [ENC. B] are not used with the LP-S***W type. Do not connect externally.<br />

Laser pumping input (LASER IN)<br />

Laser pumping input. Laser is being pumped while the terminal remains in ON position. (Marking function is not available for 20<br />

seconds after starting pumping.)<br />

Shutter control input A (SHUTTER A)<br />

The internal shutter inside head is opened while the terminal remains in ON position. (The terminal control is available during<br />

shutter control Input B ON).<br />

Shutter control input B (SHUTTER B)/Output common (OUT COM.)<br />

<strong>Control</strong> by the shutter control input (A) is available during input ON. The input becomes ON by short-circuiting between X11:<br />

shutter control input (B) and X12: OUT COM. Normally, use these terminals in input ON.<br />

Do not use Shutter Input as the interlock.<br />

Alarm reset input (ALARM RES.)<br />

Alarm reset input. Removing the cause <strong>of</strong> alarm and switching the terminal to ON resets the device and automatically recovers<br />

the system <strong>of</strong> laser marker.<br />

Laser stop 1 (0V) (LASER STOP1) / Output common (OUT COM.)<br />

Laser stop input. This terminal is connected to the switch for the hand operated door on the device.<br />

Disconnecting (OPEN) between “LASER STOP -” and “LASER STOP +” closes the internal shutter inside the head to cut <strong>of</strong>f the<br />

laser radiation. (The function relating to safety must be shut <strong>of</strong>f mechanically. Therefore, wire these terminal by dry contact.)<br />

Laser stop 2 (A) (LASER STOP 2A) / Laser stop 2 (B) (LASER STOP 2B) / Output common (OUT COM.)<br />

Emergency stop input. This terminal is connected to the external emergency stop switch. Setting the Laser Stop 2 Input (A) and<br />

Output common to OPEN stops the laser pumping. When the Laser Stop 2 Input (B) is ON (short-circuiting between the Laser<br />

Stop 2 Input (B) and Output Common), control by the Laser Stop 2 Input (A) is available. (The function relating to safety must be<br />

shut <strong>of</strong>f mechanically. Therefore, wire these terminal by dry contact.)<br />

At the factory shipments, the following three positions are already short-circuited by short bars. When connecting to any<br />

external devices, remove the short bar(s) from the terminals to be used, to connect the devices.<br />

X16[LASER STOP2A] ― X17[LASER STOP2B] ― X18[OUT COM.]<br />

X14[LASER STOP1] ― X15[OUT COM.]<br />

X11[SHUTTER(B)] ― X12[OUT COM.]


� Input Signal on I/O Connector<br />

Terminal block<br />

No.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3 to 18<br />

Input common (IN COM.)<br />

Name / Description<br />

Input common. This terminal is internally connected to the input common on the input terminal block. It is not necessary to be<br />

connected if connected at the input terminal block.<br />

The inverting a power wiring <strong>of</strong> input/output terminal and I/O connector has trouble with the laser marker.<br />

Please make sure to check the power wiring before running the laser marker.<br />

Set input (SET)<br />

This terminal is switched to ON when inputting the selected number, which is set with the edge <strong>of</strong> “SET”.<br />

Turn it to ON while specifying the input for select 0 to 2 and the number (D0 to D15).<br />

Number input (D0 to D15)<br />

This terminal specifi es 1) fi le number<br />

2) counter number/count-up step<br />

3) counter number/count-down step<br />

4) counter reset number<br />

5) parallel data number is selected.<br />

The operation varies depending on the number selected at the Select 0 to 2 input (SELECT0 to SELECT2).Turn the number<br />

input (D0 to D15) and set input (SET) to ON while inputting SELECT0 to SELECT2.Refer to P.41 for select input.<br />

1) File number<br />

The fi le number registered inside the laser marker (0 to 2047) can be specifi ed by D0 to D15 and set by SET. Use binary<br />

number to indicate the fi le number to be selected. Switch each terminal (ON/OFF) to select “1” or “0”.<br />

ex) When specifying the fi le No. 618<br />

“618” is indicated as “0000 0010 0110 1010” by binary number <strong>of</strong> 16-bit. Set the lowest terminals to D0 and select the input<br />

from ON or OFF as shown in the charts below.<br />

Terminal Binary No. INPUT Terminal Binary No. INPUT<br />

D0 0 OFF D8 0 OFF<br />

D1 1 ON D9 1 ON<br />

D2 0 OFF D10 0 OFF<br />

D3 1 ON D11 0 OFF<br />

D4 0 OFF D12 0 OFF<br />

D5 1 ON D13 0 OFF<br />

D6 1 ON D14 0 OFF<br />

D7 0 OFF D15 0 OFF<br />

2) Counter number/count-up step<br />

The counter number and step value to be counted up can be specifi ed.<br />

Specify the counter number at D0 to D7, and step value to be counted up at D8 to D15 by binary number.<br />

ex) Counter number: 3 Step value: 2<br />

Counter number ‘3’ and count up step value ‘2’ is indicated as ‘0000 0010’ by binary number <strong>of</strong> 8-bit. Set the terminals D0 to<br />

D15 as shown in the charts below:<br />

D0 to D7: Counter number D8 to D15: Count-up step value<br />

Terminal Counter No. INPUT Terminal Count-up Step INPUT<br />

D0 0 OFF D8 0 OFF<br />

D1 1 OFF D9 1 ON<br />

D2 2 OFF D10 0 OFF<br />

D3 3 ON D11 0 OFF<br />

D4 4 OFF D12 0 OFF<br />

D5 5 OFF D13 0 OFF<br />

D6 6 OFF D14 0 OFF<br />

D7 7 OFF D15 0 OFF<br />

The inverting a power wiring <strong>of</strong> input/output terminal and I/O connector has trouble with the laser marker.<br />

Please make sure to check the power wiring before running the laser marker.<br />

29


30<br />

3) Counter number/count-down step<br />

The counter number and step value to be counted down are specifi ed.<br />

Specify the counter number at D0 to D7, and step value to be counted down at D8 to D15 by binary number and set by SET.<br />

ex) Counter number: 2 Step value: 1<br />

Specify the counter number at D0 to D7, and step value to be counted down at D8 to D15 by binary number.<br />

Counter number ‘2’ is indicated as ‘00000100’ in 8-bit binary numbers and count down step value ‘1’ is indicated as ‘0000 0001’<br />

in 8-bit binary numbers. Set the terminals D0 to D15 by turning them ON or OFF as shown in the charts below.<br />

D0 to D7: Counter number D8 to D15: Count-down step value<br />

Terminal Counter No. INPUT Terminal Count-up Step INPUT<br />

D0 0 OFF D8 1 ON<br />

D1 1 OFF D9 0 OFF<br />

D2 2 ON D10 0 OFF<br />

D3 3 OFF D11 0 OFF<br />

D4 4 OFF D12 0 OFF<br />

D5 5 OFF D13 0 OFF<br />

D6 6 OFF D14 0 OFF<br />

D7 7 OFF D15 0 OFF<br />

In case two or more counter numbers are specifi ed, all counters specifi ed are counted down by the step<br />

value specifi ed.<br />

4) Counter reset number<br />

Specify the counter reset number at D0 to D7 and set by SET.<br />

ex) When the counter Nos. 0 to 3 are reset.<br />

Use ON or OFF to select the item as shown below.<br />

D0 to D7: Counter number<br />

Terminal Counter No. INPUT<br />

D0 0 ON<br />

D1 1 ON<br />

D2 2 ON<br />

D3 3 ON<br />

D4 4 OFF<br />

D5 5 OFF<br />

D6 6 OFF<br />

D7 7 OFF<br />

In case two or more counter numbers are specifi ed, all counters specifi ed are reset.<br />

5) Parallel data number<br />

Specify the parallel data value for rank <strong>of</strong>fset at D0 to D15 by binary number and set by SET.<br />

ex) When specifying the parallel data 15 (the lower 8 bits are used)<br />

“15” is indicated as “0000 1111” by binary number <strong>of</strong> 8-bit. Set the terminals D0 to D7 as shown in the charts below:<br />

D0 to D7: Counter number<br />

Terminal Counter No. INPUT<br />

D0 1 ON<br />

D1 1 ON<br />

D2 1 ON<br />

D3 1 ON<br />

D4 0 OFF<br />

D5 0 OFF<br />

D6 0 OFF<br />

D7 0 OFF


Terminal block<br />

No.<br />

20<br />

to<br />

22<br />

23<br />

26<br />

Name / Description<br />

Select 0 input, select 1 input, select 2 input (SELECT0 to SELECT2)<br />

The object <strong>of</strong> number input such as fi le number, counter number/count-up step, counter number/count-down step, counter<br />

reset number and parallel data number is selected.<br />

Input the number and set it while inputting to select 0 to 2 (SELECT0 to SELECT2), depending on the object <strong>of</strong> number input<br />

as follows:<br />

SELECT0 SELECT1 SELECT2<br />

File No. OFF OFF OFF<br />

Counter number/count-up step OFF ON OFF<br />

Counter number/count-down step ON ON OFF<br />

Counter reset number OFF OFF ON<br />

Parallel data number ON OFF OFF<br />

* The select input (SELECT0 to SELECT2) is not necessary to be switched to ON when specifying the fi le number.<br />

The object <strong>of</strong> guide laser such as dual pointer, guide laser (marking character string), guide laser (marking area), and work<br />

image is selected. Switch the number input and set input (SET) to ON while inputting to select 0 to 1 (SELECT0 to SELECT2),<br />

depending on the object <strong>of</strong> number input.<br />

SELECT0 SELECT1<br />

Dual Pointer OFF OFF<br />

Guide laser (Marking character string) ON OFF<br />

Guide Laser (Marking Area) OFF ON<br />

Work image ON ON<br />

Time hold input (TIME HOLD)<br />

This terminal holds the time at ON and makes the marking <strong>of</strong> functional characters available when it is used refl ecting to the<br />

internal clock.<br />

By keeping the input ON, some functional characters based on the time at input ON is possible to be marked. The objected<br />

characters are current date, expiry date, and lot.<br />

The time at power ON is held when input is ON at power ON.<br />

Guide Laser Input (GUIDE)<br />

Radiates guide laser selected by select input the number and set it while inputting to select 0 to 2 (SELECT 0 to SELECT 2),<br />

depending on the object <strong>of</strong> number input.<br />

31


2-2-2 Output Signal<br />

� Output Terminal Output Signal<br />

Terminal block<br />

No.<br />

32<br />

Y2<br />

Y4<br />

Y5<br />

Y6<br />

Y7<br />

Y8<br />

Y9<br />

Y10<br />

Y12<br />

Y13<br />

Output common (OUT COM.)<br />

Name/Description<br />

Output common. In case <strong>of</strong> NPN connection, this terminal is connected to the "- (minus)" side <strong>of</strong> power which is used for control.<br />

In case <strong>of</strong> PNP connection, this terminal is connected to the "+ (plus)" side <strong>of</strong> power which is used for control.<br />

Standby output (STAND BY)<br />

Output ON during laser pumping. Output ON in approximately 70 seconds after key Switch ON is activated.<br />

Remote output (REMOTE OUT)<br />

Remote output. Output ON at remote mode. For external control with various connectors and communication port, it must be<br />

ON.<br />

The remote output is turned ON when the remote input <strong>of</strong> input terminal is turned ON or the remote switch on the front <strong>of</strong> the<br />

controller is pressed.<br />

Set the DIP switch to select the remote mode with the remote input <strong>of</strong> the input terminal.<br />

"1-1-3 Shift to Remote Mode" (P.10)<br />

Marking ready output (READY)<br />

Marking ready output. Output ON when marking function available (trigger input acceptable status).<br />

For rank <strong>of</strong>fset marking, the READY is not output unless the SET is input.<br />

Marking output (MARKING)<br />

Marking output. This signal is turned to ON during marking (laser radiation). In case the marking time is shorter than the set<br />

one-shot time, the signal remains ON until the one-shot time ends.<br />

Marking end output (MARK END)<br />

Marking end output. Output ON when marking ends. Time to turn the output ON may be set to any value between 2 to 510ms<br />

by one-shot output in the "environment setting screen". (The initial value is 40ms.)<br />

Marking ready is output even during one-shot output <strong>of</strong> marking end output.<br />

When trigger input (TRIG.IN) is input during marking ready output, marking is started.<br />

Marking end output is output even when marking is interrupted by the Emergency stop button or laser stop<br />

input during marking.<br />

Laser pumping output (LASER OUT)<br />

Output ON when laser pumping is completed. (Nothing is output for about 20 seconds after starting laser pumping.)<br />

Shutter opening output (SHUTTER)<br />

Output ON during internal shutter <strong>of</strong> the laser marker head opening.<br />

Warning output (WARNING)<br />

Output OFF at warning occurrence.<br />

Contents <strong>of</strong> warning are indicated by codes in controller fi le No./error code indicator.<br />

For contents <strong>of</strong> warning, refer to "4-2 Error Indication" (P.204).<br />

In addition, warning error generated in the event <strong>of</strong> TRIG. IN during marking is one-shot output in 2 to 510ms depending on the<br />

setting. (Indicated for about 2 seconds in fi le No./error code indicator.)<br />

Alarm output (ALARM)<br />

Output OFF at alarm occurrence. Laser pumping output OFF at the same time as this output.<br />

Contents <strong>of</strong> alarm are indicated by codes in controller fi le No./error code indicator.<br />

For contents <strong>of</strong> alarm, refer to "4-2 Error Indication" (P.204).


� I/O Connector Output Signal<br />

Terminal block<br />

No.<br />

31<br />

32<br />

33<br />

34<br />

35<br />

36<br />

37<br />

Date gap output (GAP OUT)<br />

Name/Description<br />

Output ON as a warning when date different from preset date in the internal clock is marked after the date changes with the time<br />

hold input ON.<br />

Counter 0/4 end output (CEND 0/4)<br />

Turned to ON when reaching to the end value <strong>of</strong> counter 0/4. Counter 0 end output or counter 4 end output is selected in the<br />

laser marker environment setting (refer to Operation <strong>Manual</strong>).<br />

Counter 1/5 end output (CEND 1/5)<br />

Turned to ON when reaching to the end value <strong>of</strong> counter 1/5. Counter 1 end output or counter 5 end output is selected in the<br />

laser marker environment setting (refer to Operation <strong>Manual</strong>).<br />

Counter 2/6 end output (CEND 2/6)<br />

Turned to ON when reaching to the end value <strong>of</strong> counter 2/6. Counter 2 end output or counter 6 end output is selected in the<br />

laser marker environment setting (refer to Operation <strong>Manual</strong>).<br />

Counter 3/7 end output (CEND 3/7)<br />

Turned to ON when reaching to the end value <strong>of</strong> counter 3/7. Counter 3 end output or counter 7 end output is selected in the<br />

laser marker environment setting (refer to Operation <strong>Manual</strong>).<br />

• The counter does not operate at test marking.<br />

• Counting is activated from the initial value again when the counter reaches to the end value.<br />

• Only the counter input with the character string is available.<br />

Set output (SETOK)<br />

Output ON when number inputs such as fi le No. and counter reset are set. (Acceptance <strong>of</strong> set input is indicated.) Time to turn<br />

the output ON may be set to any value between 2 to 510ms by one-shot output in the "environment setting screen". (The initial<br />

value is 40ms.)<br />

Set output is a response to set input. Confi rm marking enabled state (trigger input acceptance status)<br />

by the marking ready output.<br />

Output common (OUT COM.)<br />

Output common. Connected to the OUT COM. on the input/output terminal. Connection is not necessary if it is connected via the<br />

terminal block.<br />

2-2- 3 Power<br />

The inverting a power wiring <strong>of</strong> input/output terminal and I/O connector has trouble with the laser marker.<br />

Please make sure to check the power wiring before running the laser marker.<br />

� Input Terminal/Output Terminal Power<br />

Terminal block<br />

No.<br />

X1/Y3<br />

X3/Y1<br />

24V (+24V OUT)<br />

Name/Description<br />

Power (+24V) to operate the laser marker independently. Maximum output current is 300mA. Do not connect external power to<br />

this part.<br />

0V (0V OUT)<br />

Power (0V) to operate the laser marker independently. Do not connect external power to this part.<br />

33


2-3 Timing Chart<br />

34<br />

ON/OFF on the timing chart does not intend to High/Low <strong>of</strong> voltage level. It intends to ON/OFF <strong>of</strong> operation.<br />

2-3-1 Basic Input/Output<br />

[Input]<br />

KEY SWITCH<br />

REMOTE INPUT<br />

(Remote SW)<br />

LASER IN<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

(Open) ON<br />

SHUTTER CONTROL<br />

INPUT B<br />

(Close) OFF<br />

(Open) ON<br />

SHUTTER CONTROL<br />

INPUT A<br />

(Close) OFF<br />

ON<br />

TRIG. IN<br />

[Output]<br />

STANDBY<br />

REMOTE OUT<br />

LASER OUT<br />

SHUTTER<br />

ALARM<br />

(Active Low)<br />

WARNING<br />

(Active Low)<br />

READY<br />

MARKING<br />

MARK END<br />

(Open)<br />

(Close)<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

T1<br />

T2<br />

Item Hour Remarks<br />

T1 approx. 70 sec. System Starting Time. Change to the remote mode after system start-up.<br />

T3<br />

T3<br />

T2 about 20 seconds/about 15 seconds After pumping input ON, marking is not started for about 20 seconds with LP-S*** type and about 15 seconds with LP-S***W type.<br />

T3 ―<br />

T3<br />

1. When laser pumping is completed<br />

Period for creating marking data. It varies depending on the quantity <strong>of</strong> data to be marked.<br />

2. When laser pumping is not completed<br />

Period for creating marking data or period until the laser pumping is completed. The longer one <strong>of</strong><br />

the two above is employed.<br />

T4 10ms or more Keep the ON status for 10ms or more.<br />

T5 2 to 510ms<br />

This is a one-shot output. Set the one-shot time on the environment setting screen. There is a small<br />

margin <strong>of</strong> error for the setting value.<br />

T4<br />

T5


2-3-2 Trigger Marking<br />

READY<br />

TRIG.IN<br />

MARKING<br />

WARNING<br />

(Active low)<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

T1 T1<br />

Item Hour Remarks<br />

T1 10ms or more Keep the ON status for 10ms or more.<br />

T2 2 to 510ms<br />

One-shot output. Set the one-shot time on the environment setting screen. There is a margin for the<br />

setting value.<br />

• The marking is started when TRIG. IN is turned to ON while either the delay time or delay distance is 0.<br />

• A warning occurs when TRIG. IN is detected during marking while “Trigger warning detection at marking”<br />

in the environment setting is ON.<br />

2-3-3 Equidistant Marking (Flying Object Marking)<br />

Marking ready output<br />

Trigger input<br />

Marking output<br />

Marking end output<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

T2 T2 T2<br />

Item Hour Remarks<br />

T1 10ms or more Keep the ON status for 10ms or more.<br />

T1<br />

T2 - The time when the work travels the distance set by marking interval.<br />

T3 2 to 510ms<br />

T3<br />

T3<br />

T3<br />

One-shot output.Set the one-shot time on the environment setting screen. There is a small margin <strong>of</strong><br />

error for the setting value.<br />

• No marking functions for mobile devices are implemented to LP-S***W type.<br />

• Equidistant marking is performed while TRIG. IN is ON.<br />

• The laser marker stops after marking is completed if TRIG. IN is turned to OFF during marking.<br />

• Equidistant marking is performed after travels the distance that is set in the “trigger ready”.<br />

T2<br />

T3<br />

35


2-3-4 Guide Laser<br />

36<br />

SHUTTER IN (A)<br />

SHUTTER IN (B)<br />

SELECT 0 to 1<br />

GUIDE LASER<br />

READY<br />

SHUTTER<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

(Open) ON<br />

(Close) OFF<br />

Item Hour Remarks<br />

T1 0.5ms or more Setup time for select input to the guide laser input.<br />

Select the target <strong>of</strong> guide laser input (dual pointer/guide laser (marking character) / guide laser (marking area) / work image)<br />

by select input. Switch the number input and set guide laser input to ON while inputting to select 0 to 1 (refer to the table<br />

below) depending on the object <strong>of</strong> guide laser.<br />

T1<br />

SELECT0 SELECT1<br />

Dual Pointer OFF OFF<br />

Guide laser (Marking character string) ON OFF<br />

Guide Laser (Marking Area) OFF ON<br />

Work image ON ON<br />

• Guide laser is enabled when laser stop 1/ interlock is input.<br />

• Guide indication by I/O guide laser input is unavailable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface <strong>of</strong><br />

controller is turned to ON.


2-3-5 Select File<br />

SELECT<br />

Number Input<br />

SET<br />

TRIG.IN<br />

READY<br />

MARKING<br />

SET OK<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

T1<br />

Item Hour Remarks<br />

T1 0.5ms or more Setup time for fi le No. input to the SET.<br />

T2 0ms or more Keep T2 until the SET OK is turned to ON.<br />

T3 2 to 510ms<br />

T4 ―<br />

T5 0ms or more<br />

T2<br />

T3<br />

T4<br />

T1<br />

One-shot output. Set the one-shot time on the environment setting screen. There is a margin for the<br />

setting value.<br />

1. When laser pumping is completed<br />

Period for creating marking data. It varies depending on the quantity <strong>of</strong> data to be marked.<br />

2. When laser pumping is not completed<br />

Period for creating marking data or period until the laser pumping is completed. The longer one <strong>of</strong><br />

the two above is employed.<br />

Detect the MARKING before inputting SET when changing <strong>of</strong> fi le No. and TRIG. IN input are performed<br />

at the same time.<br />

T6 10ms or more Keep the ON status for 10ms or more.<br />

SELECT0 (Terminal No.20) SELECT1 (Terminal No.21) SELECT2 (Terminal No.22)<br />

File No. OFF OFF OFF<br />

• If marking is still being performed at the time SET input is turned to ON, the fi le will be changed after<br />

marking is completed.<br />

• TRIG.IN is acceptable while the READY is turned to ON.<br />

• When changing the fi le No. per each marking, input the number in parallel with the mark trigger input and<br />

then input SET after 0.5ms has passed to achieve the minimum period for changing.<br />

T5<br />

T6<br />

T2<br />

T4<br />

37


2-3-6 Time Hold<br />

38<br />

TIME HOLD<br />

TRIG.IN<br />

MARKING<br />

READY<br />

GAP OUT<br />

Actual date<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

The time stamp <strong>of</strong> ON is preserved.<br />

(Example: 15 o'clock on 1st.)<br />

OFF<br />

Day 1<br />

Marking with<br />

the time at<br />

ON<br />

(3 p.m. at Day 1)<br />

Re-dating<br />

Marking with<br />

the time at<br />

ON<br />

(3 p.m. at Day 1)<br />

Day 2<br />

8 a.m. at Day 2<br />

(Marking with the time<br />

at 8 a.m. at Day 2)<br />

• The time at system startup is held when the laser marker is turned to on with the TIME HOLD ON.<br />

• If the TIME HOLD is set ON, the time is held in spite <strong>of</strong> switching the fi le No..<br />

2-3-7 Counter End<br />

READY<br />

TRIG.IN<br />

MARKING<br />

Counter 0~7<br />

End<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

T1 T1 T1 T1<br />

The end value is marked.<br />

Item Hour Remarks<br />

T1 10ms or more Keep the ON status for 10ms or more.<br />

Counter End outputs are kept till the next start <strong>of</strong> marking. Counter End output becomes OFF when shutter<br />

is closed.


2-3-8 Count-up/Count-down<br />

SELECT0 to 2<br />

INPUT<br />

Number Input<br />

(D0 to D7)<br />

(Counter No.)<br />

Number Input<br />

(D8 to D15)<br />

(Count UP/Count<br />

Down Step<br />

SET<br />

TRIG. IN<br />

SETOK<br />

READY<br />

MARKING<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

Select Value<br />

*1<br />

Count No.<br />

*2<br />

Up/Down<br />

Step Value<br />

T5<br />

Item Hour Remarks<br />

T1 0ms or more Keep T2 until the SET OK is turned to ON.<br />

T2 2 to 510ms<br />

T3 ―<br />

T1<br />

T2<br />

T3<br />

T4<br />

One-shot output. Set the one-shot time on the environment setting screen.<br />

There is a margin for the setting value.<br />

1. When laser pumping is completed<br />

Period for creating marking data. It varies depending on the quantity <strong>of</strong> data to be marked.<br />

2. When laser pumping is not completed<br />

Period for creating marking data or period until the laser pumping is completed. The longer one <strong>of</strong><br />

the two above is employed.<br />

T4 10ms or more Keep the ON status for 10ms or more.<br />

T5 0.5ms or more Setup time for number input to the SET.<br />

SELECT0 (Terminal No.20) SELECT1 (Terminal No.21) SELECT2 (Terminal No.22)<br />

Count-up OFF ON OFF<br />

Count-down ON ON OFF<br />

* 1: Please set up as follows: [Count-up]<br />

I/O Connector No. 20: Select 0 input = OFF, No 21: Select 1 input = ON, No. 22: Select 2 input = OFF.<br />

[Count-down]<br />

I/O Connector No. 20: Select 0 input = ON, No. 21: Select 1 input = ON, No. 22: Select 2 input = OFF.<br />

* 2: Specify the counter No. and step value for count-up/count-down at D0 to D7 and D8 to D15 respectively.Refer to “2-1-4<br />

Signals on I/O Connector” (P. 22) for the detail.<br />

* 3: When you wish to input the next fi xed input immediately after the trigger input, detect the marking output before the<br />

input <strong>of</strong> the fi xed input.<br />

39


2-3-9 Counter Reset<br />

TRIG. IN<br />

SELECT 0 to 2<br />

INPUT<br />

Number Input<br />

(D0 to D7)<br />

(Counter No.)<br />

SET<br />

READY<br />

MARKING<br />

SETOK<br />

40<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

T1<br />

Select Value<br />

*1<br />

Specify Counter No.<br />

*2<br />

Item Hour Remarks<br />

T1 10ms or more Keep the ON status for 10ms or more.<br />

T2 0ms or more Keep T2 until the SET OK is turned to ON.<br />

T3 2 to 510ms<br />

T4 ―<br />

T5<br />

T2<br />

T3<br />

One-shot output. Set the one-shot time on the environment setting screen. There is a margin for the<br />

setting value.<br />

1. When laser pumping is completed<br />

Period for creating marking data. It varies depending on the quantity <strong>of</strong> data to be marked.<br />

2. When laser pumping is not completed<br />

Period for creating marking data or period until the laser pumping is completed. The longer one <strong>of</strong><br />

the two above is employed.<br />

T5 0.5ms or more Setup time for number input to the SET.<br />

T4<br />

SELECT0 (Terminal No.20) SELECT1 (Terminal No.21) SELECT2 (Terminal No.22)<br />

Counter Reset No. OFF OFF ON<br />

* 1: Please set up as follows: I/O Connector No. 20: Select 0 input = OFF, No 21: Select 1 input = OFF, No 22: Select 2<br />

input = ON.<br />

* 2: Specify the counter No. to be reset at D0 to D7.Refer to “2-1-4 Signals on I/O Connector” (P. 22) for the detail.


2-3-10 Rank/Offset Marking<br />

TRIG.IN<br />

SELECT 0 to 2<br />

Number Input<br />

(D0~D15)<br />

SET<br />

READY<br />

MARKING<br />

SET OK<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

T7<br />

Select<br />

Value<br />

Parallel<br />

Data A<br />

Select<br />

Select<br />

∗ 1 Value ∗ 1 Value ∗ 1<br />

T2<br />

T2 T2 T2<br />

T1 T1<br />

Parallel<br />

Data A<br />

Parallel<br />

Data B<br />

T2<br />

Parallel<br />

Data C<br />

T6 T2<br />

Parallel<br />

Data B<br />

T3 T3 T3<br />

Item Hour Remarks<br />

T1 ― Period for creating marking data. It varies depending on the quantity <strong>of</strong> data to be marked.<br />

T2 0ms or more Keep T2 until the SET OK is turned to ON.<br />

T3 2 to 510ms<br />

T4 ―<br />

T4<br />

T5<br />

Parallel<br />

Data C<br />

One-shot output. Set the one-shot time on the environment setting screen. There is a margin for the<br />

setting value.<br />

When T5T1: T4 is 1ms or less.<br />

T6 0ms or more Turn ON the SET after MARKING is turned to ON.<br />

T7 0.5ms or more Setup time for parallel data No. input to the SET.<br />

SELECT0 (Terminal No.20) SELECT1 (Terminal No.21) SELECT2 (Terminal No.22)<br />

Serial Data Input ON OFF OFF<br />

* 1: Specify the parallel data number in D0 to D15.Refer to “2-1-4 Signals and Details <strong>of</strong> I/O Connector” (P.22)<br />

• The data that can be switched at D0 to D15 are 8-bit (256 kinds) + 8-bit (256 kinds) and 4-bit (16 kinds) +<br />

4-bit (16 kinds) + 4-bit (16 kinds) + 4-bit (16 kinds).<br />

• The next SET can be input at MARKING ON when the data to be marked is set.<br />

• In case <strong>of</strong> the rank <strong>of</strong>fset marking, one marking should be done for one SET input.<br />

• SET input is necessary to be set per every marking though the data to be marked is the same.<br />

• The READY is not output unless the SET is input.<br />

• Do not input the SET for the next parallel data until the MARKING is turned to ON after SET and marking<br />

trigger are input.<br />

• Input Rank Offset when the shutter opens.<br />

• Even though the number <strong>of</strong> the data without setting for the rank <strong>of</strong>fset is input, the MARKING READY is<br />

output.<br />

• When resetting the input for the rank <strong>of</strong>fset, close the shutter.<br />

• Input the SET for the parallel data when the laser pumping is completed, and the internal shutter opens.<br />

41


2-3-11 Laser Stop1<br />

[Input]<br />

[Output]<br />

42<br />

LASER IN<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

SHUTTER CONTROL<br />

INPUT A<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

SHUTTER CONTROL<br />

INPUT B<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

TRIG. IN<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

ALARM RES.<br />

LASER STOP<br />

INPUT 1<br />

READY<br />

MARK END<br />

ALARM<br />

(Active Low)<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

LASER OUT<br />

OFF<br />

(Open) ON<br />

SHUTTER<br />

MARKING<br />

WARNING<br />

(Active Low)<br />

(Close) OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

Item Hour Remarks<br />

T1 ―<br />

T3<br />

Marking Interrupted<br />

1. When laser pumping is completed<br />

Period for creating marking data. It varies depending on the quantity <strong>of</strong> data to be marked.<br />

2. When laser pumping is not completed<br />

Period for creating marking data or period until the laser pumping is completed. The longer one <strong>of</strong><br />

the two above is employed.<br />

T2 100ms or more Keep the ON status for 100ms or more.<br />

T3 2 to 510ms<br />

One-shot output. Set the one-shot time on the environment setting screen. There is a margin for the<br />

setting value.<br />

For release method <strong>of</strong> alarm and warning, refer to “Release Method <strong>of</strong> Alarm” (P.45) and “Release Method <strong>of</strong><br />

Warning” (P.45), respectively.<br />

T2<br />

T1


2-3-12 Laser Stop2<br />

[Input]<br />

[Output]<br />

LASER IN<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

SHUTTER CONTROL<br />

INPUT (A)<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

SHUTTER CONTROL<br />

INPUT (B)<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

TRIG. IN<br />

ALARM RES.<br />

LASER STOP<br />

INPUT 2A<br />

LASER STOP<br />

INPUT 2B<br />

READY<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

LASER OUT<br />

OFF<br />

(Open) ON<br />

SHUTTER<br />

MARKING<br />

MARK END<br />

ALARM<br />

(Active Low)<br />

(Close) OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

T1<br />

T2 T2 T2<br />

Item Hour Remarks<br />

T1 ―<br />

T1 T1<br />

T3<br />

Marking<br />

Interrupted<br />

1. When laser pumping is completed<br />

Period for creating marking data. It varies depending on the quantity <strong>of</strong> data to be marked.<br />

2. When laser pumping is not completed<br />

Period for creating marking data or period until the laser pumping is completed. The longer one <strong>of</strong><br />

the two above is employed.<br />

T2 100ms or more Keep the ON status for 100ms or more.<br />

T3 2 to 510ms<br />

One-shot output. Set the one-shot time on the environment setting screen. There is a margin for the<br />

setting value.<br />

For release method <strong>of</strong> alarm and warning, refer to “Release Method <strong>of</strong> Alarm” (P.45) and “Release Method <strong>of</strong><br />

Warning” (P.45), respectively.<br />

43


� The following table shows the operation <strong>of</strong> laser marker when Emergency stop button, Interlock<br />

input, and Laser Stop are operated.<br />

Laser pumping can not be started if Emergency stop button is pushed or Interlock Connecter/ Laser Stop 2 are opened.<br />

• The state <strong>of</strong> laser marker: Stand-by (Test Markig Mode - Laser pumping state, internal shutter CLOSE)<br />

Laser Marker Operations Laser Pumping Internal Shutter Error Indications Release Method<br />

44<br />

Push Emergency stop<br />

switch<br />

Interlock Connector<br />

CLOSE to OPEN<br />

Laser Stop1<br />

CLOSE to OPEN<br />

Laser Stop 2<br />

CLOSE to OPEN<br />

ON to OFF CLOSE None Push Emergency stop switch<br />

ON to OFF CLOSE None Close Interlock Connector<br />

Hold ON CLOSE None Close Laser Stop1<br />

ON to OFF CLOSE None Close Laser Stop2<br />

• The state <strong>of</strong> laser marker: Marking Ready ON (Remote/Run mode: Laser Pumping, internal shutter OPEN)<br />

Laser Marker Operations Laser Pumping Internal Shutter Error Indications Release Method<br />

Push Emergency stop<br />

switch<br />

Interlock Connector<br />

CLOSE to OPEN<br />

Laser Stop 1<br />

CLOSE to OPEN<br />

Laser Stop 2<br />

CLOSE to OPEN<br />

• The state <strong>of</strong> laser marker: Marking<br />

ON to OFF OPEN to CLOSE<br />

ON to OFF OPEN to CLOSE<br />

Hold ON OPEN to CLOSE<br />

ON to OFF OPEN to CLOSE<br />

Alarm:E002<br />

Emergency stop button <strong>of</strong> the controller is pushed.<br />

Alarm:E260<br />

Interlock has occurred on external terminal.<br />

Warning:E811<br />

Laser Stop1 <strong>of</strong> the input terminal is opened.<br />

Alarm:E004<br />

Laser Stop2 <strong>of</strong> the input terminal is opened.<br />

1. Push Emergency stop switch<br />

2.Turn on the alarm reset on the input terminal block<br />

1.Close Interlock Connector<br />

2.Turn on the alarm reset on the input terminal block<br />

Close Laser Stop1<br />

1. Close Laser Stop2<br />

2.Turn on the alarm reset on the input terminal block<br />

Laser Marker Operations Laser Pumping Internal Shutter Error Indications Release Method<br />

Push Emergency stop<br />

switch<br />

Interlock Connector<br />

CLOSE to OPEN<br />

Laser Stop 1<br />

CLOSE to OPEN<br />

Laser Stop 2<br />

CLOSE to OPEN<br />

ON to OFF OPEN to CLOSE<br />

ON to OFF OPEN to CLOSE<br />

ON to OFF OPEN to CLOSE<br />

ON to OFF OPEN to CLOSE<br />

Alarm:E002<br />

Emergency stop button <strong>of</strong> controller was pushed.<br />

Alarm:E260<br />

Interlock has occurred on external terminal.<br />

Alarm:E011<br />

Laser Stop1 <strong>of</strong> the input terminal is opened.<br />

Alarm:E004<br />

Laser Stop2 <strong>of</strong> the input terminal is opened.<br />

1. Push Emergency stop switch<br />

2.Turn on the alarm reset on the input terminal block<br />

1.Close Interlock Connector<br />

2.Turn on the alarm reset on the input terminal block<br />

1. Close Laser Stop1<br />

2.Turn on the alarm reset on the input terminal block<br />

1. Close Laser Stop2<br />

2.Turn on the alarm reset on the input terminal block<br />

• Shut the power supply forcibly for laser oscillation when Interlock Connector is opened.<br />

• Laser pumping can not be started if Emergency stop button is pushed or Interlock Connecter/Laser Stop<br />

2 are opened.


� Release Method <strong>of</strong> Alarm<br />

1) Remove a cause <strong>of</strong> alarm.<br />

2) Push the alarm reset switch on the front surface <strong>of</strong> the controller, or turn on the alarm reset on the input terminal block.<br />

Any alarms due to hardware’s problem cannot be released.<br />

� Release Method <strong>of</strong> Warning<br />

1) Remove a cause <strong>of</strong> warning.<br />

2) Turn <strong>of</strong>f the shutter control input, and close the internal shutter.<br />

3) In case that marking is executed again, make sure that the warning output is turned on, and then open the internal shutter.<br />

* For a warning against the trigger input is produced during marking, only the warning output <strong>of</strong> the set one-shot output is<br />

turned to <strong>of</strong>f, and then, it is released automatically.<br />

* For a warning against the laser stop1 is produced, only while the laser stop1 and OUTCOM. is opened turned to <strong>of</strong>f, and<br />

then it is released automatically when the laser stop1 and OUTCOM. is closed.<br />

45


2-3-13 Serial Data Marking<br />

The timing chart for the command for serial data input (SIN) <strong>of</strong> RS-232C is shown below. (“3-3 Serial Data Input (Code: SIN)”<br />

(P.125)<br />

%01:S0, %01:S1 (example when serial data number 0 and 1 are set)<br />

ON<br />

46<br />

SHUTTER<br />

TRIG. IN<br />

READY<br />

MARKING<br />

Command Data<br />

Response Data<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

0ms or more<br />

SINS00 SINS01 SINS00 SINS01<br />

ACK ACK ACK ACK<br />

• The timing chart above shows the data under the laser pumping is turned on.<br />

• The subsequent data can be transmitted when the marking output is turned on.<br />

• The command for serial data input (SIN) can be transmitted to the laser marker only under remote control,<br />

and when the internal shutter is opened (except when marking is being interrupted).<br />

• Whenever marking is performed, data <strong>of</strong> all set serial data function numbers must be transmitted.<br />

2-3-14 Serial Offset Marking<br />

The timing chart for the command for serial <strong>of</strong>fset (SEO) <strong>of</strong> RS-232C is shown below.<br />

Refer to “Serial Offset (Code: SEO)” (P.109) for detail.<br />

ON<br />

SHUTTER<br />

TRIG. IN<br />

READY<br />

MARKING<br />

Command Data<br />

Response Data<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

0ms or more<br />

SEOS SEOS<br />

ACK ACK<br />

• Transmission is available for the command for serial <strong>of</strong>fset (SEO) only during remote control, and when<br />

the internal shutter is opened (excepting during marking interruption).<br />

• When serial <strong>of</strong>fset is set with external <strong>of</strong>fset condition, data <strong>of</strong> set serial <strong>of</strong>fset must be transmitted by<br />

every marking.


3<br />

<strong>Control</strong> from Communication Port


3-1 Basics<br />

The communication port (RS-232C or Ethernet) can control the laser marker externally. This section describes the external<br />

control method using the communication port.<br />

3-1-1 Before <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> <strong>of</strong> Laser Marker by Communication Port<br />

� Flow<br />

48<br />

1. Check DIP Switch.<br />

When laser pumping/shutter control is controlled by RS-232C, check that the No.2 DIP switch is in the ON<br />

position.<br />

When laser pumping/shutter control is controlled by input terminal, turn OFF the No.2 DIP switch.<br />

2. Turn on the power switch for external device.<br />

3. Turn ON the key switch <strong>of</strong> laser marker.<br />

4. Coordinate the communication conditions between<br />

laser marker and external device.<br />

“3-1-4 Setting <strong>of</strong> Communication Conditions” (P.51)<br />

5. Set Remote Mode<br />

The following two methods are available to change the mode to the remote mode without turning on the remote<br />

switch on the controller; 1) Input the remote input (REMOTE) on the input terminal block, and 2) Turn on the key<br />

switch.<br />

(For details, refer to “1-1-3 Shift to Remote Mode” (P.10).)<br />

6. <strong>External</strong>ly control the laser marker.<br />

<strong>Control</strong> the laser marker in accordance with the description in this section.<br />

For communication with external devices, select either RS-232C or Ethernet port. (They cannot be used at<br />

the same time, or switched.) The tab selected in [Environment 3] on the environment setting screen indicates<br />

the valid communication port.<br />

The laser marker can be controlled by I/O and communication port combined. Besides the external control<br />

method should be decided for "Laser Pumping" and "Shutter <strong>Control</strong>" by No.2 DIP switch beforehand.


3-1-2 Communication Port Connector<br />

� RS-232C<br />

Use the “RS-232C” to perform serial communication control <strong>of</strong> laser marker by RS-232C.<br />

1<br />

6<br />

5<br />

9<br />

The connector shape is common to RETURN OUT and RS-232C.<br />

Connector on body : D-sub9 pin/male (No.4-40UNC-inch screw)<br />

Connector adaptable<br />

Cover adaptable<br />

:<br />

:<br />

17JE-13090-02(D1)<br />

17JE-09H1-1C<br />

DDK Ltd.<br />

Terminal No. Signal Function<br />

1 * DCD (CD) Carrier detection<br />

2 RXD (RD) Receiving data (TXD[SD] <strong>of</strong> external control device is connected.)<br />

3 TXD (SD) Transmission data (RXD[RD] <strong>of</strong> external control device is connected.)<br />

4 * DTR (ER) Data terminal ready<br />

5 GND (SG) Signal ground (GND[SG] <strong>of</strong> external control device is connected.)<br />

6 * DSR (DR) Data set ready<br />

7 * RTS (RS) Transmission request<br />

8 * CTS (CS) Clear to send<br />

9 * RI (CI) Ring indicator<br />

� Ethernet<br />

* Not used on laser marker<br />

The signal “GND” <strong>of</strong> RS-232C connector is common to the body <strong>of</strong> the laser marker.<br />

When Ethernet perform communication control <strong>of</strong> the laser marker, use an Ethernet port.<br />

Green LED<br />

Orange LED<br />

Connector: RJ-45 8-pole connector<br />

Light color Baud rate<br />

Green The indicator lights up while connected normally. It blinks during communication.<br />

Orange The indicator lights up only when baud rate is 1,000 megabits (1 gigabit).<br />

49


3-1-3 Communication Port Specifi cation<br />

� RS-232C<br />

50<br />

Connector D-sub9 pin/male<br />

Synchro system Start-stop method<br />

Communication Full-duplex transmission<br />

Stop Bits 1-bit / 2-bit<br />

Data Length 8-bit fi xed<br />

Baud Rate 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps<br />

Parity None / Even / Odd<br />

Check Sum OFF / ON<br />

Delimiter CR+LF / CR<br />

Transmission timer Timeout monitoring (sending: 10 sec, receiving: 10 sec)<br />

� Ethernet<br />

Communication protocol TCP/IP<br />

Standard IEEE802.3ab (1000BASE-T)/IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)/IEEE802.3 (10BASE-T)<br />

Applicable cable Category 5e or higher<br />

• To use an external device and the laser marker one to one ... Cross cable<br />

• To use an external device and the laser marker one to many ... Straight cable<br />

HUB (or router) adaptable 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T<br />

IP address 1.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255 (except 127 in the 1st octet) [Initial Value: 192.168.1.5]<br />

Subnet mask 128.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.254 [Initial Value: 255.255.255.0]<br />

Default gateway 1.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255 (except 127 in the 1st octet) [Initial Value: none (blank)]<br />

Port 1025 to 65534 (except 9090) [Initial Value: 9094]<br />

Transmission timer Timeout monitoring (sending: 10 sec, receiving: 10 sec)<br />

• Although the cable length between the devices is specifi ed as 100 m at maximum in the Ethernet standard,<br />

use <strong>of</strong> cable length below 10 m is recommended to avoid communication failure caused by noise and device<br />

malfunction.<br />

• The communication control <strong>of</strong> the laser marker through the Ethernet should be performed in a secure<br />

network environment.<br />

• Depending on the combination, there are cases where IP Address and Subnet Mask values cannot be set<br />

even if they are within the setting range.<br />

• Make sure that the IP address for the laser marker on the network is not overlapping the IP address for the<br />

PC.<br />

Otherwise, a system error occurs.<br />

Refer to “3-2 Communication Command and Function” (P.64) for the command on the communication<br />

command.


3-1-4 Setting <strong>of</strong> Communication Conditions<br />

To set each communication port in [Environment 3] on the environment setting screen, select the [RS-232C] or [Ethernet]<br />

tab.<br />

The selected tab indicates the valid communication port.<br />

� RS-232C<br />

Baud Rate :<br />

Specifi es the baud rate. The setting value varies as shown below every time the setting<br />

area is pressed.<br />

The setting varies as shown below every time the setting area is pressed.<br />

Data Length : Indicates the data length. 8-bit fi xed.<br />

Parity<br />

Stop Bits<br />

Delimit<br />

Check Sum<br />

� Ethernet<br />

1200bps ��2400bps ��4800bps ��9600bps ��19200bps ��38400bps<br />

[Default]<br />

Specifi es the parity. The setting value varies as shown below every time the setting area is<br />

pressed.<br />

The setting varies as shown below every time the setting area is pressed.<br />

None � Odd � Even<br />

Specifi es the stop bit.<br />

The setting varies as shown below every time the setting area is pressed.<br />

1bit � 2bit<br />

Sets the delimiter (code to identify the end <strong>of</strong> telegraphic message)<br />

The setting varies as shown below every time the setting area is pressed.<br />

CR � CR+LF<br />

Check Sum: Specify ON/OFF <strong>of</strong> check sum (error detection information).<br />

Check � to display � to turn on it.<br />

Check Sum indicates the lower 1-byte <strong>of</strong> adding result <strong>of</strong> value (binary) from the start code<br />

to the last data by converting it to two characters for ASCII.<br />

IP address Specifi es an IP address.<br />

Setting range: 1.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255 (except 127 in the 1st octet) [Initial Value:<br />

192.168.1.5]<br />

Subnet mask Specifi es a subnet mask.<br />

Setting range: 128.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.254 [Initial Value: 255.255.255.0]<br />

Default gateway Specifi es a default gateway.<br />

Setting range: 1.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255 (except 127 in the 1st octet) [Initial Value:<br />

none (blank)]<br />

Port Specifi es a port.<br />

Setting range: 1025 to 65534 (except 9090) [Initial Value: 9094]<br />

51


3-1-5 Connecting Sample with <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong>ler<br />

� RS-232C<br />

� Ethernet<br />

52<br />

RS-232C<br />

(<strong>Control</strong>ler)<br />

Terminal No. Signal Name<br />

2<br />

3<br />

5<br />

RXD<br />

TXD<br />

GND<br />

<strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> Device<br />

Signal Name<br />

RXD<br />

TXD<br />

GND<br />

DCD<br />

DTR<br />

DSR<br />

RTS<br />

CTS<br />

Terminal No.<br />

* The wiring <strong>of</strong> the loop back shown in the fi gure above is just sample<br />

• The external device may need the loop back line. Connect it referring to the instruction manual for external<br />

control device.<br />

• Use the commercial cross cable for the connection between a control personal computer and laser marker.<br />

• In case <strong>of</strong> connecting to PLC, a type <strong>of</strong> the cable (straight or cross) differs depending on a manufacturer or a<br />

model. Please follow the PLC manual.<br />

<br />

Use a Category 5e or higher cross cable for connection.<br />

Cross cable<br />

<br />

Use a HUB (or a rooter) that supports 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T and Category 5e or higher straight cables for<br />

connection.<br />

HUB (or rooter)<br />

Straight cable<br />

2<br />

3<br />

5<br />

1<br />

4<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8


PC<br />

IP Address<br />

192.168.1.10<br />

Subnet Mask<br />

255.255.255.0<br />

Default Gateway<br />

None<br />

Port<br />

9094<br />

PC<br />

HUB<br />

Straight cable<br />

Laser Marker A Laser Marker B Laser Marker C Laser Marker D Laser Marker E<br />

IP Address IP Address IP Address IP Address IP Address<br />

192.168.1.5 192.168.1.6 192.168.1.7 192.168.1.8 192.168.1.9<br />

Subnet Mask Subnet Mask Subnet Mask Subnet Mask Subnet Mask<br />

255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0<br />

Default Gateway Default Gateway Default Gateway Default Gateway Default Gateway<br />

None None None None None<br />

Port Port Port Port Port<br />

9094 9094 9094 9094 9094<br />

53


3-1-6 Connection Check<br />

Check the connection between laser marker and external control device if they are correctly connected.<br />

� Flow<br />

54<br />

1. Turn on the power switch for external device.<br />

2. Turn ON the key switch <strong>of</strong> laser marker.<br />

3. Coordinate the communication conditions between<br />

laser marker and external device.<br />

“3-1-4 Setting <strong>of</strong> Communication Conditions” (P.51)<br />

4. Turn ON the remote switch.<br />

The following two methods are available to change the mode to the remote mode without turning on the remote<br />

switch on the controller; 1) Input the remote input (REMOTE) on the input terminal block, and 2) Turn on the key<br />

switch. Refer to “1-1-3 Shift to Remote Mode” (P.10)<br />

5. Transmit the “File No. Change (code: FNO)” command.<br />

Start Code<br />

(Fixed)<br />

STX<br />

Command Code<br />

File No. Change<br />

FNO<br />

Sub Command<br />

Data Setting or<br />

Operation<br />

S<br />

Data<br />

File No.<br />

2047<br />

Check Sum<br />

*1<br />

Delimiter *2<br />

Data End Identifi cation<br />

Code<br />

CR+LF<br />

02 46 4E 4F 53 32 30 34 37 30 35 0D 0A (HEX)<br />

6. Check the response from laser marker.<br />

The laser marker sends the response data ACK or NAK when the connection to external device is correctly<br />

performed.<br />

(Response data: Normal)<br />

ACK 00 Check Sum Delimiter<br />

06<br />

(Response data: Abnormal)<br />

30 30 36 36 0D 0A (HEX)<br />

NAK Response Code Check Sum Delimiter<br />

15 0D 0A (HEX)<br />

*1 Check sum (Can be specifi ed only in case <strong>of</strong> RS-232C.)<br />

In check sum, the characters from start code to data end are converted to the code by hexadecimal numeral (binary) by<br />

ASCII code chart to add them.<br />

02(HEX) + 46(HEX) + 4E(HEX) + 4F(HEX) + 53(HEX) + 32(HEX) + 30(HEX) + 34(HEX) + 37(HEX) = 205(HEX)<br />

Lower two characters (lower 1-byte) = 05(HEX)<br />

This is indicated 30 35(HEX) by two characters for ASCII.<br />

*2 Delimiter ... Select [CR] or [CR+LF] in case <strong>of</strong> RS-232C. [CR] is fi xed in case <strong>of</strong> Ethernet.<br />

The laser marker does not send a response data if the connection is wrong. Check the connecting procedures<br />

1 to 5 again.


3-1-7 <strong>Control</strong> Sample<br />

This paragraph gives the sample <strong>of</strong> fl ow chart for control <strong>of</strong> laser marker by the RS-232C.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

Remote control ON<br />

Laser pumping (ON)<br />

Marking character string setting<br />

General condition setting<br />

Character condition setting<br />

Laser power setting<br />

Scan speed setting<br />

Shutter (open) setting<br />

LSR command<br />

STR command<br />

ALC command<br />

STC command<br />

LPW command<br />

SSP command<br />

SHT command<br />

8 Status request STS command<br />

Send STS command<br />

No<br />

again after a while.<br />

“READY”: ON<br />

9 Marking trigger MRK command<br />

Completes<br />

the setting.<br />

13<br />

14<br />

Yes<br />

Change setting contents<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

Shutter setting (close)<br />

Laser pumping (OFF)<br />

Remote control OFF<br />

Marking mode setting (interrupt)<br />

Various conditions setting<br />

Marking mode setting (restart)<br />

SHT command<br />

LSR command<br />

Changes<br />

the setting.<br />

MKM command<br />

Various command<br />

MKM command<br />

The interval between "1 Laser<br />

pumping ON" and "9 Marking<br />

trigger" should be about 20<br />

seconds or more with the<br />

LP-S*** type, and about 15<br />

seconds or more with the<br />

LP-S***W type.<br />

The commands unacceptable<br />

during marking are marked<br />

with “12. Marking mode<br />

setting (restart)” by setting<br />

various conditions after<br />

sending “10. Marking mode<br />

setting (interrupt)”.<br />

55


� <strong>Control</strong> Sample 1: Marking is performed while changing the characters.<br />

56<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

Remote control ON<br />

Laser pumping (ON)<br />

Marking character string setting<br />

Shutter setting (open)<br />

LSR command<br />

SHT command<br />

4 Status request STS command<br />

“READY”: ON<br />

Yes<br />

5 Marking trigger MRK command<br />

Marks same<br />

character.<br />

9<br />

10<br />

Changes the character<br />

to be marked.<br />

Completes<br />

marking<br />

Shutter setting (close)<br />

Laser pumping (OFF)<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

Remote control OFF<br />

MCS command<br />

or STR command<br />

No<br />

Changes the<br />

character.<br />

Marking mode setting (interrupt)<br />

Marking character string setting<br />

Marking mode setting (restart)<br />

SHT command<br />

LSR command<br />

Send the character<br />

to be marked.<br />

*<br />

Send STS command<br />

again after a while.<br />

MKM command<br />

MCS command<br />

or STR command<br />

MKM command<br />

To memorize the last marked<br />

character into the laser marker,<br />

save it with “File Overwriting<br />

Registration (FOR)”.<br />

Other than STR and MCS command, SIN command can be used for changing character <strong>of</strong> marking<br />

command. SIN command is recommended to use in case faster processing is required.


� <strong>Control</strong> Sample 2: Marking is performed while switching the fi le.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

Laser pumping (ON)<br />

Change File No.<br />

Remote control ON<br />

Shutter setting (open)<br />

6<br />

LSR command<br />

FNO command<br />

SHT command<br />

4 Status request STS command<br />

Yes<br />

5 Marking trigger MRK command<br />

Marks same<br />

file.<br />

7<br />

8<br />

“READY”: ON<br />

Changes the file<br />

to be marked.<br />

Completes<br />

marking<br />

Shutter setting (close)<br />

Laser pumping (OFF)<br />

Remote control OFF<br />

No<br />

Changes the<br />

file.<br />

Send STS command<br />

again after a while.<br />

Change File No. FNO command<br />

SHT command<br />

LSR command<br />

57


3-1-8 Communication Data Format<br />

Use the ASCII code basically and the shift JIS code partially as characters for communication when controlling the laser<br />

marker by external device.<br />

The characters (or character strings) enclosed with double quotation marks (“ ”) in the description below indicates that they<br />

uses the ASCII code.<br />

When using the shift JIS code, it is described in each case.<br />

� Command Data<br />

The word “command” means the instruction which is sent to the laser marker from external device. Command data is created<br />

with the specifi ed format. Remote control <strong>of</strong> laser marker or execution <strong>of</strong> specifi ed procedures are possible by sending the<br />

command data to laser marker.<br />

• Command data format<br />

58<br />

Start Code<br />

Single Character<br />

Command<br />

Three Characters<br />

Sub Command<br />

Single Character<br />

Data<br />

Variable length<br />

Check Sum<br />

Two Characters<br />

Delimiter<br />

Two Characters/<br />

Single Character<br />

Head End<br />

Code Description<br />

Start Code A start code is a code to identify the data head. STX (code: 02(HEX)) fi xed.<br />

Command A command is specifi ed with three characters. “3-2 Communication Command and<br />

Function” (P.64)<br />

Sub Command A sub command is an instruction <strong>of</strong> setting/readout complementary added to a command.<br />

Specifi es one <strong>of</strong> the characters below.<br />

“S”…Data setting or operation (Set)<br />

“R”…Readout <strong>of</strong> setting data (Read)<br />

(Note) “S” or “R” cannot be selected for some commands.<br />

Data Data specifi ed per command<br />

The content to be specifi ed varies per command. “3-2 Communication Command and<br />

Function” (P.64)<br />

Check Sum *1<br />

Delimiter *2<br />

Check sum indicates the lower 1-byte <strong>of</strong> adding result <strong>of</strong> value (binary) from the start code<br />

to the last data by converting it to two characters by ASCII.<br />

where the command is “ABC”, sub command is “S” and data is “000”<br />

02(HEX)+41(HEX)+42(HEX)+43(HEX)+53(HEX)+30(HEX)+30(HEX)+30(HEX)=1AB(HEX)<br />

AB(HEX), the lower 1-byte <strong>of</strong> 1AB(HEX) is converted to 41(HEX)+42(HEX) to two<br />

characters by ASCII.<br />

ON/OFF <strong>of</strong> check sum can be selected on the environment setting <strong>of</strong> laser marker.<br />

Refer to “2-15 Environment setting” in Operation <strong>Manual</strong> for the details.<br />

Delimiter is a code to identify the end <strong>of</strong> data.<br />

CR+LF (0D(HEX) 0A(HEX)) or CR(0D(HEX)).<br />

Selects CR+LF or CR on the console. Refer to “2-15 Environment setting” in Operation<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> for the details.<br />

*1 A check sum can be added in case <strong>of</strong> RS-232C.<br />

*2 You can select [CR] or [CR+LF] for a delimiter in case <strong>of</strong> RS-232C. [CR] is fi xed in case <strong>of</strong> Ethernet.<br />

• The laser marker recognizes the data from the start code (STX) to the delimiter (CR or CR+LF) as one<br />

command data. If there exists an unnecessary character string before the start code or after the delimiter, it<br />

is ignored (neither an abnormal response data is returned).<br />

• When using the external device set by 2byte, NUL00 (HEX) can be used.<br />

• Add to NUL00 (HEX) before STX or after delimiter.


� Response Data<br />

Response data is data which is returned from the laser marker for the command sent by an external device and consists <strong>of</strong><br />

the following three types.<br />

1. Response data for normal receiving<br />

The data starts with the start code “ACK”. It returns when the command transmitted is normal or the command<br />

processing has been completed normally.<br />

2. Response data for abnormal receiving<br />

The data starts with the start code “NAK”. It returns when the command transmitted is abnormal or the command<br />

processing has been completed abnormally.<br />

3. Readout data<br />

The data starts with the start code “STX”. It returns when the command transmitted is normal and the sub command<br />

is specifi ed to ‘R’.<br />

• Response data format for normal receiving<br />

Start Code<br />

Single Character<br />

Response Code<br />

Two Characters<br />

Check Sum<br />

Two Characters<br />

Delimiter<br />

Two Characters/<br />

Single Character<br />

Head End<br />

Code Description<br />

Start Code ACK (code: 06(HEX)) fi xed. A start code is a code to identify the data head and to indicate<br />

that the data is a response data for normal receiving.<br />

Response Code Two characters ‘00’ is returned if the start code is ACK.<br />

Check Sum *1<br />

Delimiter *2<br />

Check sum indicates the lower 1-byte <strong>of</strong> adding result <strong>of</strong> value (binary) from the start code<br />

to the response code by converting it to two characters by ASCII.<br />

(ex): 06(HEX)+30(HEX)+30(HEX)=66(HEX)<br />

66(HEX) is converted to 36(HEX)+36(HEX), to two characters by ASCII.<br />

ON/OFF <strong>of</strong> check sum can be selected on the environment setting <strong>of</strong> laser marker.<br />

Refer to “2-15 Environment setting” in Operation <strong>Manual</strong> for the details.<br />

Delimiter is a code to identify the end <strong>of</strong> data.<br />

CR+LF (0D(HEX) 0A(HEX)) or CR(0D(HEX)).<br />

Selects CR+LF or CR on the console. Refer to “2-15 Environment setting” in Operation<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> for the details.<br />

*1 A check sum can be added in case <strong>of</strong> RS-232C.<br />

*2 You can select [CR] or [CR+LF] for a delimiter in case <strong>of</strong> RS-232C. [CR] is fi xed in case <strong>of</strong> Ethernet.<br />

59


• Response data format for abnormal receiving<br />

60<br />

Start Code<br />

Single Character<br />

Response Code<br />

Two Characters<br />

Check Sum<br />

Two Characters<br />

Delimiter<br />

Two Characters/<br />

Single Character<br />

Head End<br />

Code Description<br />

Start Code NAK (code: 15(HEX)) fi xed. A start code is a code to identify the data head and to indicate<br />

that the data is a response data for abnormal receiving.<br />

Response Code Two characters is returned if the start code is NAK.<br />

01…Inappropriate STX has been received.<br />

02…Inappropriate delimiter has been received.<br />

03…Unacceptable command during marking operation, shutter status: open or MKM<br />

command: interruption<br />

04…No applicable command<br />

05…Incorrect check sum<br />

06…Incorrect length <strong>of</strong> receiving data<br />

07…Unacceptable command due to priority <strong>of</strong> input terminal<br />

08…Incorrect sub command<br />

09…Incorrect receiving data<br />

10…Alarm or warning occurs<br />

11…Serial data input is not acceptable.<br />

• Internal shutter status is close<br />

• Transmitting Serial data input twice or more to the same number <strong>of</strong> serial data<br />

• No setting <strong>of</strong> Serial data input (command: SIN) on character string<br />

12…The fi le cannot be saved due to lack <strong>of</strong> capacity in the fl ash disk<br />

14…This command is not supported with the LP-F10/LP-F10W.<br />

15…This function is not supported with the LP-F10/LP-F10W.<br />

99…Others<br />

Check Sum *1<br />

Delimiter *2<br />

Check sum indicates the lower 1-byte <strong>of</strong> adding result <strong>of</strong> value (binary) from the start code<br />

to the response code by converting it to two characters by ASCII.<br />

(ex): where the response code is ‘20’,<br />

15(HEX)+32(HEX)+30(HEX)=77(HEX)<br />

77(HEX) is converted to 37(HEX)+37(HEX), to two characters by ASCII.<br />

ON/OFF <strong>of</strong> check sum can be selected on the environment setting <strong>of</strong> laser marker.<br />

Refer to “2-15 Environment setting” in Operation <strong>Manual</strong> for the details.<br />

Delimiter is a code to identify the end <strong>of</strong> data.<br />

CR+LF (0D(HEX) 0A(HEX)) or CR(0D(HEX)).<br />

Selects CR+LF or CR on the console. Refer to “2-15 Environment setting” in Operation<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> for the details.<br />

*1 A check sum can be added in case <strong>of</strong> RS-232C.<br />

*2 You can select [CR] or [CR+LF] for a delimiter in case <strong>of</strong> RS-232C. [CR] is fi xed in case <strong>of</strong> Ethernet.


• Readout data format<br />

Start Code<br />

Single Character<br />

Command<br />

Three Characters<br />

Sub Command<br />

Single Character<br />

Data<br />

Variable length<br />

Check Sum<br />

Two Characters<br />

Delimiter<br />

Two Characters/<br />

Single Character<br />

Head End<br />

Code Description<br />

Start Code A start code is a code to identify the data head. STX(code:02(HEX)) fi xed.<br />

Command A command is specifi ed with three characters. “3-2 Communication Command and<br />

Function” (P.64)<br />

Sub Command A sub command is an instruction <strong>of</strong> setting/readout complementary added to a command.<br />

Specifi es one <strong>of</strong> the characters below.<br />

“S”…Data setting or operation (Set)<br />

“R”…Readout <strong>of</strong> setting data (Read)<br />

(Note) “S” or “R” cannot be selected for some commands.<br />

Data Data specifi ed per command<br />

The content to be specifi ed varies per command. “3-2 Communication Command and<br />

Function” (P.64)<br />

Check Sum *1<br />

Delimiter *2<br />

Check sum indicates the lower 1-byte <strong>of</strong> adding result <strong>of</strong> value (binary) from the start code<br />

to the last data by converting it to two characters by ASCII.<br />

ex): where the command is “ABC”, sub command is “A” and data is “000”<br />

02(HEX)+41(HEX)+42(HEX)+43(HEX)+41(HEX)+30(HEX)+30(HEX)+30(HEX)=199(HEX)<br />

99(HEX), the lower 1-byte <strong>of</strong> 199(HEX) is converted to 39(HEX)+39(HEX), to two<br />

characters by ASCII.<br />

ON/OFF <strong>of</strong> check sum can be selected on the environment setting <strong>of</strong> laser marker.<br />

Refer to “2-15 Environment setting” in Operation <strong>Manual</strong> for the details.<br />

Delimiter is a code to identify the end <strong>of</strong> data.<br />

CR+LF (0D(HEX) 0A(HEX)) or CR(0D(HEX)).<br />

Selects CR+LF or CR on the console. Refer to “2-15 Environment setting” in Operation<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> for the details.<br />

*1 A check sum can be added in case <strong>of</strong> RS-232C.<br />

*2 You can select [CR] or [CR+LF] for a delimiter in case <strong>of</strong> RS-232C. [CR] is fi xed in case <strong>of</strong> Ethernet.<br />

61


3-1-9 Communication Sequence<br />

This chapter explains the communication (transmitting/receiving) sequence <strong>of</strong> command or response data between external<br />

device and laser marker.<br />

The sequence varies in the interrupt permission status.<br />

� Communication sequence at normal data setting/operation instruction<br />

The communication sequence where normal command/setting is transmitted from external device to laser marker is shown<br />

below.<br />

<strong>External</strong> Device<br />

Laser Marker<br />

62<br />

Transmission<br />

Reception<br />

Command (Instruction/Setting Data)<br />

Normal Receiving Response (ACK)<br />

� Communication sequence at normal readout <strong>of</strong> setting data<br />

Reception<br />

Transmission<br />

The communication sequence where normal readout <strong>of</strong> setting (sub command “R”) is transmitted from external device to<br />

laser marker is shown below.<br />

<strong>External</strong> Device<br />

Laser Marker<br />

Transmission<br />

Reception<br />

Command (Readout <strong>of</strong> Setting Data)<br />

Readout Response<br />

Reception<br />

Transmission<br />

� Communication sequence at abnormal data setting/operation instruction<br />

The communication sequence where abnormal command/setting is transmitted from external device to laser marker is<br />

shown below.<br />

<strong>External</strong> Device<br />

Laser Marker<br />

Transmission<br />

Reception<br />

� Reception timeout<br />

Command (Instruction/Setting Data)<br />

Abnormal Receiving Response (NAK)<br />

Reception<br />

Transmission<br />

The laser marker has “reception timeout check” function, which monitors the lapsed time <strong>of</strong> receiving the command from the<br />

head till the end when it receives the command from external device. The period for reception timeout is 10 seconds. If the<br />

telegraphic message reception has not been fully completed within the specifi ed period, the laser marker considers that any<br />

trouble may occur in external device or in the communication line and stops all communication process.<br />

The data under being received are broken.<br />

� Transmission timeout<br />

The laser marker activates “transmission timeout check” when it transmits the response data to external devices. The<br />

transmission timeout check monitors the whole transmission time, i.e., the time from when the laser maker starts to sent the<br />

response data to when the external device completely receives it. The period for transmission timeout is 10 seconds. If the<br />

telegraphic message transmission has not been fully completed within the specifi ed period, the laser marker considers that<br />

any trouble may occur in external device or in the communication line and stops all communication process.<br />

When the transmission timeout occurs, the whole response signal under transmission is cleared.


� Communication sequence at transmission prohibition/permission for marking status<br />

Generally in the communication sequence, “the laser marker returns the response to the command from external device”.<br />

However, the marking operation (mark end or warning under some marking conditions) timing <strong>of</strong> the laser marker can be<br />

checked from the laser marker when the Marking Status Sending Enable is set to on (“3-2 Communication Command and<br />

Function” (P.64)).<br />

• Communication sequence where “transmission prohibited” is set for marking status sending enable command<br />

The next command<br />

transmission may be<br />

restricted during marking<br />

operation.<br />

<strong>External</strong> Device<br />

Marking Status Sending Enable Command<br />

(Specify Transmission Prohibited)<br />

Normal Receiving Response (ACK)<br />

Shutter (Shutter Open) Command<br />

Normal Receiving Response (ACK)<br />

Marking Trigger Command<br />

Normal Receiving Response (ACK)<br />

Shutter (Shutter Close) Command<br />

Normal Receiving Response (ACK)<br />

Laser Marker<br />

Warning occured<br />

according to the setting<br />

<strong>of</strong> marking condition<br />

during marking<br />

operation.<br />

• Communication sequence where “transmission permitted” is set for marking status sending enable command<br />

<strong>External</strong> Device<br />

Laser Marker<br />

The next command<br />

is transmitted,<br />

waiting the marking<br />

status from laser<br />

marker.<br />

Marking Status Sending Enable Command<br />

(Specify Transmission Permitted)<br />

Normal Receiving Response (ACK)<br />

Shutter (Shutter Open) Command<br />

Normal Receiving Response (ACK)<br />

Marking Trigger Command<br />

Normal Receiving Response (ACK)<br />

Marking Status Response<br />

(Marking Completer Normally)<br />

Marking Trigger Command<br />

Normal Receiving Response (ACK)<br />

Marking Status Response (Error Code)<br />

Shutter (Shutter Close) Command<br />

Normal Receiving Response (ACK)<br />

Marking is being<br />

performed.<br />

In case <strong>of</strong> occurring<br />

error or warning<br />

63


3-2 Communication Command and Function<br />

3-2-1 Command List<br />

64<br />

Name Code Function Description<br />

File Name FNM Sets registration name <strong>of</strong> fi le under editing. P.66<br />

File Overwriting Registration FOR Overwrite and register the fi le under editing. P.66<br />

File Registration FRG Register the fi le under editing to the specifi ed No. P.67<br />

Change File No. (File No. Specifi ed) FNO Specifi es the fi le No. to change the fi le. P.67<br />

Change File No. (Comment Specifi ed) FNN Specifi es the fi le name (comment) to change the fi le. P.68<br />

Marking Character String STR Sets the marking character string. P.69<br />

Marking Character String (onebyte<br />

Character)<br />

MCS Sets the marking character string by one-byte character. P.71<br />

Expiry Date/Time LMT Sets the function <strong>of</strong> expiry date. P.72<br />

Counter CNT Sets the counter function. P.73<br />

Lot Condition LTC Sets the lot marking condition. P.74<br />

Lot Character String LTS Sets the character string to be applied to lot marking. P.75<br />

Logo File CDF Sets the logo fi le. P.77<br />

VEC Logo Conditions CDC Sets the marking condition <strong>of</strong> VEC logo fi le. P.79<br />

DXF Logo Condition Setting CDD Sets the marking condition <strong>of</strong> DXF logo fi le. P.79<br />

General Condition ALC Sets the conditions related to whole fi le. P.80<br />

Step and Repeat Condition SRC Sets the Step & Repeat conditions. P.81<br />

Step & Repeat Setting SRA Sets the fi ne adjustment <strong>of</strong> Step & Repeat. P.82<br />

Character Condition STC<br />

Character Condition (Shorted<br />

Form)<br />

SPC<br />

Character Condition SCC<br />

Sets the condition for marking character string (shorted<br />

form) per line.<br />

Sets the condition for marking character string (shorted<br />

form) per line.<br />

Sets the marking pitch interval for bold character and<br />

kerning for marking proportional character.<br />

Laser Power LPW Sets the laser power. P.89<br />

Scan Speed SSP Sets the scan speed <strong>of</strong> the laser. P.89<br />

Laser Pulse Cycle*1 MPL Sets the marking pulse cycle <strong>of</strong> laser. P.90<br />

Line Width Correction WDC<br />

Sets the width necessary to avoid crossing at marking<br />

intersection.<br />

P.91<br />

Setting <strong>of</strong> Work Distance*2 WRD Sets the Work Distance. P.91<br />

Trigger Condition*1 TRG Sets the condition applied for fl ying object. P.92<br />

Delay DLY Sets the delay time or distance after inputting sensor. P.93<br />

Marking Interval*1 INT Sets the distance between equidistant marking. P.93<br />

Flying Object Wait*1 MWT Sets the waiting time <strong>of</strong> the fl ying object to be marked. P.94<br />

Line Speed*1 LSP Sets the moving speed. P.94<br />

Encoder Signal*1 ENC Sets the encoder pulse number. P.95<br />

Year/Month/Date/Time YMD Sets year, month, date, hour for system. P.96<br />

Era Year ERA Sets era year. P.97<br />

P.85<br />

P.87<br />

P.88


Name Code Function Description<br />

Shutter SHT <strong>Control</strong>s the internal shutter. P.97<br />

Marking Mode MKM Sets the marking status. P.98<br />

Counter Reset CTR Resets the counter. P.98<br />

Status Request STS Requires the operation status <strong>of</strong> laser marker. P.99<br />

Laser Pumping LSR <strong>Control</strong>s the laser pumping. P.100<br />

Marking Trigger*1 MRK <strong>Control</strong>s the marking. P.100<br />

Guide LD Display GID Displays guide with red LD pointer. P.101<br />

Marking Status Transmission<br />

Permission<br />

MST Sets the enable/disable <strong>of</strong> response sending at the end <strong>of</strong> marking. P.102<br />

I/O Environment ENV Sets the operation environment <strong>of</strong> I/O terminal. P.103<br />

Marking Quality Adjustment WTC Sets the adjustment <strong>of</strong> starting point,ending point, edge, curve, etc. P.104<br />

Laser Check Radiation SPT Executes the laser check radiation. P.105<br />

Rank Condition RKC Sets the input condition <strong>of</strong> the rank marking. P.105<br />

Rank Character String RKS Sets the character string to be applied for rank marking. P.106<br />

Offset Condition OFC Sets the <strong>of</strong>fset input condition. P.107<br />

Offset OFS Sets the <strong>of</strong>fset to be applied for parallel input. P.108<br />

Serial Offset SEO Sets the serial <strong>of</strong>fset data No. P.109<br />

Bar Code Marking Condition BRF Sets the marking condition for bar code, 2D code. P.110<br />

Bar Code Marking Data BRS Sets the marking data for barcode, 2D code. P.119<br />

2D Code Pattern BRP Sets the pattern for 2D code. P.120<br />

Bar Code Marking Data (onebyte<br />

Character)<br />

BCS<br />

Sets the marking character string using one-byte<br />

characters.<br />

Human Readable Text Setting BRV Sets the human readable information. P.122<br />

Common Bar Code Condition BCC<br />

Sets the marking interval, marking direction, and skip<br />

marking <strong>of</strong> the bar code.<br />

P.124<br />

Serial Data Input SIN Inputs marking data <strong>of</strong> the serial data function. P.125<br />

Processing Condition Setting LAY<br />

Sets the processing condition <strong>of</strong> the specifi ed processing<br />

condition No.<br />

P.126<br />

Processing Element Setting FIG Sets the processing element (straight line, circle, arc). P.127<br />

Week Setting WKM Sets the timing for week setting and the fi rst week. P.129<br />

Arbitrary Point Radiation<br />

Condition Setting<br />

Arbitrary Point Radiation<br />

Coordinate Setting<br />

P.121<br />

PRF Sets the arbitrary point radiation condition. P.130<br />

PRD Sets the arbitrary point radiation coordinate. P.131<br />

Marking Energy Range Setting*1 MEN Sets the threshold <strong>of</strong> the marking energy. P.132<br />

Marking Energy Measurement*1 MEM Sets the lower limit <strong>of</strong> the marking energy. P.133<br />

Low alarm limit PWL Sets the low alarm limit. P.133<br />

Power Check*2 PWR Checks the power. P.134<br />

Power Check*1 PWM Checks the power. P.136<br />

Test Marking*1 TST Starts test marking. P.138<br />

*1: (LP-S*** type only)<br />

*2: (LP-S*** W type only)<br />

65


3-3 Command Description<br />

66<br />

The laser marker sends a response data after setting/readout command is transmitted.<br />

“3-1-8 Communication Data Format” (P.58)<br />

� File Name (Code: FNM)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> fi le name<br />

Set the fi le name currently being edited with the following format:<br />

STX FNM S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> fi le name<br />

Data<br />

[File Name]<br />

Max. 20-byte<br />

Read out the fi le name currently being edited with the following format:<br />

STX FNM R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

Set the fi le name currently being edited with the following format:<br />

STX FNM A<br />

Data<br />

[File Name]<br />

Max. 20-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

File Name Max 20<br />

Specify the fi le name <strong>of</strong> currently specifi ed<br />

number with 10 or less characters <strong>of</strong> shift<br />

JIS code or 20 or less characters <strong>of</strong> ASCII<br />

code. Specify 0 byte to the fi le name to be<br />

deleted.<br />

� File Overwriting Registration (Code: FOR)<br />

• Overwriting <strong>of</strong> fi le<br />

Overwrite the fi le currently being edited over the fi le selected.<br />

Overwriting is possible when the fi le has been already determined.<br />

STX FOR S (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Overwriting is possible when the fi le number has been already determined.<br />

(ex) when specifying the fi le name<br />

"ABCD"(hexadecimal numeral)<br />

When specifying the fi le name in<br />

shift JIS code<br />

82,62,82,63,82,64,82,65(HEX)<br />

When specifying the fi le name in<br />

ASCII code<br />

41,42,43,44(HEX)


� File Registration (Code: FRG)<br />

• Registration <strong>of</strong> fi le<br />

Register the fi le <strong>of</strong> specifi ed number.<br />

STX FRG S<br />

Data<br />

[File No.]<br />

4-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

File No. 4<br />

� File No. Change (Code: FNO)<br />

• Change File No.<br />

Read out the fi le <strong>of</strong> specifi ed number.<br />

STX FNO S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> fi le No.<br />

Register the fi le currently used to the<br />

fi le <strong>of</strong> specifi ed number and change the<br />

fi le number currently being edited to the<br />

specifi ed number.<br />

Data<br />

[File No.]<br />

4-byte<br />

Read out the fi le number currently being edited with the following format:<br />

STX FNO R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX FNO A<br />

Data<br />

[File No.]<br />

4-byte<br />

“0000” to “2047”<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

File No. 4<br />

The fi le number to be used and the fi le<br />

number currently being used is indicated<br />

at fi le No. change and readout <strong>of</strong> fi le No.<br />

respectively.<br />

“0000” to “2047”<br />

“9999”…new fi le<br />

67


� File No. Change (comment) (Code: FNN)<br />

• Change File No.<br />

68<br />

Changes fi le No. according to the fi le name (comment).<br />

STX FNN S<br />

Data<br />

[File Name]<br />

Max. 20-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

File Name Max 20<br />

Specify the fi le name with 10 or less<br />

characters <strong>of</strong> shift JIS code or 20 or less<br />

characters <strong>of</strong> ASCII code. When the same<br />

fi le name exists, change the fi le No. to the<br />

smaller one.<br />

Ex) When changing to a fi le name<br />

(comment) with “ABCD”<br />

(hexadecimal numeral)<br />

When specifying the fi le name in<br />

shift JIS code<br />

82,62,82,63,82,64,82,65(HEX)<br />

When specifying the fi le name in<br />

ASCII code<br />

41,42,43,44(HEX)


� Marking Character String (Code: STR)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking character string<br />

Set the marking character string in the specifi ed line number with the following format:<br />

STX STR S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> marking character string<br />

Data<br />

[Line No.] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 62-byte<br />

Read out the marking character string in the specifi ed line number with the following format:<br />

STX STR R<br />

• Readout data<br />

Data<br />

[Line No.]<br />

2-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Character string for marking in the specifi ed line number is read out with the following format:<br />

STX STR A<br />

Data<br />

[Line No.] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 62-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Line No. 2<br />

Marking<br />

Character<br />

String<br />

Max 60<br />

The line number to be set in the fi le is<br />

specifi ed.<br />

The character string to be set in the<br />

specifi ed line is specifi ed with shift JIS code.<br />

(However, the function character should be<br />

specifi ed by ASCII code.) Specify 0 byte to<br />

the character string to be deleted.<br />

Setting method <strong>of</strong> character string for marking (specifi ed with shift JIS code)<br />

“01” to “99” [row]<br />

See below.<br />

Use shift JIS code “Character Code Table” (P.220) to set standard characters and registered characters. In case <strong>of</strong> setting with<br />

ASCII code, perform the next procedure.<br />

69


Functional character (specifi ed with ASCII code)<br />

Use shift JIS code (“Character Code Table” (P.220)) to set standard characters and registered characters. In case <strong>of</strong> setting with<br />

ASCII code, perform the next procedure.<br />

N : digit number (1 to 6)<br />

MM : number <strong>of</strong> digits (00 to 30)<br />

X :<br />

n :<br />

70<br />

Type (Y: dominical year, y: era year, M: month, D: date, H: 24-hour time, h: 12-hour time, m: minute, s:<br />

second, w: week, J: 365 days, C: counter)<br />

counter number, lot function number (0 to 7), date/time number (0: current date/time, 1 to 8: expiry date/time (1<br />

to 8), rank function number (0 to 3), serial data function number (0 to 9, A to F), bar code number (0 to 9, A to F)<br />

Y : counter <strong>of</strong>fset (+1 to +9) This letter is not used in case <strong>of</strong> no <strong>of</strong>fset.<br />

Z : counter numbering system -1 (1 to 9, A to Z) This letter is not used when decimal number is used.<br />

%0N:XnYZ = with zero %N-:XnYZ = without zero stop %INP:n = Rank<br />

%N:XnYZ = without zero right %APM:n =<br />

“AM” (before noon),<br />

“PM” (afternoon)<br />

%MM:Sn = Serial Data<br />

%N:XnYZ = without zero left %SFT:n = Lot character %BAR:n = Check Digit<br />

[Examples]<br />

Marking <strong>of</strong> “ABCD” (with hexadecimal number)<br />

82,62,82,63,82,64,82,65,8A,94,8E,AE,89,EF,8E,D0<br />

Marking <strong>of</strong> “counter 0” by 6 digits, right aligned without zero<br />

25,20,36,3A,43,30…“% 6:C0”<br />

Marking <strong>of</strong> current year/month/date with four digits for dominical year, two digits for month<br />

and date respectively, right aligned with zero, and <strong>of</strong> the unit by Kanji.<br />

25,30,34,3A,59,30,94,4E,25,30,32,3A,4D,30,8C,8E,25,30,32,3A,44,30,93,FA…“%04:Y0 Year %02:M0 Month %02:D0 Day”


� Marking Character String (one-byte Character) (Code: MCS)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking character string<br />

Set the marking character string in the specifi ed line number with the following format:<br />

STX MCS S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> marking character string<br />

Data<br />

[Line No.] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 32-byte<br />

Read out the marking character string in the specifi ed line number with the following format:<br />

STX MCS R<br />

• Readout data<br />

Data (Line No.)<br />

2-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Character string for marking in the specifi ed line number is read out with the following format:<br />

STX MCS A<br />

Data<br />

[Line No.] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 32-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Line No. 2<br />

Marking<br />

Character<br />

String<br />

Max 30<br />

The line number to be set in the fi le is<br />

specifi ed.<br />

Specifi es the character setting in the<br />

specifi ed line. Specify 0 byte to the character<br />

string to be deleted.<br />

“01” to “99” [row]<br />

20 one-byte characters within the<br />

range from (HEX) to 7E(HEX).<br />

(functional characters should not<br />

be included)<br />

• If readout data includes function characters (such as “%SFT”), they are read out as “%SFT”. (A value that<br />

can be got from a function character is not read out.)<br />

• If readout data includes characters that cannot be expressed in ASCII code such as Katakana and Kanji (2byte<br />

character), only these 2-byte characters are read out in shift JIS code.<br />

71


� Expiry Date/Time (Code: LMT)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> Expiry Date/Time<br />

Set the condition <strong>of</strong> expiry date/time for the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

Expiry date/time can be set within the range from EANuary 1, 1980 to December 31, 2099.<br />

72<br />

STX LMT S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> expiry date/time<br />

Data<br />

[Expiry No.] [Expiry] [Reference Unit] [Start Date]<br />

7-byte<br />

Read out the expiry date/time in the specifi ed line number with the following format:<br />

STX LMT R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX LMT A<br />

Data<br />

[Expiry No.]<br />

1-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[Expiry No.] [Expiry] [Reference Unit] [Start Date]<br />

7-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Expiry No. 1<br />

The expiry No. to be set or to be read out is<br />

indicated.<br />

Expiry 4 The expiry is indicated. “-999” to “+999”<br />

Reference Unit 1 The reference unit is indicated.<br />

Start Date 1<br />

Possible to be set only when the reference<br />

unit is set to “year” or “month”. Indicating if<br />

the date <strong>of</strong> “today” is included or not.<br />

“1” to “8”<br />

(“5” to “8”: common expiry date/<br />

time)<br />

“0”…year<br />

“1”…month<br />

“2”…day<br />

“3”…hour<br />

“4”…minute<br />

“0”…Today not included<br />

“1”…Today included


� Counter (Code: CNT)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> counter condition<br />

Set the counter condition for the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX CNT S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> counter condition<br />

Data<br />

[Counter No.] [Current Value] [Initial value] [End Value]<br />

[Step] [Count Source] [Flag]<br />

27-byte<br />

Read out the counter condition for the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX CNT R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX CNT A<br />

Data<br />

[Counter No.]<br />

1-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[Counter No.] [Current Value] [Initial value] [End Value]<br />

[Step] [Count Source] [Flag]<br />

27-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Counter No. 1<br />

The counter No. to be set or to be read out<br />

is indicated.<br />

“0” to “7”<br />

(“4” to “7”: common counter)<br />

Current Value 6 Current value <strong>of</strong> counter. No minus number. “000000” to “999999”<br />

Initial Value 6 Initial value <strong>of</strong> counter. No minus number. “000000” to “999999”<br />

End Value 6 End value <strong>of</strong> counter. No minus number. “000000” to “999999”<br />

Step 6 Step value <strong>of</strong> counter. No minus number. “000000” to “999999”<br />

Count Source 1 Trigger source to be counted.<br />

Flag Reset 1 ON/OFF <strong>of</strong> reset at update date.<br />

“0”…Counter 0<br />

“1”…Counter 1<br />

“2”…Counter 2<br />

“3”…Counter 3<br />

“4”…Counter 4<br />

“5”…Counter 5<br />

“6”…Counter 6<br />

“7”…Counter 7<br />

“8”…Trigger input<br />

“0”…reset OFF at re-dating<br />

“1”…reset ON at re-dating<br />

73


� Lot Condition (Code: LTC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> lot condition<br />

Set the lot condition for the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

74<br />

STX LTC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> lot condition<br />

Data<br />

[Lot No.] [Period] [Unit]<br />

4-byte<br />

Read out the lot condition for the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX LTC R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX LTC A<br />

Data<br />

(Lot No.)<br />

1-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Lot No.] [Period] [Unit]<br />

4-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Lot No. 1<br />

Lot Condition 2<br />

Period<br />

Condition<br />

1<br />

The lot No. to be set or to be read out is<br />

indicated.<br />

The time <strong>of</strong> period for lot marking is<br />

indicated.<br />

The unit <strong>of</strong> period to switch the character<br />

string for marking is indicated.<br />

“0” to “7”<br />

(“4” to “7”: common lot)<br />

“00”…current<br />

“01” to “08”…expiry 1 to 8<br />

“10” to “17”…counter 0 to 7<br />

“0”…year or counter<br />

“1”…month<br />

“2”…day<br />

“3”…Y/M<br />

“4”…M/D<br />

“5”…day <strong>of</strong> week<br />

“6”…hour<br />

“7”…week<br />

“8”…minute<br />

“9”…hour/min.


� Lot Character String (Code: LTS)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> lot character string<br />

Set the lot character string for the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX LTS S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> lot character string<br />

Data<br />

[Lot No.] [Unit] [Start Period]<br />

[End Period] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 33-byte<br />

Read out the lot character string for the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX LTS R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX LTS A<br />

Data<br />

(Lot No., Period Unit No.)<br />

3-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Lot No.] [Unit] [Start Period]<br />

[End Period] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 33-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Lot No. 1<br />

Period Unit No. 2<br />

The lot No. to be set or to be read out is<br />

indicated.<br />

The expiry No. to be set or to be read out is<br />

indicated.<br />

The expiry is indicated.<br />

The setting range varies depending on the<br />

condition <strong>of</strong> period unit.<br />

“0” to “7”<br />

(“4” to “7”: common lot)<br />

Period<br />

Condition<br />

Setting range<br />

Year “01” to “60”<br />

Month “01” to “12”<br />

Day “01” to “31”<br />

Y/M “01” to “60”<br />

M/D “01” to “60”<br />

Hour “01” to “24”<br />

Min. “01” to “60”<br />

Hour/Min. “01” to “60”<br />

Week “01” to “54”<br />

Day <strong>of</strong> Week “01” to “07”<br />

Counter “01” to “60”<br />

75


76<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Period Condition Setting range<br />

Start Period 6<br />

End Period 6<br />

Marking<br />

Character<br />

String<br />

Max 18<br />

The start period <strong>of</strong> marking the character<br />

string for setting is set.<br />

The setting range varies depending on the<br />

condition <strong>of</strong> period unit.<br />

Set “??????” with the end period to delete it.<br />

“??????” is indicated if the period which has<br />

not been set is read out.<br />

The end period <strong>of</strong> marking the character<br />

string for setting is set.<br />

The setting range varies depending on the<br />

condition <strong>of</strong> period unit.<br />

Set “??????” with the start period to delete it.<br />

“??????” is indicated if the period which has<br />

not been set is read out.<br />

The character string to be marked with the<br />

specifi ed period is set. Specify 0-byte <strong>of</strong><br />

data length to delete the character string <strong>of</strong><br />

period.<br />

Year “198000” to “209900”<br />

Month “000001” to “000012”<br />

Day “000001” to “000031”<br />

Y/M “198001” to “209912”<br />

M/D<br />

Day <strong>of</strong> Week<br />

“000101” to “001231”<br />

(The higher 4<br />

characters: month,<br />

the lower 2<br />

characters: date)<br />

“000000” to “000006”<br />

(“000000”: Sunday,<br />

“000006”: Saturday)<br />

Hour “000000” to “000023”<br />

Week “000000” to “000054”<br />

Minute “000000” to “000059”<br />

H/M “000000” to “002359”<br />

Counter “000000” to “999999”<br />

Year “198000” to “209900”<br />

Month “000001” to “000012”<br />

Day “000001” to “000031”<br />

Y/M “198001” to “209912”<br />

M/D<br />

Day <strong>of</strong> Week<br />

“000101” to “001231”<br />

(The higher 4<br />

characters: month,<br />

the lower 2<br />

characters: date)<br />

“000000” to “000006”<br />

(“000000”: Sunday,<br />

“000006”: Saturday)<br />

Hour “000000” to “000023”<br />

Week “000000” to “000054”<br />

Minute “000000” to “000059”<br />

H/M “000000” to “002359”<br />

Counter “000000” to “999999”<br />

Use the shift JIS code.


� Logo File (Code: CDF)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> logo marking function<br />

Set the logo fi le to the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX CDF S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> logo marking function<br />

Data<br />

[Log No.] [Log File Name]<br />

Variable length<br />

Read out the logo fi le in the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX CDF R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX CDF A<br />

Data<br />

(Logo No.)<br />

2-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Log No.] [Log File Name]<br />

Variable length<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Logo Cond. No. 2<br />

Logo File Name Variable length<br />

The logo fi le No. to be set or to be read out<br />

is indicated.<br />

The logo fi le name corresponding to the<br />

specifi ed number is indicated without<br />

extension. In case <strong>of</strong> a DXF fi le, an<br />

extension is required. For VEC fi le, the<br />

extension can be omitted (in this case, the<br />

response has an extension.) (in this case,<br />

the response has an extension.)<br />

The logo fi le specifi cation will be deleted<br />

unless the fi le name is specifi ed.<br />

“00” to “99”<br />

When the fi le name is “ABCD.<br />

VEC”…“ABCD” or “ABCD.VEC”<br />

When the fi le name is “ABCD.<br />

DXF”…“ABCD.DXF”.<br />

(The long fi le name can be<br />

specifi ed. Except the extended<br />

characters, entry <strong>of</strong> up to 10<br />

double-byte characters or 20 onebyte<br />

characters is recommended.)<br />

In the case <strong>of</strong> specifying logo fi le in VEC format, apply CDC command for setting logo condition, and in the<br />

case <strong>of</strong> specifying logo fi le in DXF format, apply CDD command for setting logo condition.<br />

77


� VEC Logo Conditions (Code:CDC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> DXF logo condition<br />

Set the marking condition <strong>of</strong> logo fi le with the following format:<br />

STX CDC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> DXF logo condition<br />

Data<br />

[Logo No.] [Layer No.] [X Scale] [Y Scale] [X Position] [Y Position]<br />

[Rotation Angle] [Laser power correction] [Scan speed<br />

correction]<br />

Laser Pulse Cyc Cor. (Laser Pulse Cycle Correction)*<br />

52-byte (LP-S*** type), 49-byte (LP-S***W type)<br />

Read out the marking condition <strong>of</strong> logo fi le with the following format:<br />

STX CDC R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX CDC A<br />

Name<br />

Data<br />

[Logo No.]<br />

2-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[Logo No.] [Layer No.] [X Scale] [Y Scale] [X Position] [Y Position]<br />

[Rotation Angle] [Laser power correction] [Scan speed correction]<br />

Laser Pulse Cyc Cor. (Laser Pulse Cycle Correction)*<br />

52-byte (LP-S*** type), 49-byte (LP-S***W type)<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Content<br />

Logo Cond. No. 2 The number <strong>of</strong> array for logo condition is indicated. "00" to "99"<br />

Layer No. 2 Set the layer number. "00" to "15"<br />

X Scale 8<br />

Y Scale 8<br />

X Position 8 Specifi es X position <strong>of</strong> origin.<br />

Y Position 8 Specifi es Y position <strong>of</strong> origin.<br />

Rotation Angle 7<br />

Laser Power Correction<br />

3<br />

The X magnifi cation with which the logo fi le is marked is indicated.<br />

The Y magnifi cation with which the logo fi le is marked is indicated.<br />

The angle <strong>of</strong> rotation in counter-clockwise direction, centering<br />

on the origin position <strong>of</strong> logo fi le, is indicated.<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser power specifi ed at the<br />

laser setting.<br />

"0010.000" to "1000.000" [%]<br />

"-330.000" to "+330.000" [mm]<br />

"-180.00" to "+180.00" ["]<br />

"000" to "999" [%]<br />

Scan Speed Correction 3 Performs correction <strong>of</strong> the set scan speed at specifi ed value. "001" to "999" [%]<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)*<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value corresponding with the marking<br />

pulse cycle specifi ed value here.<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the LP-S***W type.)<br />

"001" to "999" [%]<br />

Use the CDD Command for the condition setting <strong>of</strong> DXF fi le.The common parameters with DXF are changed<br />

by either CDC/CDD command.<br />

79


� General Condition (Code: ALC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> general condition<br />

Set the logo fi le to the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

80<br />

STX ALC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> general condition<br />

Data<br />

[X Offset] [Y Offset] [System Reservation]<br />

[Rotation Offset] [Overwriting Frequency] [Overwriting Interval]<br />

[Mirror (Y Axis Summetry)] [Flip (X Axis Summetry)] [System Reservation]<br />

41-byte<br />

Read out the logo fi le in the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX ALC R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX ALC A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[X Offset] [Y Offset] [System Reservation]<br />

[Rotation Offset] [Overwriting Frequency] [Overwriting Interval]<br />

[Mirror (Y Axis Summetry)] [Flip (X Axis Summetry)] [System Reservation]<br />

41-byte<br />

X Offset 8 The marking position is <strong>of</strong>fset to the X direction.<br />

Y Offset 8 The marking position is <strong>of</strong>fset to the Y direction.<br />

System<br />

reservation<br />

Rotation Offset 7<br />

Overwriting<br />

Frequency<br />

Overwriting<br />

Interval<br />

Mirror (Y Axis<br />

Summetry)<br />

Flip (X Axis<br />

Summetry)<br />

System<br />

reservation<br />

8<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

To give compatibility to this command used in the<br />

LP-Z series, specify “+000.000” here.<br />

If you specify other value, data transmission can<br />

properly performed, but “+000.000” will always be<br />

returned as read-out data.<br />

The marking position is <strong>of</strong>fset to the rotating<br />

direction.<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

“+000.000”<br />

“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

4 Marking is repeated by the repeat number set. “0001” to “9999” [times]<br />

3 The interval period at overwriting marking is set.<br />

1 The character marked is inverted to the Y axis.<br />

1 The character marked is inverted to the X axis.<br />

(1)<br />

This fi eld is used for give compatibility to this<br />

command used in the LP-Z series, but it can be<br />

omitted.<br />

If you specify other value, data transmission can<br />

properly performed, but “0” will always be returned<br />

as read-out data.<br />

“0.0” to “9.9” [sec] or “000” to<br />

“060" [sec]<br />

“0”…inversion OFF “1”…<br />

inversion ON<br />

“0”…inversion OFF “1”…<br />

inversion ON<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

“0”


� Step & Repeat Condition (Code: SRC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> general condition<br />

Set the Step & Repeat condition for specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX SRC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> general condition<br />

Data<br />

[Step & Repeat] [Number <strong>of</strong> Row] [Number <strong>of</strong> column]<br />

[Row Step] [Column Step] [XOffset] [Y Offset]<br />

[Base Position] [Counter Update at each step]<br />

1/25/41-byte<br />

Read out the Step & Repeat condition for specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX SRC R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX SRC A<br />

Data<br />

[Step & Repeat] [Number <strong>of</strong> Row] [Number <strong>of</strong> column]<br />

[Row Step] [Column Step] [X Offset] [Y Offset]<br />

[Base Position] [Counter Update at each step]<br />

1/25/41-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Step & Repeat 1<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> Row 3<br />

Number <strong>of</strong><br />

column<br />

3<br />

Row Step 7<br />

Column Step 7<br />

Marking the same data is repeated to the X<br />

or Y axis direction.<br />

The number <strong>of</strong> row to be marked to the Y<br />

direction is indicated.<br />

The number <strong>of</strong> column to be marked to the<br />

X direction is indicated.<br />

“0”…OFF<br />

“1”… ON<br />

“001” to “400”…[row]<br />

(number <strong>of</strong> row x column < 4000)<br />

“001” to “400”…[column]<br />

(number <strong>of</strong> row x column < 4000)<br />

The marking pitch to the Y direction is<br />

specifi ed. LP-S500*:<br />

The marking pitch to the X direction is “000.000” to “090.000” [mm]<br />

specifi ed.<br />

X Offset (8) Specifi es X Offset <strong>of</strong> the reference step.<br />

Y Offset (8)<br />

Reference<br />

Position<br />

Selection<br />

Counter Update<br />

at each step<br />

Specifi es Y Offset <strong>of</strong> the reference step.<br />

(If both values <strong>of</strong> X&Y <strong>of</strong>fsets are “0“, X/Y <strong>of</strong>f<br />

setting can be omitted.)<br />

2 Select the base position.<br />

2 Handling <strong>of</strong> counter is indicated.<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

“00”…upper left<br />

“01”…upper right<br />

“10”…lower left<br />

“11”…lower right<br />

“00”…same in all steps<br />

“11”…missing number and marking<br />

laterally direction<br />

“12”…missing number and marking<br />

lengthways direction<br />

“21”…sequential number and<br />

marking laterally direction<br />

“22”…sequential number and<br />

marking lengthways direction<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

• When the Step and Repeat setting is set to “None,” the Step and Repeat setting can be omitted. If data is<br />

input and that data is out <strong>of</strong> the setting range, response data for abnormal receiving is returned.<br />

• When the data is readout under the step & repeat is set to "none", the subsequent fi elds following to "number<br />

<strong>of</strong> Row" is not readoutIf both values <strong>of</strong> X&Y <strong>of</strong>fsets are "0", X/Y <strong>of</strong>f setting can be omitted.<br />

81


� Step & Repeat Setting (Code: SRA)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment<br />

Set the instruction for fi ne adjustment with the following format:<br />

STX SRA S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment<br />

Data<br />

[List line] [Fine Adj. Type ] [Varies depending on the type <strong>of</strong> line adj.]<br />

Max. 605-byte<br />

Read out the instruction for fi ne adjustment with the following format:<br />

STX SRA R<br />

• Readout data<br />

Data<br />

[List line]<br />

4-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Read out the instruction data for fi ne adjustment with the following format:<br />

STX SRA A<br />

1. Setting deletion<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

List line 4<br />

Fine Adj. Type 1<br />

Number <strong>of</strong><br />

delete line<br />

2. Single<br />

Name<br />

(4)<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

List line 4<br />

Data<br />

[List line] [Fine Adj. Type] [Varies depending on the type <strong>of</strong> line adj.]<br />

Max. 605-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

The line in the list where this instruction is stores is<br />

indicated.<br />

The type <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment is<br />

indicated.<br />

The number <strong>of</strong> delete line is specifi ed. If only the fi rst<br />

line in the list line will be deleted, the setting can be<br />

omitted.<br />

“0000” to “0399”<br />

“0”…Setting deletion<br />

“0001” to “0400”<br />

Outline Description<br />

The line in the list where this instruction is stored is<br />

indicated.<br />

“0000” to “0399”<br />

Fine Adj. Type 1 The type <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment is indicated. “1”…single fi ne adjustment<br />

Target Row 3<br />

Target Column 3<br />

The target row to which the fi ne adjustment is<br />

provided is indicated.<br />

The target column to which the fi ne adjustment is<br />

provided is indicated.<br />

FineTune X 8 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for X axis is indicated.<br />

FineTune Y 8 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for Y axis is indicated.<br />

System<br />

reservation<br />

8<br />

To give compatibility to this command used in the<br />

LP-Z series, specify “+000.000” here.<br />

If you specify other value, data transmission can<br />

properly performed, but “+000.000” will always be<br />

returned as read-out data.<br />

“001” to “400”<br />

“001” to “400”<br />

LP-S500*1:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

“+000.000”<br />

Rotation Angle (7) Specifi es the rotation angle. *2 “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Laser Power<br />

Adjustment<br />

(3)<br />

The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for laser power is<br />

indicated. *2<br />

“-50” to “+50” [%]<br />

*1: For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

*2: When both setting values <strong>of</strong> the rotation angle and laser power adjustment are “0”, those settings can be omitted.<br />

82


3. In case <strong>of</strong> “Markig OFF”<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

List line 4 The line in the list where this instruction is stores is indicated. “0000” to “0399”<br />

Fine Adj. Type 1 The type <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment is indicated. “2”…Marking OFF<br />

Target Row 3<br />

Target Column 3<br />

The target row to which the fi ne adjustment is<br />

provided is indicated.<br />

The target column to which the fi ne adjustment is<br />

provided is indicated.<br />

* Setting <strong>of</strong> the target row and target column can be successively-implemented up to 100 sets.<br />

4. Setting deletion<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

“001” to “400”<br />

“001” to “400”<br />

Outline Description<br />

List line 4 The line in the list where this instruction is stored is indicated. “0000” to “0399”<br />

Fine Adj. Type 1 The type <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment is indicated. “3”…fi ne adjustment for all columns<br />

Target Column 3<br />

The target column to which the fi ne adjustment is<br />

provided is indicated.<br />

“001” to “400”<br />

FineTune X 8 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for X axis is indicated. LP-S500:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]*1<br />

FineTune Y 8 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for Y axis is indicated.<br />

System<br />

reservation<br />

8<br />

To give compatibility to this command used in the<br />

LP-Z series, specify “+000.000” here.<br />

If you specify other value, data transmission can<br />

properly performed, but “+000.000” will always be<br />

returned as read-out data.<br />

“+000.000”<br />

Rotation Angle (7) Specifi es the rotation angle. *2 “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Laser Power<br />

Adjustment<br />

(3)<br />

The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for laser power is<br />

indicated. *2<br />

“-50” to “+50” [%]<br />

*1: For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

*2: When both setting values <strong>of</strong> the rotation angle and laser power adjustment are “0”, those settings can be omitted.<br />

5. Fine adjustment for all rows<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

List line 4 The line in the list where this instruction is stored is indicated. “0000” to “0399”<br />

Fine Adj. Type 1 The type <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment is indicated. “3”…fi ne adjustment for all rows<br />

Target Row 3<br />

The target row to which the fi ne adjustment is<br />

provided is indicated<br />

“001” to “400”<br />

FineTune X 8 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for X axis is indicated. LP-S500*1:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

FineTune Y 8 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for Y axis is indicated.<br />

System<br />

reservation<br />

8<br />

To give compatibility to this command used in the<br />

LP-Z series, specify “+000.000” here.<br />

If you specify other value, data transmission can<br />

properly performed, but “+000.000” will always be<br />

returned as read-out data.<br />

“+000.000”<br />

Rotation Angle (7) Specifi es the rotation angle. *2 “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Laser Power<br />

Adjustment<br />

(3)<br />

The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for laser power is<br />

indicated. *2<br />

“-50” to “+50” [%]<br />

*1: For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

*2: When both setting values <strong>of</strong> the rotation angle and laser power adjustment are “0”, those settings can be omitted.<br />

83


6. Fine adjustment for column<br />

84<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

List line 4<br />

Fine Adj. Type 1<br />

Target Column 3<br />

Outline Description<br />

The line in the list where this instruction is stored is<br />

indicated.<br />

The type <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment is<br />

indicated.<br />

The target column to which the fi ne adjustment is<br />

provided is indicated.<br />

FineTune X 8 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for X axis is indicated.<br />

FineTune Y 8 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for Y axis is indicated.<br />

System<br />

reservation<br />

8<br />

To give compatibility to this command used in the<br />

LP-Z series, specify “+000.000” here.<br />

If you specify other value, data transmission can<br />

properly performed, but “+000.000” will always be<br />

returned as read-out data.<br />

“0000” to “0399”<br />

“3”…fi ne adjustment for columns<br />

“001” to “400”<br />

LP-S500*1:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

“+000.000”<br />

Rotation Angle (7) Specifi es the rotation angle. *2 “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Laser Power<br />

Adjustment<br />

(3)<br />

The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for laser power is<br />

indicated. *2<br />

“-50” to “+50” [%]<br />

*1: For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

*2: When both setting values <strong>of</strong> the rotation angle and laser power adjustment are “0”, those settings can be omitted.<br />

7. Fine adjustment for row<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

List line 4<br />

Fine Adj. Type 1<br />

Target Row 3<br />

Outline Description<br />

The line in the list where this instruction is stored is<br />

indicated.<br />

The type <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment is<br />

indicated.<br />

The target row to which the fi ne adjustment is<br />

provided is indicated.<br />

FineTune X 8 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for X axis is indicated.<br />

FineTune Y 8 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for Y axis is indicated.<br />

System<br />

reservation<br />

8<br />

To give compatibility to this command used in the<br />

LP-Z series, specify “+000.000” here.<br />

If you specify other value, data transmission can<br />

properly performed, but “+000.000” will always be<br />

returned as read-out data.<br />

“0000” to “0399”<br />

“3”…fi ne adjustment for columns<br />

“001” to “400”<br />

LP-S500*1:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

“+000.000”<br />

Rotation Angle (7) Specifi es the rotation angle. *2 “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Laser Power<br />

Adjustment<br />

(3)<br />

The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for laser power is<br />

indicated. *2<br />

“-50” to “+50” [%]<br />

*1: For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

*2: When both setting values <strong>of</strong> the rotation angle and laser power adjustment are “0”, those settings can be omitted.


� Character Condition (Code: STC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> character condition<br />

Set the instruction for fi ne adjustment with the following format:<br />

STX STC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> character condition<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.] [Layer No.] [Start Line] [End Line]<br />

[Marking Shape] [Vary with the Marking Shape]<br />

[Font No.] [Bold Line Width] [Laser Power Correction]<br />

[Scan Speed Correction] [Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]*<br />

Max. 85-byte (LP-S*** type), Max. 82-byte ((LP-S***W type)<br />

Read out the instruction for fi ne adjustment with the following format:<br />

STX STC R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX STC A<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.]<br />

2-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.] [Layer No.] [Start Line] [End Line]<br />

[Marking Shape] [Vary with the Marking Shape]<br />

[Font No.] [Bold Line Width] [Laser Power Correction]<br />

[Scan Speed Correction] [Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]*<br />

Max. 85-byte (LP-S*** type), Max. 82-byte ((LP-S***W type)<br />

1. When markings from is straight line/proportional/justify<br />

(Data length …77-byte (LP-S*** type), 74-byte (LP-S***W type))<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Condition No. 2 The number <strong>of</strong> array for marking condition is indicated. “01” to “99”<br />

Layer No. 2 Set the layer number. “00” to “15”<br />

Start Line 2<br />

End Line 2<br />

The start line <strong>of</strong> character string for marking with this<br />

condition is indicated.<br />

The end line <strong>of</strong> character string for marking with this condition<br />

is indicated.<br />

Marking Shape 1 The marking form is indicated.<br />

Alignment 1 The Alignment is indicated.<br />

Character Height 7 The height <strong>of</strong> character for marking is indicated.<br />

Character Width 7 The width <strong>of</strong> character for marking is indicated.<br />

“01” to “99” [row]<br />

“01” to “99” [row]<br />

“0”…straight line<br />

“1”…Proportional<br />

“2”…Justify<br />

“0”…left<br />

“1”…center<br />

“2”…right<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.100” to “090.00” [mm]<br />

X Position 8 The X coordinate where the fi rst character is marked is indicated. LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000”<br />

Y Position 8 The Y coordinate where the fi rst character is marked is indicated.<br />

[mm]<br />

85


86<br />

Character<br />

Interval/<br />

Character<br />

String Width<br />

7<br />

Line Interval 7<br />

Straight line: gap between adjacent characters by their<br />

respective reference points.<br />

Proportional: gap between the right end <strong>of</strong> a character and<br />

the left end <strong>of</strong> the next character.<br />

Justify: the total width <strong>of</strong> character string<br />

The marking interval to mark the next line is indicated when<br />

the character string is marked over two or more lines.<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.000” to “090.000”<br />

[mm]<br />

Tilt Angle 7 The tilt angle for character for marking to X axis is indicated. “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Font No. 2<br />

The number corresponding to the 10 fonts previously<br />

registered is indicated.<br />

Char. Font “01” to “10”<br />

Bold Line Width 5 The thickness <strong>of</strong> line for character for marking is indicated. “-0.000” to “2.000” [mm]<br />

Laser Power<br />

Corrrection<br />

Scan<br />

Speed Correction<br />

(Laser Pulse<br />

Cycle Cor.)*<br />

3<br />

3<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser power specifi ed at the<br />

laser setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value for the scan speed specifi ed at<br />

the laser setting<br />

Indicates the correction value corresponding with the marking<br />

pulse cycle specifi ed value here.<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the LP-S***W type.)<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

2. Single fi ne adjustment<br />

(Data length …85-byte (LP-S*** type), 82-byte (LP-S***W type))<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

Condition No. 2 The number <strong>of</strong> array for marking condition is indicated. “01” to “99”<br />

Layer No. 2 Set the layer number. “00” to “15”<br />

Start Line 2<br />

The start line <strong>of</strong> character string for marking with this<br />

condition is indicated.<br />

“01” to “99” [row]<br />

End Line 2 The end line <strong>of</strong> character string for marking with this condition is indicated. “01” to “99” [row]<br />

Marking Shape 1 The marking form is indicated.<br />

Alignment 1 The Alignment is indicated.<br />

“3”… marking outside arc<br />

with clockwise rotation<br />

“4”…marking inside arc with<br />

counterclockwise rotation<br />

“0”…left<br />

“1”…center<br />

“2”…right<br />

Character Height 7 The height <strong>of</strong> character for marking is indicated. LP-S500*:<br />

“000.100” to “090.00”<br />

Character Width 7 The width <strong>of</strong> character for marking is indicated.<br />

[mm]<br />

Center Position X 8 The center <strong>of</strong> X coordinate for arc is indicated. “-999.999” to “+999.999”<br />

[mm]<br />

Center Position Y 8 The center <strong>of</strong> Y coordinate for arc is indicated.<br />

Radius 8 The radius <strong>of</strong> arc is indicated.<br />

Radius <strong>of</strong> Line<br />

Interval<br />

7<br />

Start Angle 7<br />

Angle <strong>of</strong><br />

Character Interval<br />

7<br />

The difference <strong>of</strong> radius from the center position <strong>of</strong> marking<br />

position to the next line is indicated when the character string<br />

is marked over two or more lines.<br />

The angle from the positive (+) side <strong>of</strong> X coordinate with counterclockwise<br />

at the fi rst character in character string for marking is indicated.<br />

The angle between the center <strong>of</strong> character and the center <strong>of</strong><br />

next character is indicated.<br />

“+000.000” to “+999.999”<br />

[mm]<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.000” to “090.000”<br />

[mm]<br />

“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Font No. 2 The number corresponding to the 10 fonts previously registered is indicated. Char. Font “01” to “10”


Bold Line Width 5 The thickness <strong>of</strong> line for character for marking is indicated. “0.000” to “2.000” [mm]<br />

Laser Power<br />

Corrrection<br />

Scan<br />

Speed Correction<br />

(Laser Pulse<br />

Cycle Cor.)*<br />

3<br />

3<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser power specifi ed at the<br />

laser setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value for the scan speed specifi ed at<br />

the laser setting<br />

Indicates the correction value corresponding with the marking<br />

pulse cycle specifi ed value here.<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the LP-S***W type.)<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

• At marking <strong>of</strong> bold characters, set the values so ratio <strong>of</strong> character height to character width be within 1/10 to 10.<br />

• Set the Bold Line Width to 1/2 or less <strong>of</strong> the character height or the character width, whichever is smaller.<br />

� Character Condition (Shortened Form) (Code: SPC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> character condition (shortened form)<br />

Set the marking condition <strong>of</strong> character string with the following format:<br />

STX SPC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> character condition (shortened form)<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.] [X Position] [Y Position] [Laser Power Correction]<br />

21-byte<br />

Read out the marking condition <strong>of</strong> character string with the following format:<br />

STX SPC R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX SPC A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.]<br />

2-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.] [X Position] [Y Position] [Laser Power Correction]<br />

21-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Condition No. 2 The number <strong>of</strong> array for marking condition is indicated. “01” to “99”<br />

X Position 8<br />

Y Position 8<br />

Laser Power<br />

Corrrection<br />

3<br />

The X coordinate where the fi rst character is marked<br />

is indicated.<br />

The Y coordinate where the fi rst character is marked<br />

is indicated.<br />

Indicates the correction value corresponding with the<br />

marking pulse cycle specifi ed value here.<br />

When the marking form is<br />

other than sector marking<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

When the marking form is<br />

other than sector marking<br />

“-999.999” to “+999.999” [mm]<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

87


� Character Condition (Code: SCC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> general condition<br />

Sets the marking pitch interval for bold character and kerning for marking proportional character.<br />

88<br />

STX SCC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> general condition<br />

Data<br />

[Marking Pitch] [Kerning]<br />

6-byte<br />

STX SCC R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX SCC A<br />

Data<br />

[Marking Pitch] [Kerning]<br />

6-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Marking Pitch 5<br />

Kerning 1<br />

The marking pitch for the bold character is<br />

indicated.<br />

The minimum value <strong>of</strong> character interval<br />

with proportional form is specifi ed.<br />

“0.010” to “2.000” [mm]<br />

“1” … level 1<br />

(Minimize the base point <strong>of</strong><br />

the character interval with this<br />

condition. The letter-spacing <strong>of</strong> the<br />

letter “i” and “l” (small letter “L”)<br />

are recognized as “0”.)<br />

“2” … level 2<br />

(Set the origin point <strong>of</strong> the<br />

character with intermediate degree<br />

between the character interval<br />

set with Level 1 and Level 3.The<br />

character widths <strong>of</strong> “i” and “l” (small<br />

letter “L”) become 1/5 (half) <strong>of</strong> each<br />

character width.)<br />

“3” … level 3<br />

(Maximize the origin point <strong>of</strong><br />

the character interval with this<br />

condition. The character widths <strong>of</strong><br />

“i” and “l” (small letter “L”) become<br />

1/2 (half) <strong>of</strong> each character width.)


� Laser Power (Code: LPW)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> laser power<br />

Set the peak value <strong>of</strong> laser power with the following format:<br />

STX LPW S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> laser power<br />

Data<br />

[Laser Power]<br />

5-byte<br />

Read out the peak value <strong>of</strong> laser power with the following format:<br />

STX LPW R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX LPW A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Laser Power]<br />

5-byte<br />

Laser Power 5 The peak value <strong>of</strong> laser power is indicated.<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“012.0” to “100.0” by increment<br />

<strong>of</strong> 0.5<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

� Scan Speed (Code: SSP)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> scan speed<br />

Set the scan speed with the following format:<br />

STX SSP S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> scan speed<br />

Data<br />

[Scan Speed]<br />

5-byte<br />

Read out the scan speed with the following format:<br />

STX SSP R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX SSP A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Scan Speed]<br />

5-byte<br />

Scan Speed 5 The moving speed <strong>of</strong> laser is indicated.<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“00001” to “12000” [mm/s]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

89


� Laser Pulse Cycle (Code: MPL)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking pulse cycle<br />

Set the marking pulse cycle <strong>of</strong> laser with the following format:<br />

STX MPL S<br />

Data<br />

[Laser Pulse Cycle] [System Reservation]<br />

5-byte<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> marking pulse cycle<br />

Read out the marking pulse cycle <strong>of</strong> laser with the following format:<br />

90<br />

STX MPL R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX MPL A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Laser Pulse Cycle] [System Reservation]<br />

5-byte<br />

Laser Pulse Cycle 4 The marking pulse cycle is indicated.<br />

System<br />

reservation<br />

(1)<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

This fi eld is used for give compatibility to this command<br />

used in the LP-Z series, but it can be omitted.<br />

If you specify other value, data transmission can<br />

properly performed, but “0” will always be returned as<br />

read-out data.<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“02.0” to “20.0” [µS]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

“0”


� Line Width Correction (Code: WDC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> line width correction<br />

Set the line width for crossing avoidance at the crossing point <strong>of</strong> marking line with the following format:<br />

STX WDC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> line width correction<br />

Data<br />

[Line Width Correction] [System reservation]<br />

6-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Read out the line width for crossing avoidance at the crossing point <strong>of</strong> marking line with the following format:<br />

STX WDC R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX WDC A<br />

Name<br />

Correction <strong>of</strong><br />

Marking Line Width<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

System reservation (1)<br />

5<br />

Data<br />

[Line Width Correction] [System reservation]<br />

6-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

The line width for crossing avoidance at the crossing<br />

point <strong>of</strong> marking line is indicated.<br />

This fi eld is used for give compatibility to this command<br />

used in the LP-Z series, but it can be omitted.<br />

If you specify other value, data transmission can<br />

properly performed, but “0” will always be returned as<br />

read-out data.<br />

� Setting <strong>of</strong> Work Distance (Code: WRD)<br />

[LP-S***W type only]<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> work distance<br />

Set the work distance with the following format:<br />

STX WRD S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> work distance<br />

Data<br />

[Work distance]<br />

5-byte<br />

Readout the work distance value with the following format:<br />

STX WRD R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX WRD A<br />

Data<br />

[Work distance]<br />

5-byte<br />

“0.010” to “2.000” [mm]<br />

“0”<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Work distance 5 Work distance is indicated.<br />

LP-S500W*:<br />

“173.0” to “213.0” [mm]<br />

*For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212)<br />

91


� Trigger Condition (Code: TRG)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> trigger condition<br />

Set the trigger condition with the following format:<br />

92<br />

STX TRG S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> trigger condition<br />

Read out the trigger condition with the following format:<br />

Data<br />

[Moving Direction] [Encoder] [Trigger Type]<br />

3-byte<br />

STX TRG R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX TRG S<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Moving Direction 1<br />

Data<br />

[Moving Direction] [Encoder] [Trigger Type]<br />

3-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

The moving direction <strong>of</strong> line at marking to fl ying object<br />

is set.<br />

“0”…still “1”…left<br />

“2”…right<br />

“4”…back<br />

“3”…front<br />

Encoder 1 The ON/OFF <strong>of</strong> encoder signal is indicated. “0”…OFF “1”…ON<br />

Trigger Type 1<br />

Available only when the “moving speed” is “still”.<br />

The applicable mode <strong>of</strong> signal which is input into the<br />

trigger input for marking is indicated.<br />

“0”…trigger marking<br />

“1”…Equidistant marking


� Delay (Code: DLY)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> delay<br />

Set the delay with the following format:<br />

STX DLY S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> delay<br />

Data<br />

[Delay Distance/Time]<br />

6-byte<br />

Read out the delay setting with the following format:<br />

STX DLY R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX DLY A<br />

Name<br />

[Delay Distance/<br />

Time]<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Delay Distance/Time]<br />

6-byte<br />

� Marking Interval (Code: INT)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking interval<br />

Set the marking interval with the following format:<br />

STX INT S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> marking interval<br />

6<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

When the moving speed is “still”, delay time is shown<br />

and the marking start time after the trigger input is<br />

displayed.When the moving speed is other than “still”,<br />

delay distance is shown and the distance where the<br />

marking starts after the trigger input is displayed.<br />

(The delay time is displayed with the LP-S***W type.)<br />

Data<br />

[Marking interval]<br />

6-byte<br />

Read out the marking interval with the following format:<br />

STX INT R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX INT A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Marking Interval 6<br />

Data<br />

[Marking interval]<br />

6-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Delay Distance…“000.00” to<br />

“500.00” [mm]<br />

Delay Time…“000000” to<br />

“005000” [ms]<br />

Outline Description<br />

The marking interval is indicated, available only when<br />

the moving direction is other than “still” and trigger<br />

type is “equidistant”.<br />

“0000.0” to “3000.0” [mm]<br />

93


� Flying Object Wait (Code: MWT)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> fl ying object wait<br />

Set the fl ying object wait with the following format.<br />

94<br />

STX MWT S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> fl ying object wait<br />

Data<br />

[Flying Object Wait]<br />

6-byte<br />

Readout the setting value <strong>of</strong> fl ying object wait with the following format.<br />

STX MWT R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX MWT A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Flying Object Wait 6<br />

� Line Speed (Code: LSP)<br />

Data<br />

[Flying Object Wait]<br />

6-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

The value <strong>of</strong> the fl ying object wait is indicated,<br />

available only when the moving direction <strong>of</strong> marking<br />

object is other than “still”.<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> line speed<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

Set the moving speed <strong>of</strong> object to be marked with the following format:<br />

STX LSP S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> line speed<br />

Data<br />

[Line Speed]<br />

7-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Read out the setting value <strong>of</strong> moving speed <strong>of</strong> object to be marked with the following format:<br />

STX LSP R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX LSP A<br />

Name<br />

Data<br />

Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Line Speed 7<br />

Data<br />

[Line Speed]<br />

7-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

“000.00” to “500.00” [ms]<br />

Outline Description<br />

The speed with which the object to be marked passes<br />

is indicated, available only when the traveling direction<br />

is other than “still” and encoder signal is “OFF”.<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.060” to “240.000” [m/min]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).


� Encoder Signal (Code: ENC)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> encoder signal<br />

Set the pulse number <strong>of</strong> encoder with the following format:<br />

STX ENC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> encoder signal<br />

Data<br />

[Encoder signal]<br />

6-byte<br />

Read out the pulse number <strong>of</strong> encoder with the following format:<br />

STX ENC R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX ENC A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Encoder Pulse 6<br />

Data<br />

[Encoder signal]<br />

6-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Available only when the moving direction is other than<br />

“still”. The pulse number <strong>of</strong> encoder is indicated.<br />

“005.00” to “600.00” [Pulse/mm]<br />

95


� Year/Month/Date/Time (Code: YMD)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> year/month/date/time<br />

Set the clock in the system with the following format:<br />

96<br />

STX YMD S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> year/month/date/time<br />

Data<br />

[Dominical Year] [Month] [Day] [Hour] [Min.] [Second]<br />

14-byte<br />

Read out the setting <strong>of</strong> clock in the system with the following format:<br />

STX YMD R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX YMD A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Dominical Year] [Month] [Day] [Hour] [Min.] [Second]<br />

14-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Dominical Year 4 Dominical year is indicated. “1980” to “2037” [year]<br />

Month 2 Month is indicated. “01” to “12” [month]<br />

Day 2 Date is indicated. “01” to “31” [day]<br />

Hour 2 Hour is indicated. “00” to “23” [hour]<br />

Min. 2 Minute is indicated. “00” to “59” [minute]<br />

Second 2 Second is indicated. “00” to “59” [second]<br />

The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.


� Era Year (Code: ERA)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> era year<br />

Set the era year with the following format:<br />

STX ERA S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> era year<br />

Data<br />

[Era year]<br />

4-byte<br />

Read out the setting <strong>of</strong> era year with the following format:<br />

STX ERA R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX ERA A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Era year]<br />

4-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Era Year 4 The era year is indicated. “0001” to “9999” [year]<br />

The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.<br />

� Shutter (Code: SHT)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> shutter<br />

Set the control <strong>of</strong> shutter with the following format:<br />

STX SHT S<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Shutter]<br />

1-byte<br />

Shutter Status 1 The control <strong>of</strong> shutter is indicated.<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

“0”…close<br />

“1”…open<br />

• <strong>Control</strong> <strong>of</strong> shutter by this command is unavailable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface <strong>of</strong> controller<br />

is turned to OFF.<br />

• Use the marking mode command (MKM) instead <strong>of</strong> the shutter command (SHT) when the number <strong>of</strong> open<br />

and shut <strong>of</strong> the shutter is a lot.<br />

• Response data for abnormal receiving (NAK03) is returned when shutter open command is transmitted in<br />

shutter open status.<br />

97


� Marking Mode (Code: MKM)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking mode<br />

Set the interruption/restart <strong>of</strong> marking during operation with the following format:<br />

98<br />

STX MKM S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> marking mode<br />

Data<br />

[Marking Mode]<br />

1-byte<br />

Read out the mode during marking with the following format:<br />

STX MKM R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX MKM A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Marking Mode]<br />

1-byte<br />

Marking Mode 1 The marking mode is indicated.<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Marking ready is set to OFF while the marking mode is interruption.<br />

� Counter Reset (Code: CTR)<br />

• Counter reset<br />

Set the counter <strong>of</strong> fi le currently selected to the initial value.<br />

STX CTR S<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Counter 0 1<br />

Counter 1 1<br />

Counter 2 1<br />

Counter 3 1<br />

Counter 4 * 1<br />

Counter 5 * 1<br />

Counter 6 * 1<br />

Counter 7 * 1<br />

* Counters 4 to 7 are common counters.<br />

Data<br />

[counter 0 to 7]<br />

8-byte<br />

ON/OFF <strong>of</strong> counter reset is specifi ed.<br />

Outline Description<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

“0”…interrupt<br />

“1”…restart<br />

Outline Description<br />

“0”…reset OFF<br />

“1”…reset ON


� Status Request (Code: STS)<br />

• Status Request<br />

Read out the operating status <strong>of</strong> laser marker with the following format:<br />

STX STS R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Response to status request<br />

Read out with the following format:<br />

STX STS A<br />

Name<br />

Error occurrence<br />

status<br />

Laser Pumping<br />

Status<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Error occurrence status] [Laser Pumping Status]<br />

[Standby Status] [Marking Ready Status] [Trigger Status]<br />

5-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

1 The status <strong>of</strong> error occurrence is indicated. “0”…no error “1”…error occurrence<br />

1 The status <strong>of</strong> laser pumping is indicated.<br />

Standby Status 1 The status <strong>of</strong> marking operation is indicated.<br />

Marking Ready<br />

Status<br />

1<br />

Trigger Status 1<br />

The status <strong>of</strong> marking trigger acceptability is<br />

indicated.<br />

The status <strong>of</strong> trigger input (TRIG.IN) is<br />

indicated when “equidistant marking” is<br />

selected at trigger condition.<br />

* Marking is enable when the response data is either “02110” or “02111”.<br />

“0”…laser pumping OFF<br />

“1”…laser pumping<br />

“2”…laser pumping completed<br />

“0”…standby<br />

“1”…marking being operated<br />

“0”…marking disable (ready OFF)<br />

“1”…marking enable (ready ON)<br />

“0”…trigger OFF<br />

“1”…Trigger ON<br />

99


� Laser Pumping (Code: LSR)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> laser Pumping<br />

Set the status <strong>of</strong> laser with the following format:<br />

100<br />

STX LSR S Data (1-byte) (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> laser pumping state<br />

Read out the status <strong>of</strong> laser with the following format:<br />

STX LSR R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX LSR A Data (1-byte) (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Laser Pumping 1 The status <strong>of</strong> laser is indicated.<br />

Outline Description<br />

“0”…OFF<br />

“1”…ON<br />

• <strong>Control</strong> <strong>of</strong> laser pumping by this command is unavailable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface <strong>of</strong><br />

controller is turned to OFF.<br />

• After the start <strong>of</strong> pumping, marking is not started for about 20 seconds with LP-S*** type and about 15<br />

seconds with LP-S***W type.<br />

� Marking Trigger (Code: MRK)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking trigger<br />

Set the trigger in marking trigger waiting status with the following format:<br />

STX MRK S Data (1-byte) (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name<br />

Marking<br />

Specifi cation<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

1<br />

Outline Description<br />

The instruction <strong>of</strong> marking start/stop is executed<br />

when “equidistant marking” is set at the trigger type<br />

in the trigger condition (TRG command). Marking<br />

is performed at command reception, regardless <strong>of</strong><br />

the setting in “trigger marking” when “even interval<br />

marking” is set at the trigger type.<br />

“0”…stop<br />

“1”…start<br />

Marking is performed at command reception, regardless <strong>of</strong> the setting in “marking trigger” when “equidistant<br />

marking” is set at the trigger type.


� Guide LD Display (Code: GID)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> Guide LD Display:<br />

STX GID S<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Display method] [Scan Speed ] [System reservation]<br />

Max. 14-byte<br />

Display method 1 Specifi es the display method <strong>of</strong> the guide LD.<br />

Scan Speed 5<br />

System<br />

reservation<br />

(8)<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

The moving speed <strong>of</strong> the guide indication is indicated.<br />

(omissible)<br />

This fi eld is used for give compatibility to this<br />

command used in the LP-Z series, but it can be<br />

omitted.<br />

If you specify other value, data transmission can<br />

properly performed, but “+000.000” will always be<br />

returned as read-out data. (omissible)<br />

“0”: Display stop<br />

“1”: Marking area<br />

“2”: Marking Character<br />

“3”: Work Image Display<br />

“4”: Dual pointer<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“00001” to “06000”<br />

“+000.000”<br />

• Omit the system reservation too if omitting the scan speed setting.<br />

(You cannot omit only the scan speed setting.)<br />

• This command that controls the red guide LD become unavailable when DIP switch (No.2) on the back <strong>of</strong> the<br />

controller is turned OFF.<br />

101


� Marking Status Transmission Permission (Code: MST)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking status transmission permission<br />

Set the transmission permission/prohibition <strong>of</strong> response synchronized with marking completion or occurrence <strong>of</strong> area over<br />

for marking with the following format:<br />

102<br />

STX MST S Data (1-byte) (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> transmission permission/prohibition <strong>of</strong> response<br />

Read out the transmission permission/prohibition <strong>of</strong> response with the following format:<br />

STX MST R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX MST A Data (1-byte) (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name<br />

Trans-mission<br />

Permission/<br />

Prohibition<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

1<br />

Outline Description<br />

The status <strong>of</strong> transmission permission for response is<br />

indicated.<br />

• Data transmission after setting marking status transmission permission<br />

“0”…Transmission prohibited<br />

“1”…Transmission permitted<br />

The status is transmitted if the marking failure occurs when marking is normally completed or when character string is set<br />

outside the marking area transmission permission when receiving a marking trigger from the RS-232C after marking status<br />

transmission permission is set.<br />

STX MST A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Status] [Energy Measurement] [Marking Energy Value]<br />

(Data length …14-byte (LP-S*** type), 4-byte (LP-<br />

S***W type))<br />

Status 4 The status after marking operation is indicated.<br />

(Marking Energy<br />

Measurement)*<br />

(Marking Energy<br />

Value)*<br />

1<br />

9<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Indicates the result <strong>of</strong> marking energy measurement.<br />

(LP-S*** type only)<br />

Indicates the marking energy.<br />

(LP-S*** type only)<br />

“0000”…Marking is normally<br />

completed.<br />

Others: Error code at marking<br />

operation<br />

“0”: Marking Energy Correct<br />

“1”: Marking Energy Incorrect<br />

“2”: Determination Impossible<br />

(when an error other than<br />

E710 occurs or after the<br />

power check completes.)<br />

“000000100” to “999999999”<br />

[mJ]<br />

It is valid in the correct<br />

operation and E710. In<br />

other cases, “000000000” is<br />

indicated.<br />

When marking status function is used, set the transmission permission before every shifting to the remote<br />

mode.<br />

When the remote mode is released, the marking status transmission is returned to the default transmission<br />

prohibition.


� I/O Environment (Code: ENV)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> I/O environment<br />

Set the I/O environment.<br />

STX ENV S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> I/O environment<br />

Data<br />

[One-shot time] [Detect TRIG. warning during marking]<br />

4-byte<br />

Read out the setting <strong>of</strong> I/O environment with the following format:<br />

STX ENV R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX ENV A<br />

Data<br />

[One-shot time] [Detect TRIG. warning during marking]<br />

4-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

One-shot time 3<br />

Detect TRIG.<br />

warning during<br />

marking<br />

1<br />

The delay time <strong>of</strong> terminal output OFF at the<br />

end <strong>of</strong> marking is indicated.<br />

The output status <strong>of</strong> warning at detection <strong>of</strong><br />

trigger during marking operation is indicated.<br />

The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.<br />

“002” to “510” [ms]<br />

“0”…no output<br />

“1”…output<br />

103


� Marking Quality Adjustment (Code: WTC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking quality adjustment<br />

Set the adjustment <strong>of</strong> start point, end point, edge and curve with the following format:<br />

104<br />

STX WTC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> marking quality adjustment<br />

Data<br />

[Laser Adjustment <strong>of</strong> Starting Point] [Laser Adjustment <strong>of</strong> Ending Point]<br />

[Edge Adjustment] [Curve Adjustment] [Waiting Time] [Pre-scan Time]<br />

[Jump Adjustment] [Point Radiation ON] [Point Radiation OFF]<br />

Max. 33-byte<br />

Read out the adjustment <strong>of</strong> start point, end point, edge and curve with the following format:<br />

STX WTC R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX WTC A<br />

Data<br />

[Laser Adjustment <strong>of</strong> Starting Point] [Laser Adjustment <strong>of</strong> Ending Point]<br />

[Edge Adjustment] [Curve Adjustment] [Waiting Time] [Pre-scan Time]<br />

[Jump Adjustment] [Point Radiation ON] [Point Radiation OFF]<br />

33-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Adjustment <strong>of</strong><br />

Laser Start Point<br />

Adjustment <strong>of</strong><br />

Laser End Point<br />

4 The timing <strong>of</strong> starting laser is adjusted. “-100” to “+100”<br />

4 The timing <strong>of</strong> stopping laser is adjusted. “-100” to “+100”<br />

Edge Adjustment 3 The wait at edge is adjusted. “000” to “100”<br />

Curve Adjustment 3 The wait at curved line is adjusted. “000” to “100”<br />

Waiting Time 3 The waiting time is adjusted. “000” to “100”<br />

Pre-scan Time 5 The pre-scan time is adjusted. “00.00” to “10.00” [mS]<br />

Jump Adjustment 3<br />

Point Radiation<br />

ON<br />

Point Radiation<br />

OFF<br />

4<br />

4<br />

The correction value <strong>of</strong> galvano jump is<br />

adjusted. (omissible)<br />

The timing <strong>of</strong> the fi xed point radiation ON is<br />

adjusted. (omissible *)<br />

The timing <strong>of</strong> the fi xed point radiation OFF is<br />

adjusted. (omissible *)<br />

“000” to “100”<br />

“0.00” to “9.99”<br />

“0.00” to “9.99”<br />

* Only one <strong>of</strong> [Point Radiation ON] and [Point Radiation OFF] cannot be omitted. (Response is not omitted.)


� Laser Check Radiation (Code: SPT)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> laser check<br />

The laser check is controlled.<br />

The laser is radiated at the center position. The laser power can be changed by setting the laser condition.<br />

STX SPT S Data (1-byte) (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name<br />

Laser Check<br />

Radiation<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

1<br />

Outline Description<br />

The start/stop <strong>of</strong> laser check is<br />

controlled.<br />

“0”…stop:<br />

Spot radiation is stopped and the<br />

internal shutter is closed.<br />

“1”…start: Laser check is started. When the<br />

internal shutter has been closed, it<br />

is opened to perform spot radiation.<br />

(The setting can be transmitted to<br />

the laser marker when the internal<br />

shutter is closed or when the laser<br />

marking is interrupted.)<br />

“2”…interrupt Laser check is interrupted. The<br />

internal shutter, however, is not<br />

closed.<br />

• <strong>Control</strong> <strong>of</strong> laser check by this command is unavailable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface <strong>of</strong><br />

controller is turned to OFF.<br />

• The setting can be transmitted to the laser marker only when the laser check is interrupted.<br />

� Rank Condition (Code: RKC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> rank condition<br />

Set the rank condition with the following format:<br />

STX RKC S Data (1-byte) (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> rank condition<br />

Read out the rank condition with the following format:<br />

STX RKC R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX RKC A Data (1-byte) (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Parallel Input 1 The condition for parallel input is indicated.<br />

“1”…4-bit × 4<br />

“2”…8-bit × 2<br />

105


� Rank Character String (Code: RKS)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> rank character string<br />

Set the rank character string <strong>of</strong> specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

106<br />

STX RKS S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> rank character string<br />

Data<br />

[Rank No.] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 21-byte<br />

Read out the rank character string <strong>of</strong> specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX RKS R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX RKS A<br />

Data<br />

[Rank No.]<br />

3-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Rank No.] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 21-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Rank No. 3<br />

Marking<br />

Character<br />

String<br />

Max 18<br />

The number in which the character<br />

string is set is indicated.<br />

The setting range varies depending<br />

on the condition <strong>of</strong> parallel input.<br />

The character string to be marked<br />

with the specifi ed period is set.<br />

Specify 0-byte <strong>of</strong> data length<br />

to delete the character string <strong>of</strong><br />

period.<br />

Parallel Input Setting range<br />

8-bit (D15-8) “256” to “511”<br />

8-bit (D7-0) “000” to “255”<br />

4-bit (D15-12) “048” to “063”<br />

4-bit (D11-8) “032” to “047”<br />

4-bit (D7-4) “016” to “031”<br />

4-bit (D3-0) “000” to “015”<br />

Use the shift JIS code.


� Offset Condition (Code: OFC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong>fset condition<br />

Set the <strong>of</strong>fset condition with the following format:<br />

STX OFC S Data (1-byte) (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong>fset condition<br />

Read out the <strong>of</strong>fset condition with the following format:<br />

STX OFC R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX OFC A Data (1-byte) (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

<strong>External</strong> Offset 1 The condition for parallel input is indicated.<br />

“0”…no use<br />

“1”…low 4-bit<br />

“2”…low 8-bit<br />

“3”…low 10-bit<br />

“4”…Serial Data mode<br />

107


� Offset (Code: OFS)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong>fset<br />

Set the <strong>of</strong>fset <strong>of</strong> specifi ed <strong>of</strong>fset number with the following format:<br />

108<br />

STX OFS S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong>fset<br />

Data<br />

[Offset No.] [X Offset] [Y Offset]<br />

[System Reservation] [Offset θ] [Power correction]<br />

38-byte<br />

Read out the <strong>of</strong>fset <strong>of</strong> specifi ed <strong>of</strong>fset number with the following format:<br />

STX OFS R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX OFS A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Offset No.]<br />

4-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Offset No.] [X Offset] [Y Offset]<br />

[Offset θ] [Power correction]<br />

38-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Offset No. 4 The number in which <strong>of</strong>fset is set is indicated. “0000” to “1023”<br />

X Offset 8 The <strong>of</strong>fset <strong>of</strong> X coordinate is indicated.<br />

Y Offset 8 The <strong>of</strong>fset <strong>of</strong> Y coordinate is indicated.<br />

System<br />

reservation<br />

8<br />

To give compatibility to this command used in the<br />

LP-Z series, specify “+000.000” here.<br />

If you specify other value, data transmission can<br />

properly performed, but “+000.000” will always be<br />

returned as read-out data.<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

“+000.0000”<br />

Offset θ 7 The rotation <strong>of</strong>fset is indicated. “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Power correction 3 The power correction is indicated. “000” to “999”<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).


� Serial Offset (Code: SEO)<br />

• Serial <strong>of</strong>fset setting<br />

STX SEO S<br />

Data<br />

[X Offset] [Y Offset] [System reservation]<br />

[θ Offset] [Power correction]<br />

34-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

The command for serial <strong>of</strong>fset input is enable when serial <strong>of</strong>fset is set with external <strong>of</strong>fset condition.<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

X Offset 8<br />

Y Offset 8<br />

System<br />

reservation<br />

8<br />

Offset θ 7<br />

Laser Power<br />

Correction<br />

3<br />

The <strong>of</strong>fset <strong>of</strong> X coordinate is<br />

indicated.<br />

The <strong>of</strong>fset <strong>of</strong> Y coordinate is<br />

indicated.<br />

To give compatibility to this<br />

command used in the LP-Z series,<br />

specify “+000.000” here.<br />

If you specify other value, data<br />

transmission can properly<br />

performed, but “+000.000” will<br />

always be returned as read-out<br />

data.<br />

The <strong>of</strong>fset <strong>of</strong> θ coordinate is<br />

indicated.<br />

Indicates the correction value for<br />

laser power specifi ed at the laser<br />

setting.<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

“+000.0000”<br />

“-180.00” to “+180.00”<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

Transmission is available only during remote control and when the internal shutter is opened (excepting during<br />

marking suspension).<br />

109


� Bar Code Marking Condition (Code: BRF)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> bar code marking condition<br />

110<br />

STX BRF S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> bar code marking condition<br />

Format (other than composite)<br />

STX BRF R<br />

Format (in case <strong>of</strong> composite)<br />

STX BRF R<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Layer No.] [Type] [Setting Data]<br />

(varies depending on bar code type)<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.]<br />

2-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Setting Section]<br />

3-byte<br />

Specify “1”(1D side) or “2”(2D side) for Setting section.<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX BRF A<br />

1. QR Code (Data length...44-byte)<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Layer No.] [Type] [Setting Data]<br />

(varies depending on bar code type)<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Bar Code No. 2 Bar code which sets the condition “00” to “15”<br />

Layer No. 2 Set the layer number. “00” to “15”<br />

Type 2 Specifi es bar code type<br />

System reservation 1 Switch for system reservation.<br />

Version 2<br />

Specifi es version <strong>of</strong> QR code.<br />

When specifying “00”, it is automatically<br />

specifi ed.<br />

Data Input Mode 1 Data input mode <strong>of</strong> QR code<br />

Error Correction<br />

Level<br />

1 Error correction level <strong>of</strong> QR code<br />

“10”: model 1<br />

“11”: model 2<br />

“12”: micro QR code<br />

“0” fi xed<br />

(System reservation)<br />

Model 1: “00” to “14”<br />

Model 2: “00” to “22”<br />

Micro QR: “00” to “04”<br />

“0”: Number<br />

“1”: Alpha (text)<br />

“2”: Binary<br />

“3”: Kanji<br />

“0”: L (High density level)<br />

“1”: M(Standard level)<br />

“2”: Q (High responsibility level)<br />

“3”: H (Super high responsibility level)<br />

For micro QR, this H: super high<br />

reliability cannot be specifi ed.


X Position 8 X coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> QR code<br />

Y Position 8 Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> QR code<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

Rotation Angle 7 Rotation angle <strong>of</strong> QR code “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Module H. 5 Interval <strong>of</strong> module in longitudinal direction.<br />

Module W. 5 Interval <strong>of</strong> module in lateral direction<br />

“0.001” to “9.999” [mm]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

2. In case <strong>of</strong> data matrix code / GS1 data matrix code (Data length: 44-byte)<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

Bar Code No. 2 Bar code which sets the condition “00” to “15”<br />

Layer No. 2 Set the layer number. “00” to “15”<br />

Type 2 Specifi es bar code type<br />

Human Readable<br />

Text<br />

Data Input Mode 1 Data Input Mode.<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> Row 2<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> column 2<br />

1 Sets valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> human readable text.<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> module in Y direction<br />

Specifying “00” for number <strong>of</strong> both row and<br />

column encodes with the minimum size<br />

(square).<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> module in X direction<br />

Specifying “00” for number <strong>of</strong> both row and<br />

column encodes with the minimum size<br />

(square).<br />

“20”: Data matrix (ECC200)<br />

“21”: GS1 Data Matrix<br />

“0”… OFF<br />

“1”… ON<br />

(“0” is specifi ed for the data matrix.)<br />

“0”: Binary<br />

“1”: Kanji<br />

“0” is specifi ed for the GS1 data<br />

matrix<br />

“00”, “08” to “88”<br />

(Combination <strong>of</strong> number <strong>of</strong> row and<br />

column is limited. *1)<br />

“00”, “10” to “80”<br />

(Combination <strong>of</strong> number <strong>of</strong> row and<br />

column is limited.*1)<br />

X Position 8 X coordinate <strong>of</strong> center LP-S500*2:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

Y Position 8 Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> center<br />

Rotation Angle 7 Rotation angle “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Module H. 5 Interval <strong>of</strong> module in longitudinal direction.<br />

Module W. 5 Interval <strong>of</strong> module in lateral direction<br />

*1: Available combination <strong>of</strong> number <strong>of</strong> row and column Auto:<br />

Auto : 00 × 00<br />

Square :<br />

“0.001” to “9.999” [mm]<br />

10 × 10, 12 × 12, 14 × 14, 16 × 16, 18 × 18, 20 × 20, 22 × 22, 24 × 24, 26 × 26,<br />

32 × 32, 36 × 36, 40 × 40, 48 × 48, 52 × 52, 64 × 64, 72 × 72, 80 × 80, 88 × 88<br />

Rectangle : 08 × 18, 08 × 32, 12 × 26, 12 × 36, 16 × 36, 16 × 48<br />

*2: For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

111


3. In case <strong>of</strong> ITF/CODE39/NW-7<br />

(Data length …60-byte (LP-S*** type), 57-byte (LP-S***W type))<br />

112<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

Bar Code No. 2 Bar code which sets the condition “00” to “15”<br />

Layer No. 2 Set the layer number. “00” to “15”<br />

Type 2 Specifi es bar code type<br />

Human Readable Text 1 Sets valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> human readable text.<br />

Inversion 1 Indicates valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> inversion<br />

Check Character/Start/<br />

Stop Character<br />

1<br />

Height 7 Height <strong>of</strong> bar code<br />

Narrow Element 5<br />

Indicates existence <strong>of</strong> check character and<br />

start/stop character <strong>of</strong> NW-7.<br />

Indicates the width <strong>of</strong> narrow element <strong>of</strong> bar<br />

and space<br />

“00”: CODE39 “03”: NW-7<br />

“01”: ITF<br />

“0” fi xed<br />

(System reservation)<br />

“0”: invalid<br />

“1”: valid<br />

In case <strong>of</strong> CODE39, ITF<br />

“0”: Absence<br />

“1”: Presence<br />

In case <strong>of</strong> NW-7<br />

“A” to “D”: Check character absence<br />

“a” to “d”: Check character presence<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“001.000” to “090.00” [mm]<br />

“0.050” to “1.000” [mm]<br />

X Position 8 X coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> bar code LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

Y Position 8 Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> bar code<br />

Tilt Angle 7 Tilt angle <strong>of</strong> bar code. “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Quiet/<br />

Narrow Element W<br />

Wide/<br />

Narrow Element W<br />

Laser Power<br />

Corrrection<br />

Scan Speed Correction 3<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)<br />

4 Ratio <strong>of</strong> quiet width to narrow element width. “00.0” to “20.0”<br />

3<br />

3<br />

(3)<br />

Ratio <strong>of</strong> wide element width to narrow<br />

element width<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser power<br />

specifi ed at the laser setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value for the scan<br />

speed specifi ed at the laser setting<br />

Indicates the correction value corresponding<br />

with the marking pulse cycle specifi ed value<br />

here.<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the LP-S***W<br />

type.)<br />

“1.8” to “3.4”<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).


4. In case <strong>of</strong> CODE128, EAN/UPC (Data length…57byte)<br />

(Data length …57-byte (LP-S*** type), 54-byte (LP-S***W type))<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Bar Code No. 2<br />

Outline Description<br />

Function No. <strong>of</strong> bar code which specifi es the<br />

condition<br />

“00” to “15”<br />

Layer No. 2 Set the layer number. “00” to “15”<br />

Type 2 Specifi es the bar code type.<br />

Human Readable Text 1 Sets valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> human readable<br />

Inversion 1 Indicates valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> inversion<br />

“02”: CODE128<br />

“04”: EAN/UPC<br />

“0”: Invalid<br />

“1”: Valid<br />

“0”: Invalid<br />

“1”: valid<br />

System reservation 1 Switch for system reservation. “0” fi xed<br />

Height 7 Height <strong>of</strong> bar code<br />

Narrow Element 5<br />

Indicates the width <strong>of</strong> narrow element <strong>of</strong> bar<br />

and space<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“001.000” to “090.00” [mm]<br />

“0.050” to “1.000” [mm]<br />

X Position 8 X coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> bar code LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

Y Position 8 Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> bar code<br />

Tilt Angle 7 Tilt angle <strong>of</strong> bar code. “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Quiet/ 3 Ratio <strong>of</strong> quiet width to narrow element width. “00.0” to “20.0”<br />

Narrow Element W 4 Ratio <strong>of</strong> quiet width to narrow element width. “000” to “999” [%]<br />

Laser Power Correction 3<br />

Scan Speed Correction 3<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser power<br />

specifi ed at the laser setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value for the scan<br />

speed specifi ed at the laser setting<br />

Indicates the correction value corresponding<br />

with the marking pulse cycle specifi ed value<br />

here.<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the LP-S***W<br />

type.)<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

113


5. In case <strong>of</strong> RSS-14 (GS1 DataBar) Standard & Truncated/RSS (GS1 DataBar) Limited/RSS (GS1 DataBar)<br />

(Data length …52-byte (LP-S*** type), 49-byte (LP-S***W type))<br />

114<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

Bar Code No. 2 Bar code which sets the condition. “00” to “15”<br />

Layer No. 2 Set the layer number. “00” to “15”<br />

Type 2 Type <strong>of</strong> RSS code<br />

Human Readable Text 1<br />

Sets valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> human readable<br />

text<br />

Inversion 1 Indicates valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> inversion<br />

Bar Code Height 7 Height <strong>of</strong> bar code<br />

“30”: RSS-14 STD & Truncated<br />

“33”: RSS Limited<br />

“34”: RSS Expanded<br />

“40”: RSS-14 STD & Truncated CC-A<br />

“43”: RSS Limited CC-A<br />

“44”: RSS Expanded CC-A<br />

“50”: RSS-14 STD & Truncated CC-B<br />

“53”: RSS Limited CC-B<br />

“54”: RSS Expanded CC-B<br />

“0”: Invalid<br />

“1”: Valid<br />

“0”: Invalid<br />

“1”: Valid<br />

“2”: Valid (with guard)<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“001.000” to “090.00” [mm]<br />

Module width 5 Indicates the width <strong>of</strong> the basic module “0.050” to “1.000” [mm]<br />

X Position 8 X coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> bar code LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

Y Position 8 Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> bar code<br />

Tilt Angle 7 Tilt angle <strong>of</strong> bar code. “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Laser Power Correction 3<br />

Scan Speed Correction 3<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)*<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser<br />

power specifi ed at the laser setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value for the<br />

scan speed specifi ed at the laser setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value<br />

corresponding with the marking pulse<br />

cycle specifi ed value here.<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the LP-<br />

S***W type.)<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).


6. In case <strong>of</strong> RSS-14 (GS1 DataBar) Stacked/RSS-14 (GS1 DataBar) Stacked Omnidirectional 1D part <strong>of</strong> the<br />

composite<br />

(Data length …56-byte (LP-S*** type), 53-byte (LP-S***W type))<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

Bar Code No. 2 Bar code which sets the condition. “00” to “15”<br />

Layer No. 2 Set the layer number. “00” to “15”<br />

Type 2 Type <strong>of</strong> RSS code.<br />

Human Readable Text 1<br />

Sets valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> human readable<br />

text.<br />

Inversion 1 Indicates valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> inversion.<br />

Lower Bar Height<br />

(RSS-14 Stacked)<br />

One Bar Code H.<br />

(RSS-14 Stacked<br />

Omnidirectional)<br />

Separator Height/(W) 4<br />

7 Height <strong>of</strong> bar code.<br />

Ratio <strong>of</strong> separation pattern height to<br />

width.<br />

“31”: RSS-14 Stacked<br />

“32”: RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional<br />

“41”: RSS-14 Stacked CC-A<br />

“42”: RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional<br />

CC-A<br />

“51”: RSS-14 Stacked CC-B<br />

“52”: RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional<br />

CC-B<br />

“0”: Invalid<br />

“1”: Valid<br />

“0”: Invalid<br />

“1”: Valid<br />

“2”: Valid (with guard)<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“001.000” to “090.00” [mm]<br />

“00.0” to “10.0”<br />

Module width 5 Indicates the width <strong>of</strong> the basic module. “0.050” to “1.000” [mm]<br />

X Position 8 X coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> bar code. LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

Y Position 8 Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> bar code.<br />

Tilt Angle 7 Tilt angle <strong>of</strong> bar code. “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Laser Power Correction 3<br />

Scan Speed Correction 3<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)*<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser<br />

power specifi ed at the laser setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value for the<br />

scan speed specifi ed at the laser setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value<br />

corresponding with the marking pulse<br />

cycle specifi ed value here.<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the LP-<br />

S***W type.)<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

115


7. In case <strong>of</strong> RSS-14 (GS1 DataBar) Expanded Stacked or 1D part <strong>of</strong> the composite<br />

(Data length …58-byte (LP-S*** type), 55-byte (LP-S***W type))<br />

116<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

Bar Code No. 2 Bar code which sets the condition. “00” to “15”<br />

Layer No. 2 Set the layer number. “00” to “15”<br />

Type 2 Type <strong>of</strong> RSS code.<br />

Human Readable Text 1<br />

Sets valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> human readable<br />

text.<br />

Inversion 1 Indicates valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> inversion.<br />

One Bar Code H. 7 Height <strong>of</strong> bar code.<br />

Separator Height/(W) 4<br />

Symbol Char.<br />

In row<br />

2<br />

Ratio <strong>of</strong> separation pattern height to<br />

width.<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> Symbol Character in lateral<br />

direction.<br />

“35”: RSS Expanded Stacked<br />

“45”: RSS Expanded Stacked CC-A<br />

“55”: RSS Expanded Stacked CC-B<br />

“0”: Invalid<br />

“1”: Valid<br />

“0”: Invalid<br />

“1”: Valid<br />

“2”: Valid (with guard)<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“001.000” to “090.000” [mm]<br />

“00.0” to “10.0”<br />

“02” to “20” Only even value applied<br />

Module width 5 Indicates the width <strong>of</strong> the basic module “0.050” to “1.000” [mm]<br />

X Position 8 X coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> bar code. LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

Y Position 8 Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> bar code.<br />

Tilt Angle 7 Tilt angle <strong>of</strong> bar code. “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Laser Power Correction 3<br />

Scan Speed Correction 3<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)*<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser<br />

power specifi ed at the laser setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value for the<br />

scan speed specifi ed at the laser setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value<br />

corresponding with the marking pulse<br />

cycle specifi ed value here.<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the LP-<br />

S***W type.)<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).


8. In case <strong>of</strong> Composite (1D part) In case <strong>of</strong> EAN/UPC/EAN 128(GS1-128)<br />

(Data length …57-byte (LP-S*** type), 54-byte (LP-S***W type))<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Bar Code No. 2<br />

Outline Description<br />

Function No. <strong>of</strong> bar code which specifi es the<br />

condition<br />

“00” to “15”<br />

Layer No. 2 Set the layer number. “00” to “15”<br />

Type 2 Specifi es the bar code type.<br />

Human Readable Text 1 Sets valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> human readable.<br />

Inversion 1 Indicates valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> inversion.<br />

CC-A Composite<br />

“46”: EAN/UPC<br />

“47”: UCC/EAN128<br />

CC-B Composite<br />

“56”: EAN/UPC<br />

“57”: UCC/EAN128<br />

CC-C Composite<br />

“67”: UCC/EAN128<br />

“0”: Invalid<br />

“1”: Valid<br />

“0”: Invalid<br />

“1”: Valid<br />

System reservation 1 Switch for system reservation. “0” fi xed<br />

Bar Code Height 7 Height <strong>of</strong> bar code.<br />

Narrow Element 5<br />

Indicates the width <strong>of</strong> narrow element <strong>of</strong> bar<br />

and space.<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“001.000” to “090.000” [mm]<br />

“0.050” to “1.000” [mm]<br />

X Position 8 X coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> bar code. LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

Y Position 8 Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> bar code.<br />

Tilt Angle 7 Tilt angle <strong>of</strong> bar code. “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Quiet/<br />

Narrow Element W<br />

3 Ratio <strong>of</strong> quiet width to narrow element width. “00.0” to “20.0”<br />

Laser Power Correction 4 Ratio <strong>of</strong> quiet width to narrow element width. “000” to “999” [%]<br />

Scan Speed Correction 3<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)*<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser power<br />

specifi ed at the laser setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value for the scan<br />

speed specifi ed at the laser setting.<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the LP-S***W<br />

type.)<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

117


9. In case <strong>of</strong> the composite (2D)<br />

(Data length …34-byte (LP-S*** type), 31-byte (LP-S***W type))<br />

118<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

Bar Code No. 2 Bar code which sets the condition. “00” to “15”<br />

Layer No. 2 Set the layer number. “00” to “15”<br />

Type 2 Specifi es the bar code type.<br />

2D with human<br />

readable text<br />

1 2D Specifi es bar code type.<br />

Composit (CC-A)<br />

“40”: RSS-14 STD & Truncated CC-A<br />

“41”: RSS-14 Stacked CC-A<br />

“42”: RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional<br />

CC-A<br />

“43”: RSS Limited CC-A<br />

“44”: RSS Expanded CC-A<br />

“45”: RSS Expanded Stacked CC-A<br />

“46”: EAN/UPC CC-A<br />

“47”: UCC/EAN128 CC-A<br />

Composite (CC-B)<br />

“50”: RSS-14 STD & Truncated CC-B<br />

“51”: RSS-14 Stacked CC-B<br />

“52”: RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional<br />

CC-B<br />

“53”: RSS Limited CC-B<br />

“54”: RSS Expanded CC-B<br />

“55”: RSS Expanded Stacked CC-B<br />

“56”: EAN/UPC CC-B<br />

“57”: UCC/EAN128 CC-B<br />

Composite (CC-C)<br />

“67”: EAN128<br />

“2”: Invalid<br />

“3”: Valid<br />

Composite Row H 5 Height <strong>of</strong> 2D part. “0.050” to “9.999” [mm]<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> Column 2 The number <strong>of</strong> column <strong>of</strong> 2D part.<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> column 2 The number <strong>of</strong> row <strong>of</strong> 2D part.<br />

Separator Height/(W) 4 ― “00.0” to “10.0”<br />

Quiet/ (W) Ratio 4 ― “00.0” to “20.0”<br />

Error Correction Level 1 ―<br />

Laser Power<br />

Correction<br />

Scan Speed Correction 3<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)*<br />

3<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value for<br />

laser power specifi ed at the laser<br />

setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value for the<br />

scan speed specifi ed at the laser<br />

setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value<br />

corresponding with the marking<br />

pulse cycle specifi ed value here.<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the<br />

LP-S***W type.)<br />

“00”: Auto<br />

“03” to “90” (Limited: refer to the below)<br />

“00” for CC-A or CC-B<br />

“00” to “30” for CC-C (“00” is Auto)<br />

“0” for CC-A or CC-B<br />

“0” to “9” for CC-C<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]


� Bar Code Marking Data (Code: BRS)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> bar code marking data<br />

STX BRS S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> bar code marking data<br />

STX BRS R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX BRS A<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Line Number] [Marking Data]<br />

Max. 63-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Line No.]<br />

3/4-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Line Number] [Marking Data]<br />

Max. 63-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Bar Code No. 2 Bar code which sets the condition. “00” to “15”<br />

Line No. 1 or 2 Specifi es the line for data setting.<br />

Marking Data Max 60<br />

1D code: “1” to “2”<br />

2D code: “1” to “9”<br />

2D part <strong>of</strong> Composite: “01” to “09”<br />

Specifi es the character string within 30 characters with shift JIS code for setting in<br />

the specifi ed line.<br />

However, for the functional characters, specifi es in one-byte characters with<br />

beginning with “%” (25(HEX)).<br />

In case <strong>of</strong> barcode marking, each line is connected in the order <strong>of</strong> number, and<br />

barcode is generated. Be sure that the connected data length must be less than<br />

510-byte.<br />

• Only the ASCII Code that is compliant to JIS Standard shown above is supported by the laser marker. (The<br />

ASCII Code defi ned by the IEC/ANSI Standard differs from the ASCII Code shown above.)<br />

• When using the external device set by 2byte, NUL00 (HEX) can be used. Please add NUL00 (HEX) before<br />

STX or after delimiter.<br />

• In case <strong>of</strong> CODE128, Data Matrix Code, and Composite (2D bar code), the control code can be specifi ed<br />

to the marking data, however, it cannot be transmitted/received by RS-232C. Therefore, use the following<br />

alternate codes.<br />

<strong>Control</strong> Code : 00 (HEX) to 1F (HEX), 7F (HEX), FUNC1<br />

Alternate code : F050 (HEX) to F06F (HEX), F071 (HEX), F072 (HEX)<br />

119


� 2D Code Pattern (Code: BRP)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> 2D code pattern<br />

120<br />

STX BRP S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> 2D code pattern<br />

STX BRP R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX BRP A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Pattern No.] [Character Code]<br />

[Laser Power Correction] [Scan Speed Correction]<br />

[Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]*<br />

(Data length …16-byte (LP-S*** type), 13-byte (LP-<br />

S***W type))<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Pattern No.]<br />

3-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Pattern No.] [Character Code]<br />

[Laser Power Correction] [Scan Speed Correction]<br />

[Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]*<br />

(Data length …16-byte (LP-S*** type), 13-byte (LP-<br />

S***W type))<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Bar Code No. 2 Bar code which sets the condition “00” to “15”<br />

Pattern No. 1 Specifi es the type <strong>of</strong> pattern<br />

Character code 4<br />

Laser Power<br />

Correction<br />

Scan Speed Correction 3<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)*<br />

3<br />

(3)<br />

Specifi es the character code to be used<br />

as a pattern in JIS code. Set “0000” to<br />

no marking pattern. However, when the<br />

alignment/fi nder pattern <strong>of</strong> 2D code is set<br />

to “0000”, marking is performed using dark/<br />

light module.<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser<br />

power specifi ed at the laser setting.<br />

Performs correction <strong>of</strong> the set scan speed<br />

at specifi ed value.<br />

Indicates the correction value<br />

corresponding with the marking pulse cycle<br />

specifi ed value here.<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the LP-<br />

S***W type.)<br />

• QR code:<br />

“0”: Margin<br />

“1”: Dark Module<br />

“2”: Light Module<br />

“3”: Alignment<br />

“4”: Finder<br />

• Data Matrix code:<br />

“0”: Quiet Zone:<br />

“1”: Mark Module<br />

“2”: Space Module<br />

“3”: Border<br />

“4”: Finder<br />

“0000”, “2230” to “2239” or “8121” to<br />

“8152”<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]


� Bar Code Marking Data (one-byte Character) (Code: BCS)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking character string<br />

STX BCS S<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Line No.] [Bar Code Data]<br />

Max. 34-byte<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> bar code setting (one-byte character)<br />

Reads the bar code data on the specifi ed line No.<br />

STX BCS R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX BCS A<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Line No.]<br />

Max. 4-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Line No.] [Bar Code Data]<br />

Max. 34-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• If readout data includes function characters (such as “%SFT”), they are read out as “%SFT”. (A value that<br />

can be got from a function character is not read out.)<br />

• If readout data includes characters that cannot be expressed in ASCII code such as Katakana and Kanji (2byte<br />

character), only these 2-byte characters are read out in shift JIS code.<br />

• Use the BRS command (2-byte character) when bar code data includes a control code.<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

Bar Code No. 2 Specifi es bar code No. “00” to “15”<br />

Line No. 1 or 2 Specifi es the line for data setting.<br />

Bar Code Data<br />

(at setting)<br />

Max 30<br />

Specifi es the character setting in the<br />

specifi ed line.<br />

Specify the data length with 0 byte in order<br />

to delete the character string.<br />

1D code: “1” to “2”<br />

2D code: “1” to “9”<br />

2D part <strong>of</strong> Composite: “01” to “09”<br />

20 one-byte characters within the<br />

range from (HEX) to 7E(HEX).<br />

(Functional characters should not be<br />

included.)<br />

FNC1 can be entered at 1D(HEX).<br />

121


� Human Readable Text Setting (Code: BRV)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> Human Readable Text<br />

Sets X position, Y position, character height, character width, ON/OFF <strong>of</strong> line feed, and line interval.<br />

122<br />

STX BRV S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> Human Readable Text<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Setting Section]<br />

[Human Readable Text Setting]<br />

Read out the X position, Y position, character height, character width, ON/OFF <strong>of</strong> line feed, and line interval.<br />

STX BRV R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX BRV A<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Setting Section]<br />

3-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Setting Section]<br />

[Human Readable Text Setting]<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

A one-byte character which can not be converted to one-byte, including Katakana, is read out using the<br />

corresponding double-byte character (shift JIS).<br />

1. In case <strong>of</strong> EAN/UPC and 1D side <strong>of</strong> Composite<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

Bar Code No. 2 Specifi es bar code No. “00” to “15”<br />

Setting Section 1<br />

X Position 8<br />

Y Position 8<br />

Character Height 7<br />

Character Width 7<br />

Character Interval 7<br />

Font 2<br />

Bold Line Width 5<br />

If the bar code is not Composite or if the<br />

setting section <strong>of</strong> the human readable text is<br />

for 1D side <strong>of</strong> Composite, “1” is specifi ed and<br />

if the setting section is 2D side <strong>of</strong> Composite,<br />

“2” is specifi ed.<br />

(1D should be specifi ed for GS1 data matrix.)<br />

“1”: 1D side<br />

“2”: 2D side<br />

Specifi es relative coordinate <strong>of</strong> X position<br />

<strong>of</strong> human readable text to the center <strong>of</strong> bar<br />

code. LP-S500*:<br />

Specifi es relative coordinate <strong>of</strong> Y position<br />

<strong>of</strong> human readable text to the center <strong>of</strong> bar<br />

code.<br />

Specifi es the character height <strong>of</strong> human<br />

readable text. LP-S500*:<br />

Specifi es the character width <strong>of</strong> human<br />

readable text.<br />

Specifi es the character interval <strong>of</strong> human<br />

readable text.<br />

Selects font type <strong>of</strong> human readable text from<br />

the registered font.<br />

Specifi es the Bold Line Width <strong>of</strong> human<br />

readable text.<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

“000.100” to “090.000” [mm]<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.000” to “090.000” [mm]<br />

“01” to “10”<br />

“0.000” to “2.000” [mm]


Laser Power<br />

Correction<br />

Scan Speed Correction 3<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)<br />

3<br />

(3)<br />

New Line (1)<br />

Line Interval (7)<br />

Corrects the laser power for human readable<br />

text marking.<br />

Corrects the scan speed for human readable<br />

text marking.<br />

The marking pulse cycle set is corrected by<br />

the specifi ed value here.<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the LP-S***W<br />

type.)<br />

Specifi es the linefeed at marking human<br />

readable text.<br />

Specifi es the line interval at marking human<br />

readable text on a new line (only for marking<br />

<strong>of</strong> Composite on 2D side).<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“0”: Same line<br />

“1”: New line (Only for 2D side)<br />

(Only for 2D side or GS1 data<br />

matrix)<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.000” to “090.000” [mm]<br />

(only for marking <strong>of</strong> Composite on<br />

a new line on 2D side).<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

2. In case <strong>of</strong> EAN/UPC and 1D side <strong>of</strong> Composite<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

Bar Code No. 2 Specifi es bar code No. “00” to “15”<br />

Setting Section 1<br />

Font 2<br />

Bold Line Width 5<br />

Laser Power<br />

Correction<br />

Scan Speed Correction 3<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)*<br />

3<br />

(3)<br />

If the bar code is not Composite or if the<br />

setting section <strong>of</strong> the human readable text is<br />

for 1D side <strong>of</strong> Composite, “1” is specifi ed and<br />

if the setting section is 2D side <strong>of</strong> Composite,<br />

“2” is specifi ed.<br />

Selects font type <strong>of</strong> human readable text from<br />

the registered font.<br />

Specifi es the Bold Line Width <strong>of</strong> human<br />

readable text.<br />

Corrects the laser power for human readable<br />

text marking.<br />

Corrects the scan speed for human readable<br />

text marking.<br />

The marking pulse cycle set is corrected by<br />

the specifi ed value here.<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the LP-S***W<br />

type.)<br />

“1”: 1D side<br />

“2”: 2D side<br />

“01” to “10”<br />

“0.000” to “2.000” [mm]<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

123


� Common Bar Code Condition (Code: BCC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> common bar code condition<br />

124<br />

STX BCC S<br />

• Readout data<br />

Data<br />

[Marking Pitch] [Direction] [Skip Marking]<br />

7-byte<br />

STX BCC R Data (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX BCC A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Marking Pitch 5<br />

Data<br />

[Marking Pitch] [Direction] [Skip Marking]<br />

7-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

The marking pitch for the bar code is<br />

indicated.<br />

Direction 1 The marking direction is indicated.<br />

Skip Marking 1 Sets valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> skip marking.<br />

“0.010” to “2.000”<br />

“0”: One direction<br />

“1”: Bidirection<br />

“0”: Invalid<br />

“1”: Valid


� Serial Data Input (Code: SIN)<br />

Function characters (serial data) are preset to the marking character string or bar code data. Marking <strong>of</strong> the transmitted<br />

character string corresponding with the serial data starts.<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> serial data input<br />

STX SIN S Serial Data No. Data (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

Serial Data No. 2 Sets the serial data No. “00” to “15”<br />

Data Max 510<br />

Be sure that total <strong>of</strong> the number <strong>of</strong><br />

characters in the specifi ed line must be<br />

less than 255.<br />

one-byte or double-byte (shift JIS<br />

code) characters less than 255<br />

(mixed not available)<br />

• Only when the internal shutter is opened during the remote control (excluding during marking interruption),<br />

the serial data can be transmitted to the laser marker.<br />

• For using this command, set “serial data” <strong>of</strong> function characters at setting screen beforehand.<br />

• When setting function characters (serial data), transmit this command by every marking. Otherwise it does<br />

not become marking ready condition, and marking is not available.<br />

• When transmit this command without any data, marking ready become ON, then nothing to be marked with<br />

serial data input.<br />

• For resetting the data, either close the shutter or transmit the marking mode command (marking interruption).<br />

• This input cannot be used with the external <strong>of</strong>fset and marking on moving object.<br />

• In case <strong>of</strong> transmitting character using the RS-232C which is differed to the specifi ed number <strong>of</strong> digit, the<br />

character is marked with the differed number <strong>of</strong> digit.<br />

• Refer to the timing chart for this command transmission. (P.34).<br />

• In case <strong>of</strong> CODE128, Data Matrix Code, and Composite (2D bar code), the control code can be specifi ed<br />

to the marking data, however, it cannot be transmitted/received by RS-232C. Therefore, use the following<br />

alternate codes.<br />

<strong>Control</strong> Code : 00 (HEX) to 1F (HEX), 7F (HEX), FNC1<br />

Alternate code : F050 (HEX) to F06F (HEX), F071 (HEX) F072(HEX)<br />

125


� Processing Condition Setting (Code: LAY)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> processing condition<br />

126<br />

STX LAY S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> processing condition<br />

STX LAY R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX LAY A<br />

Data<br />

[Processing Condition No.] [Layer No.] [X Offset]<br />

[Y Offset] [Rotation Angle] [Laser Power Correction]<br />

[Scan Speed Correction] [Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction]*<br />

(Data length …36-byte (LP-S*** type), 33-byte (LP-<br />

S***W type))<br />

Data<br />

[Processing Condition No.]<br />

2-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[Processing Condition No.] [Layer No.] [X Offset]<br />

[Y Offset] [Rotation Angle] [Laser Power Correction]<br />

[Scan Speed Correction] [Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction]*<br />

(Data length …36-byte (LP-S*** type), 33-byte (LP-<br />

S***W type))<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Processing<br />

Condition No.<br />

2 Specifi es the processing condition No. “00” to “15”<br />

Layer No. 2 Set the layer number. “00” to “15”<br />

X Offset 8 Specifi es X <strong>of</strong>fset. LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

Y Offset 8 Specifi es Y <strong>of</strong>fset.<br />

Rotation Angle 7 Specifi es the rotation angle. “-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]<br />

Laser Power<br />

Correction<br />

Scan Speed<br />

Correction<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)<br />

3<br />

3<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value<br />

corresponding with the marking pulse<br />

cycle specifi ed value here.<br />

Performs correction <strong>of</strong> the set scan<br />

speed at specifi ed value.<br />

The marking pulse cycle set is corrected<br />

by the specifi ed value here<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the LP-<br />

S***W type.)<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).


� Processing Element Setting (Code: FIG)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> processing element<br />

STX FIG S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> processing condition<br />

STX FIG R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX FIG A<br />

1. In case <strong>of</strong> straight line:<br />

Data<br />

[Processing Condition No.] [Processing Element No.]<br />

[Element type] [depending on the element type]<br />

Data<br />

[Processing Condition No.] [Processing Element No.]<br />

5-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Processing Condition No.] [Processing Element No.]<br />

[Element type] [depending on the element type]<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Processing<br />

Condition No.<br />

Processing<br />

Element No.<br />

Element type 1<br />

X Coordinate <strong>of</strong><br />

Start Point<br />

Y Coordinate <strong>of</strong><br />

Start Point<br />

X Coordinate <strong>of</strong><br />

End Point<br />

Y Coordinate <strong>of</strong><br />

End Point<br />

Dashed Line:<br />

Length <strong>of</strong> Solid<br />

Part<br />

Dashed Line:<br />

Length <strong>of</strong> Blank<br />

Part<br />

2 Specifi es the processing condition No. “00” to “15”<br />

3 Specifi es the processing element No. “000” to “031”<br />

Specifi es the type <strong>of</strong> the processing<br />

element.<br />

8 Specifi es the X coordinate <strong>of</strong> start point.<br />

8 Specifi es the Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> start point.<br />

8 Specifi es the X coordinate <strong>of</strong> end point.<br />

8 Specifi es the Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> end point.<br />

7<br />

7<br />

Specifi es the length <strong>of</strong> the solid part <strong>of</strong> the<br />

dashed line.<br />

This fi eld is not existed for solid line.<br />

Specifi es the length <strong>of</strong> the blank part <strong>of</strong> the<br />

dashed line.<br />

This fi eld is not existed for solid line.<br />

“0”: straight line<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.010” to “090.000” [mm]<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.000” to “090.000” [mm]<br />

For deletion <strong>of</strong> the processing element, set the element type to straight line, and set X and Y coordinates <strong>of</strong> both start and<br />

end points to “0”.<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

127


2. In case <strong>of</strong> circle<br />

128<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Processing<br />

Condition No.<br />

Processing<br />

Element No.<br />

Mode 1<br />

2 Specifi es the processing condition No. “00” to “15”<br />

3 Specifi es the processing element No. “000” to “031”<br />

Specifi es the type <strong>of</strong> the processing<br />

element.<br />

Center X 8 Specifi es X coordinate <strong>of</strong> the center.<br />

Y Coordinate <strong>of</strong><br />

Center<br />

8 Specifi es Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> the center.<br />

Radius 7 Specifi es the radius <strong>of</strong> the circle.<br />

Dashed Line:<br />

Length <strong>of</strong> Solid<br />

Part<br />

Dashed Line:<br />

Length <strong>of</strong> Blank<br />

Part<br />

7<br />

7<br />

Specifi es the length <strong>of</strong> the solid part <strong>of</strong> the<br />

dashed line.<br />

This fi eld is not existed for solid line.<br />

Specifi es the length <strong>of</strong> the blank part <strong>of</strong> the<br />

dashed line.<br />

This fi eld is not existed for solid line.<br />

“1”: circle<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“045.000” to “090.000” [mm]<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.010” to “090.000” [mm]<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.000” to “090.000” [mm]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

3. In case <strong>of</strong> arc<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Processing<br />

Condition No.<br />

Processing<br />

Element No.<br />

Mode 1<br />

X Coordinate <strong>of</strong><br />

Start Point<br />

Y Coordinate <strong>of</strong><br />

Start Point<br />

X Coordinate <strong>of</strong><br />

End Point<br />

Y Coordinate <strong>of</strong><br />

End Point<br />

2 Specifi es the processing condition No. “00” to “15”<br />

3 Specifi es the processing element No. “000” to “031”<br />

Specifi es the type <strong>of</strong> the processing<br />

element.<br />

8 Specifi es the X coordinate <strong>of</strong> start point.<br />

8 Specifi es the Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> start point.<br />

8 Specifi es the X coordinate <strong>of</strong> end point.<br />

8 Specifi es the Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> end point.<br />

“2”: arc<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.00” to “+045.00” [mm]<br />

Radius 7 Specifi es the radius <strong>of</strong> the arc. “000.010” to “330.000” [mm]<br />

Direction 1 Specifi es the writing order <strong>of</strong> the arc. “0”: CCW, “1”: CW<br />

Open Angle 1 Specifi es the center angle <strong>of</strong> arc. “0”:180° under. “1”: 180° more<br />

Dashed Line:<br />

Length <strong>of</strong> Solid<br />

Part<br />

Dashed Line:<br />

Length <strong>of</strong> Blank<br />

Part<br />

7<br />

7<br />

Specifi es the length <strong>of</strong> the solid part <strong>of</strong> the<br />

dashed line.<br />

This fi eld is not existed for solid line.<br />

Specifi es the length <strong>of</strong> the blank part <strong>of</strong> the<br />

dashed line.<br />

This fi eld is not existed for solid line.<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.010” to “090.000” [mm]<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.000” to “090.000” [mm]<br />

For deletion <strong>of</strong> the processing element, set the element type to straight line, and set X and Y coordinates <strong>of</strong> both start and<br />

end points to “0”.<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).


� Week Setting (Code: WKM)<br />

• Week Setting<br />

Sets week renewal timing (the-fi rst-<strong>of</strong>-the-week) & the-fi rst-week-<strong>of</strong>-the-year<br />

STX WKM S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> week setting<br />

Data<br />

[Week update day] [First-Week-<strong>of</strong>- the-year]<br />

2-byte<br />

Readout the data <strong>of</strong> week renewal timing & fi rst-week-<strong>of</strong>-the-year.<br />

STX WKM R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX WKM A<br />

Data<br />

[Week update day] [First-Week-<strong>of</strong>- the-year]<br />

2-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Week update<br />

day<br />

First-Week-<strong>of</strong>the-year<br />

1 Sets the-fi rst-day-<strong>of</strong>-the-week.<br />

1 Sets the-fi rst-week-<strong>of</strong>-the-year.<br />

The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.<br />

“0”…Sunday (Renews at 0:00)<br />

“1”…Monday (Renews at 0:00)<br />

“0”…after JAN.1, week which<br />

contains JAN.<br />

“1”…Week which contains the fi rst<br />

Thursday<br />

129


� Arbitrary Point Radiation Condition Setting (Code: PRF)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> general condition<br />

130<br />

STX PRF S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> processing condition<br />

STX PRF R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX PRF A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Condition No. 2<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.] [Layer No.] [X Offset]<br />

[Y Offset] [Laser Power Correction]<br />

[Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]*<br />

(Data length …26-byte (LP-S*** type), 23byte<br />

(LP-S***W type))<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.]<br />

2-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.] [Layer No.] [X Offset]<br />

[Y Offset] [Laser Power Correction]<br />

[Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]*<br />

(Data length …26-byte (LP-S*** type), 23byte<br />

(LP-S***W type))<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

The condition No. to be set or to be read<br />

out is indicated.<br />

“00” to “15”<br />

Layer No. 2 Set the layer number. “00” fi xed<br />

X Offset 8 Specifi es X <strong>of</strong>fset. LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.000” to “+045.000” [mm]<br />

Y Offset 8 Specifi es Y <strong>of</strong>fset.<br />

Laser Power<br />

Correction<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)*<br />

3<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser<br />

power specifi ed at the laser setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value<br />

corresponding with the marking pulse cycle<br />

specifi ed value here.<br />

*(Nothing should be input with the LP-<br />

S***W type.)<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

“001” to “999” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).


� Arbitrary Point Radiation Coordinate Setting (Code: PRD)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> fi xed point radiation condition<br />

STX PRD S<br />

Data<br />

Condition No.] [Start Line] [Radiation Time][Laser<br />

Power Correction] [X coordinate] [Y Coordinate] [• • •] [X<br />

coordinate] [Y Coordinate]<br />

15+16n-byte<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> radiation time, and laser power correction only<br />

STX PRD S<br />

• Delete <strong>of</strong> fi xed point radiation condition<br />

STX PRD S<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.] [Line No.] [Radiation Time] [Laser Power Correction]<br />

15-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.] [Start Line] [End Line]<br />

8-byte<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> fi xed point radiation condition<br />

STX PRD R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX PRD A<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.] [Line No.]<br />

5-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.] [Line No.] [Radiation Time] [Laser Power<br />

Correction] [X Coordinate] [Y Coordinate]<br />

Max. 31-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

When the setting line is cancelled, [Radiation Time], [Laser Power Correction], [X Coordinate] and [Y Coordinate] fi elds are<br />

not existed.<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Condition No. 2<br />

Outline Description<br />

The condition No. to be set or to be read<br />

out is indicated.<br />

“00” to “15”<br />

Line No. 3 Specifi es Line No. “000” to “049”<br />

Start Line 3 Specifi es Start Line No.<br />

End Line 3 Specifi es End Line No.<br />

“000” to “049”<br />

Radiation Time 7 Specifi es the radiation time. “00000.1” to “99999.9” [ms]<br />

Laser Power<br />

Correction<br />

3<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser<br />

power specifi ed at the laser setting.<br />

“000” to “999” [%]<br />

X Position 8 Specifi es X coordinate for radiation. LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.00” to “+045.00” [mm]<br />

Y Position 8 Specifi es Y coordinate for radiation<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

131


� Marking Energy Range Setting (Code: MEN)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Setting marking energy upper/lower limits<br />

Sets the lower/upper limit <strong>of</strong> the marking energy.<br />

132<br />

STX MEN S<br />

Data<br />

[Upper limit] [lower limit]<br />

18-byte<br />

• Reading out marking energy upper/lower limits<br />

STX MEN R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX MEN A<br />

Data<br />

[Upper limit] [lower limit]<br />

18-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Upper limit 9<br />

Lower limit 9<br />

Sets the threshold <strong>of</strong> the marking energy.<br />

“000000000”: OFF<br />

“000000100” to “999999999” [mJ]<br />

However, if the upper limit is not<br />

“000000000”, the value should be<br />

less than the upper limit.


� Marking Energy Measurement (Code: MEM)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Setting the marking energy measurement<br />

Specifi es whether the Marking Energy Measurement is enabled.<br />

STX MEM S<br />

• Reading out marking energy measurement<br />

Data<br />

[Marking Energy Measurement]<br />

1-byte<br />

STX MEM R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX MEM A<br />

Name Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Marking Energy Measurement 1<br />

� Low alarm limit (Code: PWL)<br />

• Setting the low alarm limit<br />

Sets the low alarm limit.<br />

STX PWL S<br />

Data<br />

[Marking Energy Measurement]<br />

1-byte<br />

Specifi es whether the marking energy<br />

measurement is enabled.<br />

Data<br />

[Low alarm limit]<br />

2-byte<br />

• Reading out marking energy upper/lower limits<br />

STX PWL R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX PWL A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Low alarm limit]<br />

2-byte<br />

Low alarm limit 2 Sets the threshold <strong>of</strong> the marking energy.<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

“0”: OFF<br />

“1”: ON<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

“00” to “99” [%]<br />

When “00” is set, the<br />

detection is disabled.<br />

133


� Power Check (Code: PWR)<br />

[LP-S***W type only]<br />

Power check designation<br />

Designates the power check operation.<br />

134<br />

STX PWR S<br />

Name<br />

Designation<br />

Mode<br />

Power Correction<br />

Ratio<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

1<br />

(3)<br />

Data<br />

[Designation Mode] [Power Correction Ratio]<br />

Variable length<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Content<br />

The mode <strong>of</strong> power check is indicated.<br />

It is necessary to conduct a power check<br />

immediately before starting the automatic/<br />

manual power correction.<br />

Indicates the power correction ration in the<br />

manual power correction mode.Adds this<br />

data only when the destination mode is set<br />

to the manual power correction.<br />

"0"…Starts the power check<br />

(Start <strong>of</strong> current power measurement)<br />

“1” … Start <strong>of</strong> automatic power correction<br />

“2” … Start <strong>of</strong> manual power correction<br />

“050” to “200”[%]<br />

*For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212)<br />

• The power check command is rejected when the DIP switch (No. 2) in the rear side <strong>of</strong> the laser marker is set<br />

to OFF (when externally controlled).<br />

• If a command is sent when laser pumping is OFF and the shutter is open (when marking is being<br />

interrupted), response data for abnormal receiving (NAK03) is returned.<br />

• When the Marking Status Sending Enable is set to on, marking status is returned after the power check and<br />

power correction are performed.<br />

Power check readout designation<br />

STX PWR R<br />

Data<br />

[Readout Data Format]<br />

1-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter


Response to readout designation <strong>of</strong> power check result<br />

STX PWR A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Current Power 3<br />

Power after<br />

Correction<br />

Power Correction<br />

Ratio<br />

Correction<br />

Date<br />

Total Laser<br />

Radiation Time<br />

3<br />

5<br />

14<br />

Determination 1<br />

Data<br />

[Current Power] [Power after Correction]<br />

[Power Correction Ratio] [Correction Date] [Total Laser<br />

Radiation time]<br />

33-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Content<br />

Indicates the current power output.<br />

Indicates the power output at the time <strong>of</strong> the power<br />

check conducted immediately before automatic or<br />

manual power correction.<br />

Indicates the power output after power correction.Indicates<br />

the output calculated in the power check and the<br />

output measured in automatic or manual power correction.<br />

Indicates the time and date when power correction was<br />

conducted.<br />

This result is valid only in the measurement result<br />

readout just after the measurement power is 100.0 at<br />

the start point <strong>of</strong> the power check.<br />

“000” to “xxx”<br />

“000” to “xxx”<br />

(When the power correction has<br />

not been performed, it is considered<br />

as "000".)<br />

"050.0" to "200.0" [%]<br />

(When the power correction has<br />

not been performed, it is considered<br />

as "000".)<br />

For 15:00:00 on April 1, 2012<br />

"20120401150000"<br />

(When the power correction has<br />

not been performed, it is considered<br />

as "00000000000000".)<br />

9 Displays the accumulated laser radiation time. "0000000.0" to "1000000.0"[h]<br />

This result is valid only in the measurement result<br />

readout just after the start point <strong>of</strong> the power check.<br />

"0": Correct<br />

"1": Lower than the low alarm<br />

limit.<br />

135


� Laser Pumping Measurement (Code: PWM)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Laser pumping measurement designation<br />

Designates the laser pumping measurement operation.<br />

136<br />

STX PWM S<br />

Name<br />

Designation<br />

Mode<br />

Measurement<br />

Value <strong>of</strong> Laser<br />

Power<br />

Power<br />

Correction Ratio<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

1<br />

5<br />

3<br />

Data<br />

[Designation Mode] [Measurement Value <strong>of</strong><br />

Laser Power/Power Correction Ratio]<br />

Variable length<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

The mode <strong>of</strong> laser pumping measurement<br />

is indicated.<br />

Before starting the automatic/manual<br />

power correction or power measurement,<br />

conduct the laser pumping measurement<br />

at the measurement power <strong>of</strong> 100%.<br />

Specifi es measurement power in the<br />

laser pumping measurement mode.<br />

Adds this data only in the laser pumping<br />

measurement mode.<br />

Indicates the power correction ration in the<br />

manual power correction mode. Adds this<br />

data only when the destination mode is set<br />

to the manual power correction.<br />

“0”…Starts the laser pumping measurement<br />

(Start <strong>of</strong> current power measurement)<br />

“1”…Automatic power correction/Start <strong>of</strong><br />

power measurement<br />

“2”…<strong>Manual</strong> power correction/Start <strong>of</strong> power<br />

measurement<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“012.0” to “100.0” by increment <strong>of</strong> 0.5<br />

“050” to “200” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)” (P.212).<br />

• The laser pumping measurement command is rejected when the DIP switch (No. 2) in the rear side <strong>of</strong> the<br />

laser marker is set to OFF (when externally controlled).<br />

• When the laser pumping is set to OFF <strong>of</strong> shutter is opened (during marking interruption), NAK is returned.<br />

• When the Marking Status Sending Enable is set to on, marking status is returned after the laser pumping<br />

measurement and power correction are performed.<br />

• When the measurement results are read out<br />

STX PWM A<br />

Data<br />

[Readout Data Format]<br />

1-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter


• Readout <strong>of</strong> the measurement result <strong>of</strong> laser pumping<br />

STX PWM A<br />

Name<br />

Readout Data<br />

Format<br />

Measurement<br />

Value <strong>of</strong> Laser<br />

Power<br />

Initial Ratio <strong>of</strong><br />

Laser Power<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

1<br />

5<br />

3<br />

Determination 1<br />

• Readout the correction data<br />

STX PWM A<br />

Name<br />

Readout Data<br />

Format<br />

Power<br />

Correction Ratio<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

1<br />

Data<br />

[Readout Data Format] [Measurement Value<br />

<strong>of</strong> Laser Power] [Initial Ratio <strong>of</strong> Laser Power]<br />

[Determination]<br />

10-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Specifi es the readout data format.<br />

For the measurement value <strong>of</strong> laser power, the initial<br />

ratio <strong>of</strong> laser power [%] fi led is valid only when the<br />

measurement power is 100.0 at the start point <strong>of</strong> the<br />

laser pumping measurement.<br />

For the correction data, power correction ratio, correction<br />

date and total laser radiation time are read out.<br />

Specifi es measurement power in the laser pumping<br />

measurement.Adds this data only in the laser<br />

pumping measurement.<br />

This result is valid only in the measurement result<br />

readout just after the start point <strong>of</strong> the laser pumping<br />

measurement and the measurement power is 100.0.<br />

Indicates initial ratio.<br />

This result is valid only in the measurement result<br />

readout just after the start point <strong>of</strong> the laser pumping<br />

measurement and the measurement power is 100.0.<br />

Data<br />

[Readout Data Format] [Power Correction<br />

Ratio] [Correction Date] [Total Laser<br />

Radiation Time]<br />

27-byte<br />

“0”… Measurement value <strong>of</strong> laser<br />

power<br />

“1”…Correction data<br />

“000.0” to “xxx.x” [W]<br />

“000” to “xxx” [%]<br />

(When the measurement power<br />

is not 100.0, it is considered as<br />

“100”.)<br />

“0”: Correct or the measurement<br />

power is not 100<br />

“1”: Lower than the low power<br />

detect.<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Specifi es the readout data format.<br />

For the measurement result, the measurement result [%]<br />

fi led is valid only when the measurement power is 100.0<br />

at the start point <strong>of</strong> the laser pumping measurement.<br />

For the correction data, power correction ratio, correction<br />

date and total laser radiation time are read out.<br />

3 The power correction ratio is indicated.<br />

Correction Date 14 The power correction date is indicated.<br />

Total Laser<br />

Radiation Time<br />

“0”… Measurement result<br />

“1”…Correction data<br />

“050” to “200” [%]<br />

When the power correction has<br />

not been performed, it becomes<br />

“000”.<br />

When the time is 15:00:00<br />

<strong>of</strong> January 15, 2011,<br />

“20110115150000” appears.<br />

When the power correction<br />

has not been performed,<br />

“00000000000000”<br />

9 Indicates total laser radiation time. “0000000.0” to “1000000.0” [h]<br />

137


� Test Marking (Code: TST)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Execute Test Marking<br />

Designates the start <strong>of</strong> the test marking<br />

138<br />

STX TST S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> test marking result<br />

Data<br />

[Test Marking Mode]<br />

0/1-byte<br />

Readout the data <strong>of</strong> week renewal timing & fi rst-week-<strong>of</strong>-the-year.<br />

STX TST R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX TST A<br />

Data<br />

[Marking Energy] [Marking Time]<br />

15-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Test Marking<br />

Mode<br />

(1)<br />

The test marking mode is indicated.<br />

Detects the marking energy error when<br />

omitted.<br />

“0”: Marking energy error detection<br />

“1”: Marking energy error mask<br />

Marking Energy 9 Indicates the marking energy. “000000000” to “999999999” [mJ]<br />

Marking Time 6<br />

Indicates the period <strong>of</strong> marking.<br />

When the marking time is 100 seconds or<br />

more, the number <strong>of</strong> decimal places should<br />

be 1 and when it is less than 100, it should<br />

be 2.<br />

“000.01” to “9999.9” [s]<br />

• The “shutter control” command is not acceptable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface <strong>of</strong> controller<br />

is turned to OFF.<br />

• When the Marking Status Sending Enable (MST/MKR) is set to on, the marking status is transmitted after the<br />

marking is completed.


3-4 LP-F10/F10W Mode<br />

For the users <strong>of</strong> the LP-F10/F10W, this function gives LP-F10/F10W compatibility to the RS-232C commands which can be<br />

used as in the past.<br />

3-4-1 Selecting DIP Switch<br />

The DIP switch is located in rear <strong>of</strong> the controller.<br />

The DIP switch is already set to OFF side at factory shipment.<br />

1. LP-S Standard Mode<br />

DIP Switch No.7-OFF<br />

DIP Switch No.8-OFF<br />

2. LP-F10 Mode<br />

DIP Switch No.7-ON<br />

DIP Switch No.8-OFF<br />

3. LP-F10W Mode<br />

DIP Switch No.7-OFF<br />

DIP Switch No.8-ON<br />

139


3-4-2 LP-F10/F10W Mode Command List<br />

Command for switching between LP-S and LP-F10/F10W<br />

140<br />

Name Code Function Description<br />

Command Mode Setting RSM Switches between LP-S Standard mode and LP-F10/F10W. P.142<br />

LP-F10/F10W Mode Command<br />

Name Code Function Description<br />

File Name FNM Sets registration name <strong>of</strong> fi le under editing. P.143<br />

File Overwriting Registration FOR Overwrite and register the fi le under editing. P.143<br />

File Registration FRG Register the fi le under editing to the specifi ed No. P.144<br />

File No. Change FNO Change the fi le No. into the specifi ed fi le one. P.144<br />

Marking Character String STR Sets the marking character string. P.145<br />

Marking Character String (onebyte<br />

character)<br />

MCS Sets the marking character string by one-byte character. P.147<br />

Expiry Date/Time LMT Sets the function <strong>of</strong> expiry date. P.148<br />

Counter CNT Sets the counter function. P.149<br />

Lot Condition LTC Sets the lot marking condition. P.150<br />

Lot Character String LTS Sets the character string to be applied to lot marking. P.151<br />

CAD File CDF Sets the logo fi le. P.153<br />

General Condition ALC Sets the conditions related to whole fi le. P.154<br />

Step & Repeat Setting SRA Sets the fi ne adjustment <strong>of</strong> Step & Repeat. P.155<br />

Character Condition STC<br />

Sets the condition for marking character string (shorted<br />

form) per line.<br />

CAD Condition CDC Sets the marking condition for logo fi le. P.160<br />

Laser Power LPW Sets the laser power. P.161<br />

Scan Speed SSP Sets the scan speed <strong>of</strong> the laser. P.161<br />

Laser Pulse Cycle MPL Sets the marking pulse cycle <strong>of</strong> laser. P.162<br />

CW Pulse Cycle/Duty CWL<br />

Line Width Correction WDC<br />

Marking Quality Adjustment WTC<br />

Adjust the laser pulse cycle and duty.<br />

(LP-F10W mode only)<br />

Sets the width necessary to avoid crossing at marking<br />

intersection.<br />

Sets the adjustment <strong>of</strong> starting point,ending point, edge,<br />

curve, etc.<br />

Trigger Condition* TRG Sets the condition applied for fl ying object. P.165<br />

Delay* DLY Sets the delay time or distance after inputting sensor. P.166<br />

Marking Interval* INT Sets the distance between equidistant marking. P.166<br />

Line Speed* LSP Sets the moving speed. P.167<br />

Encoder Signal* ENC Sets the encoder pulse number. P.168<br />

Year/Month/Date/Time YMD Sets year, month, date, hour for system. P.169<br />

Era Year ERA Sets era year. P.170<br />

Shutter SHT <strong>Control</strong>s the internal shutter. P.170<br />

P.157<br />

P.162<br />

P.163<br />

P.164


Name Code Function Description<br />

Marking Mode MKM Sets the marking status. P.171<br />

Counter Reset CTR Resets the counter. P.171<br />

Status Request STS Requires the operation status <strong>of</strong> laser marker. P.172<br />

Laser <strong>Control</strong> LSR <strong>Control</strong>s the laser pumping. P.173<br />

Marking Trigger* MRK <strong>Control</strong>s the marking. P.173<br />

Marking Status Transmission<br />

Permission<br />

MST<br />

Sets the enable/disable <strong>of</strong> response sending at the end <strong>of</strong><br />

marking.<br />

I/O Environment ENV Sets the operation environment <strong>of</strong> I/O terminal. P.175<br />

Laser Check Radiation SPT Executes the laser check radiation. P.176<br />

Option S<strong>of</strong>tware Command<br />

Name Code Function Description<br />

Rank Condition RKC Sets the input condition <strong>of</strong> the rank marking. P.177<br />

Rank Character String RKS Sets the character string to be applied for rank marking. P.178<br />

Offset Condition OFC Sets the <strong>of</strong>fset input condition. P.179<br />

Offset OFS Sets the <strong>of</strong>fset to be applied for parallel input. P.180<br />

Bar Code Marking Condition BCF Sets the marking condition for bar code. P.181<br />

Bar Code Data Setting BCS Sets the marking data for bar code. P.183<br />

Serial Data Input SIN Inputs marking data <strong>of</strong> the serial data function. P.184<br />

QR Code Marking Condition QRF Sets the marking condition for QR code. P.185<br />

QR Code Pattern QRP Sets the marking condition for QR code pattern. P.186<br />

QR Code Data QRS Sets the data <strong>of</strong> QR code. P.187<br />

Data Matrix Code Marking<br />

Condition<br />

P.174<br />

DMF Sets the marking condition for data matrix code. P.188<br />

Data Matrix Code Pattern DMP Sets the data matrix code pattern. P.189<br />

Data Matrix Code Data DMS Sets the data <strong>of</strong> data matrix code. P.190<br />

*: LP-S*** type W only<br />

141


3-5 Each Command Description in LP-F10/F10W Mode<br />

142<br />

The laser marker sends a response data after setting/readout command is transmitted.<br />

“3-1-8 Communication Data Format” (P.58)<br />

■ Command Mode Setting (Code: RSM)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking mode<br />

Set the command mode for the serial communication.<br />

STX RSM S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> fi le name<br />

Data<br />

[Command Mode]<br />

1-byte<br />

Read out the command mode for the serial communication.<br />

STX RSM R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

Set the fi le name currently being edited with the following format:<br />

STX RSM A<br />

Data<br />

[Command Mode]<br />

1-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Command<br />

Mode<br />

1<br />

Indicates the command mode for the serial<br />

communication.<br />

“0”: LP-F10/LP-F10W Mode<br />

“1”: LP-S Standard Mode<br />

This command is valid only when the DIP switches are set to LP-F10 mode or LP-F10W mode.<br />

When the Remote mode is set to OFF or power is OFF, the mode returns to the initial value (LP-F10/LP-F10W<br />

mode).


■ File Registration (Code: FRG)<br />

• Registration <strong>of</strong> fi le<br />

144<br />

Register the fi le <strong>of</strong> specifi ed number.<br />

STX FRG S<br />

Data<br />

[File No.]<br />

3-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

File No. 3<br />

� File No. Change (Code: FNO)<br />

• Change File No.<br />

Read out the fi le <strong>of</strong> specifi ed number.<br />

STX FNO S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> fi le No.<br />

Register the fi le currently used to the<br />

fi le <strong>of</strong> specifi ed number and change the<br />

fi le number currently being edited to the<br />

specifi ed number.<br />

Data<br />

[File No.]<br />

3-byte<br />

Read out the fi le number currently being edited with the following format:<br />

STX FNO R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX FNO A<br />

Data<br />

[File No.]<br />

3-byte<br />

“000” to “255”<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

File No. 3<br />

The fi le number to be used and the fi le<br />

number currently being used is indicated<br />

at fi le No. change and readout <strong>of</strong> fi le No.<br />

respectively.<br />

“000” to “255”<br />

“999”…new fi le<br />

• The fi le Nos. 256 and after cannot be specifi ed.(NAK09 is returned.)<br />

NAK15 is returned when the readout was performed with the fi le No. 256 to 2047.<br />

• When new fi le is created using the communication command, initialize the kerning level to Level 2.<br />

Furthermore, if the mode is set to LP-F10W mode, additionally initialize the laser pulse cycle to 2.0μs.<br />

(If the fi le is newly created using the console, initialize the kerning level to Level 3.)


� Marking Character String (Code: STR)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking character string<br />

Set the marking character string in the specifi ed line number with the following format:<br />

STX STR S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> marking character string<br />

Data<br />

[Line No.] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 62-byte<br />

Read out the marking character string in the specifi ed line number with the following format:<br />

STX STR R<br />

• Readout data<br />

Data<br />

[Line No.]<br />

2-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Character string for marking in the specifi ed line number is read out with the following format:<br />

STX STR A<br />

Data<br />

[Line No.] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 62-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Line No. 2<br />

Marking<br />

Character<br />

String<br />

Max 60<br />

The line number to be set in the fi le is<br />

specifi ed.<br />

The character string to be set in the<br />

specifi ed line is specifi ed with shift JIS code.<br />

(However, the function character should be<br />

specifi ed by ASCII code.) Specify 0 byte to<br />

the character string to be deleted.<br />

The line 31 and after cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

“01” to “30” [row]<br />

See below.<br />

145


Setting method <strong>of</strong> character string for marking (specifi ed with shift JIS code)<br />

Use shift JIS code “Character Code Table” (P.220) to set standard characters and registered characters. In case <strong>of</strong> setting with<br />

ASCII code, perform the next procedure.<br />

Functional character (specifi ed with ASCII code)<br />

Use shift JIS code “Character Code Table” (P.220) to set standard characters and registered characters. In case <strong>of</strong> setting with<br />

ASCII code, perform the next procedure.<br />

Set the functional characters (counter, current date/time, expiry date/time, and lot) by 6 to 8 letters <strong>of</strong> one-byte (ASCII Code),<br />

starting with “%”.<br />

When %BAR: n is shown, counter numbering system is specifi ed, function type is set to s (sec) and function character<br />

number is out <strong>of</strong> range for the LP-F10/LP-F10W mode, NAK09 is returned. But at read-out time, NAK15 is returned.<br />

The %MM: Sn in the serial data (MM: fi gure, n: function No.) is set and read out in the LP-F10/LP-F10W mode.<br />

N : digit number (1 to 6)<br />

MM : number <strong>of</strong> digits (00 to 30)<br />

X :<br />

n :<br />

146<br />

Type (Y: dominical year, y: era year, M: month, D: date, H: 24-hour time, h: 12-hour time, m: minute, w: week,<br />

J: 365 days, C: counter)<br />

Counter number, lot function number (0 to 7), date/time number (0: current date/time, 1 to 8: expiry date/time<br />

1 to 8),<br />

rank function number (0 to 3), serial data function number (0 to 9, A to F), bar code number (0 to 9, A to F)<br />

Y : counter <strong>of</strong>fset (+1 to +9) This letter is not used in case <strong>of</strong> no <strong>of</strong>fset.<br />

%0N:XnY = with zero %N-:XnY = without zero stop %INP:n = Rank<br />

%N :XnY = without zero right %APM:n =<br />

“AM” (before noon),<br />

“PM” (afternoon)<br />

%N :XnY = without zero left %SFT:n = Lot character<br />

[Examples]<br />

Marking <strong>of</strong> “ABCD” (with hexadecimal number)<br />

82,62,82,63,82,64,82,65,8A,94,8E,AE,89,EF,8E,D0<br />

Marking <strong>of</strong> “counter 0” by 6 digits, right aligned without zero<br />

25,20,36,3A,43,30…“% 6:C0”<br />

%SIN:n = Serial Data<br />

Marking <strong>of</strong> current year/month/date with four digits for dominical year, two digits for month<br />

and date respectively, right aligned with zero, and <strong>of</strong> the unit by Kanji.<br />

25,30,34,3A,59,30,94,4E,25,30,32,3A,4D,30,8C,8E,25,30,32,3A,44,30,93,FA…“%04:Y0 Year %02:M0 Month %02:D0 Day”


� Marking Character String (one-byte Character) (Code: MCS)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking character string<br />

Set the marking character string in the specifi ed line number with the following format:<br />

STX MCS S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> marking character string<br />

Data<br />

[Line No.] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 32-byte<br />

Read out the marking character string in the specifi ed line number with the following format:<br />

STX MCS R<br />

• Readout data<br />

Data<br />

[Line No.]<br />

2-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Character string for marking in the specifi ed line number is read out with the following format:<br />

STX MCS A<br />

Data<br />

[Line No.] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 32-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Line No. 2<br />

Marking<br />

Character<br />

String<br />

Max 30<br />

The line number to be set in the fi le is<br />

specifi ed.<br />

Specifi es the character setting in the<br />

specifi ed line. Specify 0 byte to the<br />

character string to be deleted.<br />

“01” to “30” [row]<br />

20 one-byte characters within the<br />

range from (HEX) to 7E(HEX).<br />

(functional characters should not<br />

be included)<br />

• If there is any unwritable characters in ASCII code within the marking character string when performing<br />

reading out, these characters are converted into shift JIS code automatically.<br />

• The line 31 and after cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

147


� Expiry Date/Time (Code: LMT)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> Expiry Date/Time<br />

Set the condition <strong>of</strong> expiry date/time for the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

Expiry date/time can be set within the range from EANuary 1, 1980 to December 31, 2099.<br />

148<br />

STX LMT S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> expiry date/time<br />

Data<br />

[Expiry No.] [Expiry] [Reference Unit] [Start Date]<br />

6-byte<br />

Read out the expiry date/time in the specifi ed line number with the following format:<br />

STX LMT R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX LMT A<br />

Data<br />

(Expiry No.)<br />

1-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[Expiry No.] [Expiry] [Reference Unit] [Start Date]<br />

6-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Expiry No. 1<br />

The expiry No. to be set or to be read out is<br />

indicated.<br />

“1” to “4”<br />

Expiry 3 The expiry is indicated. “001” to “999”<br />

Reference Unit 1 The reference unit is indicated.<br />

Start Date 1<br />

Possible to be set only when the reference<br />

unit is set to “year” or “month”. Indicating if<br />

the date <strong>of</strong> “today” is included or not.<br />

Expiry<br />

“0”…year<br />

“1”…month<br />

“2”…day<br />

“3”…hour<br />

“4”…minute<br />

Past<br />

“5”…year<br />

“6”…month<br />

“7”…day<br />

“8”…hour<br />

“9”…minute<br />

“0”…Today not included<br />

“1”…Today included<br />

The common expiry (expiry Nos. 5 to 8) cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)


� Counter (Code: CNT)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> counter condition<br />

Set the counter condition for the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX CNT S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> counter condition<br />

Data<br />

[Counter number] [Current Value] [Initial value]<br />

[End Value] [Step] [Count Source]<br />

26-byte<br />

Read out the counter condition for the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX CNT R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX CNT A<br />

Data<br />

[Counter number]<br />

1-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[Counter number] [Current Value] [Initial value]<br />

[End Value] [Step] [Count Source]<br />

26-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Counter No. 1<br />

The counter No. to be set or to be read out<br />

is indicated.<br />

“0” to “3”<br />

Current Value 6 Current value <strong>of</strong> counter.No minus number. “000000” to “999999”<br />

Initial Value 6 Initial value <strong>of</strong> counter.No minus number. “000000” to “999999”<br />

End Value 6 End value <strong>of</strong> counter.No minus number. “000000” to “999999”<br />

Step 6<br />

Step value <strong>of</strong> counter.<br />

No minus number.<br />

Count Source 1 Trigger source to be counted.<br />

“000000” to “999999”<br />

“0”…Counter 0<br />

“1”…Counter 1<br />

“2”…Counter 2<br />

“3”…Counter 3<br />

“4”…Trigger<br />

• The common counter (counter Nos. 4 to 7) cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

When the trigger source is common counter, it cannot be read out. (NAK15 is returned.)<br />

• When the setting is performed using this command, “Reset at Date Update” is cancelled.<br />

149


� Lot Condition (Code: LTC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> lot condition<br />

Set the lot condition for the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

150<br />

STX LTC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> lot condition<br />

Data<br />

[Lot No.] [Period] [Unit]<br />

3-byte<br />

Read out the lot condition for the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX LTC R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX LTC A<br />

Data<br />

(Lot Function Number)<br />

1-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Lot No.] [Period] [Unit]<br />

3-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Lot No. 1<br />

Lot Condition 1<br />

Period<br />

Condition<br />

1<br />

The lot No. to be set or to be read out is<br />

indicated.<br />

The time <strong>of</strong> period for lot marking is<br />

indicated.<br />

The unit <strong>of</strong> period to switch the character<br />

string for marking is indicated.<br />

“0” to “3”<br />

“0”…current<br />

“1”…Expiry 1<br />

“2”…Expiry 2<br />

“3”…Expiry 3<br />

“4”…Expiry 4<br />

“0”…year or counter<br />

“1”…month<br />

“2”…day<br />

“3”…Y/M<br />

“4”…M/D<br />

“5”…day <strong>of</strong> week<br />

“6”…hour<br />

“7”…Week<br />

• The common lot (Lot function Nos. 4 to 7) cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

When the lot condition is counter common expiry and the unit <strong>of</strong> the expiry period is “Min” or “Hour/Min” at<br />

read-out time, NAK15 is returned.<br />

• The settings for all period number <strong>of</strong> the lot functional number are cleared if the period condition is changed.


� Lot Character String (Code: LTS)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> lot character string<br />

Set the lot character string for the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX LTS S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> lot character string<br />

Data<br />

[Lot No.] [Unit] [Start Period]<br />

[End Period] [ Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 33-byte<br />

Read out the lot character string for the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX LTS R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX LTS A<br />

Data<br />

(Lot No., Period Unit No.)<br />

3-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Lot No.] [Unit] [Start Period]<br />

[End Period] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 33-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Lot No. 1<br />

Period Unit No. 2<br />

The lot No. to be set or to be read out is<br />

indicated.<br />

The unit to be set or to be read out is<br />

indicated.<br />

The expiry is indicated.<br />

The setting range varies depending on the<br />

condition <strong>of</strong> period unit.<br />

“0” to “3”<br />

Period Condition Setting range<br />

Year “01” to “54”<br />

Month “01” to “12”<br />

Day “01” to “31”<br />

Y/M “01” to “54”<br />

M/D “01” to “54”<br />

Day <strong>of</strong> Week “01” to “07”<br />

Hour “01” to “24”<br />

Week “01” to “54”<br />

151


152<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Period Condition Setting range<br />

Start Period 6<br />

End Period 6<br />

Marking<br />

Character<br />

String<br />

Max 18<br />

The start period <strong>of</strong> marking the character<br />

string for setting is set.<br />

The setting range varies depending on the<br />

condition <strong>of</strong> period unit.<br />

Set “999999” with the end period to delete it.<br />

“999999” is indicated if the period which has<br />

not been set is read out.<br />

The end period <strong>of</strong> marking the character<br />

string for setting is set.<br />

The setting range varies depending on the<br />

condition <strong>of</strong> period unit.<br />

Set “999999” with the start period to delete it.<br />

“999999” is indicated if the period which has<br />

not been set is read out.<br />

The character string to be marked with the<br />

specifi ed period is set. Specify 0-byte <strong>of</strong><br />

data length to delete the character string <strong>of</strong><br />

period.<br />

Year “198000” to “209900”<br />

Month “000001” to “000012”<br />

Day “000001” to “000031”<br />

Y/M “198001” to “209912”<br />

M/D<br />

Day <strong>of</strong> Week<br />

“000101” to “001231”<br />

(The higher 4<br />

characters: month,<br />

the lower 2<br />

characters: date)<br />

“000000” to “000006”<br />

(“000000” : Sunday,<br />

“000006”: Saturday)<br />

Hour “000000” to “000023”<br />

Week “000000” to “000054”<br />

Year “198000” to “209900”<br />

Month “000001” to “000012”<br />

Day “000001” to “000031”<br />

Y/M “198001” to “209912”<br />

M/D<br />

Day <strong>of</strong> Week<br />

“000101” to “001231”<br />

(The higher 4<br />

characters: month,<br />

the lower 2<br />

characters: date)<br />

“000000” to “000006”<br />

(“000000”: Sunday,<br />

“000006”: Saturday)<br />

Hour “000000” to “000023”<br />

Week “000000” to “000059”<br />

Use the shift JIS code.<br />

• The common lot (Lot function Nos. 4 to 7) cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

When the period unit exceeds the setting range above, NAK09 is returned.


� CAD File (Code: CDF)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> CAD marking function<br />

Set the logo fi le to the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX CDF S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> CAD marking function<br />

Data<br />

[CAD No.] [CAD File Name]<br />

Max. 10-byte<br />

Read out the logo fi le in the specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX CDF R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX CDF A<br />

Data<br />

(CAD No.)<br />

2-byte<br />

Data<br />

[CAD No.] [CAD File Name]<br />

Max. 10-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

CAD No. 2<br />

CAD File Name Max 8<br />

The CAD File No. to be set or to be read out<br />

is indicated.<br />

The CAD fi le name corresponding to the<br />

specifi ed number is indicated without<br />

extension.<br />

The CAD fi le specifi cation will be deleted<br />

unless the fi le name is specifi ed.<br />

“00” to “15”<br />

When the fi le name is “ABCD.<br />

VEC”: “ABCD”.<br />

• Logo fi le for the LP-F series is treated as one for LP-F10/F10W (marking area �90mm).Logo fi le used for<br />

special-order model (marking area other than �90mm) is not supported.<br />

• The CAD No. 16 and after cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

• The long fi le name and DXF fi le name cannot be specifi ed. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

If readout is performed when long fi le name and DXF fi le name are specifi ed, NAK15 is returned.<br />

153


� General Condition (Code: ALC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> general condition<br />

Set the Step & Repeat condition for specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX ALC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> general condition<br />

154<br />

Data<br />

[X Offset] [Y Offset] [Rotation Offset] [Overwriting Frequency]<br />

[Flip (X Axis Symmetry)] [Mirror (Y axis symmetrical)] [Step & Repeat]<br />

[Number <strong>of</strong> Row] [Number <strong>of</strong> Col.] [Row Step] [Col. Step] [Flat<br />

Marking] 41-byte<br />

Read out the Step & Repeat condition for specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX ALC R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX ALC A<br />

Name<br />

Data<br />

[X Offset] [Y Offset] [Rotation Offset] [Overwriting Frequency]<br />

[Flip (X Axis Symmetry)] [Mirror (Y axis symmetrical)] [Step & Repeat]<br />

[Number <strong>of</strong> Row] [Number <strong>of</strong> Col.] [Row Step] [Col. Step] [Flat Marking]<br />

41-byte<br />

Data<br />

Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Content<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

X Offset 7 The marking position is <strong>of</strong>fset to the X direction. LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.00” to “+045.00” [mm]<br />

Y Offset 7 The marking position is <strong>of</strong>fset to the Y direction.<br />

Rotation Offset 6<br />

Overwriting<br />

Frequency<br />

1<br />

The marking position is <strong>of</strong>fset to the rotating<br />

direction.<br />

Marking is repeated by the repeat number<br />

set.<br />

“-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]<br />

“1” to “9” [times]<br />

Flip (X Axis Symmetry) 1 The character marked is inverted to the X axis. “0”… inversion OFF “1”… inversion ON<br />

Mirror (Y Axis Symmetry) 1 The character marked is inverted to the Y axis. “0”… inversion OFF “1”… inversion ON<br />

Step & Repeat 1<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> Row 3<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> Column 3<br />

Marking the same data is repeated to the X<br />

or Y axis direction.<br />

The number <strong>of</strong> row to be marked to the Y<br />

direction is indicated.<br />

The number <strong>of</strong> column to be marked to the<br />

X direction is indicated.<br />

“0”…OFF<br />

“1”…ON<br />

“001” to “100”…[row]<br />

(number <strong>of</strong> row x column < 900)<br />

“001” to “100”…[column]<br />

(number <strong>of</strong> row x column < 900)<br />

Row Step 5 The marking pitch to the Y direction is specifi ed. LP-S500*:<br />

“00.00” to “90.00”[mm]<br />

Column Step 5 The marking pitch to the X direction is specifi ed.<br />

Flat Marking 1 Sets the fl at marking function. “0”…OFF, “1”…ON<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

• Flat Marking can not be saved (when save as a new fi le or overwrite).<br />

• When the number <strong>of</strong> overlapped marking is 10 to 9999, setting cannot be performed.(NAK09 is returned.)<br />

If readout is performed when the number <strong>of</strong> overlapped marking is 10 to 9999, NAK15 is returned.<br />

• In readout response, the digit <strong>of</strong> 1μm or 0.01° is rounded down.<br />

• When the setting is performed using this command, the following items will be specifi ed.<br />

Overwriting Interval=0<br />

Step & Repeat: Reference Position X/Y Offset=0, Reference Position: Upper left, lateral direction, Common<br />

Counter, Missing number


� Step & Repeat Setting (Code: SRA)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment<br />

Set the instruction for fi ne adjustment with the following format:<br />

STX SRA S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment<br />

Data<br />

[List line] [Fine Adj. Type ] [Varies depending on the type <strong>of</strong> line adj.]<br />

Read out the instruction for fi ne adjustment with the following format:<br />

STX SRA R<br />

• Readout data<br />

Data<br />

[List line] (2byte)<br />

Read out the instruction data for fi ne adjustment with the following format:<br />

STX SRA A<br />

1. Setting deletion<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[List line] [Fine Adj. Type ] [Varies depending on the type <strong>of</strong> line adj.]<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

List line 2<br />

Fine Adj. Type 1<br />

2. Setting deletion<br />

The line in the list where this instruction is<br />

stores is indicated.<br />

The type <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment is<br />

indicated.<br />

“00” to “99”<br />

“0”…Setting deletion<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

List line 2<br />

Fine Adj. Type 1<br />

Target Row 3<br />

Target Column 3<br />

The line in the list where this instruction is<br />

stored is indicated.<br />

The type <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment is<br />

indicated.<br />

The target row to which the fi ne adjustment<br />

is provided is indicated.<br />

The target column to which the fi ne<br />

adjustment is provided is indicated.<br />

“00” to “99”<br />

“1”…single fi ne adjustment<br />

“001” to “100”<br />

“001” to “100”<br />

FineTune X 6<br />

The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for X axis is<br />

indicated. LP-S500*:<br />

FineTune Y 6<br />

The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for Y axis is<br />

indicated.<br />

“-45.00” to “+45.00” [mm]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

3. In case <strong>of</strong> “Marking OFF”<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

List line 2<br />

Fine Adj. Type 1<br />

Target Row 3<br />

Target Column 3<br />

The line in the list where this instruction is<br />

stores is indicated.<br />

The type <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment is<br />

indicated.<br />

The target row to which the fi ne adjustment<br />

is provided is indicated.<br />

The target column to which the fi ne<br />

adjustment is provided is indicated.<br />

“00” to “99”<br />

“2”…Marking OFF<br />

“001” to “100”<br />

“001” to “100”<br />

155


4. Setting deletion<br />

156<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

List line 2<br />

The line in the list where this instruction is<br />

stored is indicated.<br />

“00” to “99”<br />

Fine Adj. Type 1 The type <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment is indicated. “3”…fi ne adjustment for all columns<br />

Target Column 3<br />

The target column to which the fi ne<br />

adjustment is provided is indicated.<br />

“001” to “100”<br />

FineTune X 6 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for X axis is indicated. LP-S500*:<br />

“-45.00” to “+45.00” [mm]<br />

FineTune Y 6 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for Y axis is indicated.<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

5. Fine adjustment for all rows<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

List line 2<br />

The line in the list where this instruction is<br />

stored is indicated.<br />

“00” to “99”<br />

Fine Adj. Type 1 The type <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment is indicated. “4”…fi ne adjustment for all rows<br />

Target Row 3<br />

The target row to which the fi ne adjustment<br />

is provided is indicated<br />

“001” to “100”<br />

FineTune X 6 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for X axis is indicated. LP-S500*:<br />

“-45.00” to “+45.00” [mm]<br />

FineTune Y 6 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for Y axis is indicated.<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

6. Fine adjustment for column<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

List line 2<br />

The line in the list where this instruction is<br />

stored is indicated.<br />

“00” to “99”<br />

Fine Adj. Type 1 The type <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment is indicated. “5”…fi ne adjustment for all columns<br />

Target Column 3<br />

The target column to which the fi ne<br />

adjustment is provided is indicated.<br />

“001” to “100”<br />

FineTune X 6 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for X axis is indicated. LP-S500*:<br />

“-45.00” to “+45.00” [mm]<br />

FineTune Y 6 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for Y axis is indicated.<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

7. Fine adjustment for row<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

List line 2<br />

The line in the list where this instruction is<br />

stored is indicated.<br />

“00” to “99”<br />

Fine Adj. Type 1 The type <strong>of</strong> instruction for fi ne adjustment is indicated. “6”…fi ne adjustment for row<br />

Target Row 3<br />

The target row to which the fi ne adjustment<br />

is provided is indicated.<br />

“001” to “100”<br />

FineTune X 6 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for X axis is indicated. LP-S500*:<br />

“-45.00” to “+45.00” [mm]<br />

FineTune Y 6 The amount <strong>of</strong> adjustment for Y axis is indicated.<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

• The readout <strong>of</strong> the list line 100 and after cannot be set. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

• When the setting is performed using this command, the rotation angle and laser power adjustment become “0”.<br />

• In readout response, the digit <strong>of</strong> 1μm is rounded down.


� Character Condition (Code: STC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> character condition<br />

Set the character conditions with the following format:<br />

STX STC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> character condition<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.] [Start Line] [End Line] [Marking Shape]<br />

[Vary with the Marking Shape] [Font Specifi cation] [Bold<br />

Line Width] [Laser Power Correction] [Scan Speed<br />

Correction] [Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]<br />

Read out the character conditions with the following format:<br />

STX STC R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX STC A<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.]<br />

2-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[Condition No.] [Start Line] [End Line] [Marking Shape]<br />

[Vary with the Marking Shape] [Font Specifi cation] [Bold<br />

Line Width] [Laser Power Correction] [Scan Speed<br />

Correction] [Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]<br />

1. When markings from is straight line/proportional (Data length: 57/60-byte)<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Condition No. 2 The number <strong>of</strong> array for marking condition is indicated. “01” to “30”<br />

Start Line 2<br />

End Line 2<br />

Marking Shape 1 The marking form is indicated.<br />

The start line <strong>of</strong> character string for marking with this condition is<br />

indicated.<br />

The end line <strong>of</strong> character string for marking with this condition is<br />

indicated.<br />

Character Height 6 The height <strong>of</strong> character for marking is indicated.<br />

Character Width 6 The width <strong>of</strong> character for marking is indicated.<br />

“01” to “30” [row]<br />

“01” to “30” [row]<br />

“0”…straight line<br />

“4”…straight line Proportional<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.20” to “090.00” [mm]<br />

X Position 7 The X coordinate where the fi rst character is marked is indicated. LP-S500*:<br />

Y Position 7 The Y coordinate where the fi rst character is marked is indicated.<br />

“-045.00” to “+045.00” [mm]<br />

Character Interval 6 Indicates the gap between adjacent characters.<br />

Line Interval 6<br />

Font Specifi cation 1<br />

The marking interval to mark the next line is indicated when the<br />

character string is marked over two or more lines.<br />

The number corresponding to the 10 fonts previously registered is<br />

indicated.<br />

Bold Line Width 5 The thickness <strong>of</strong> line for character for marking is indicated.<br />

Laser Power<br />

Correction<br />

Scan<br />

Speed Correction<br />

3<br />

3<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser power specifi ed at the laser<br />

setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value for the scan speed specifi ed at the<br />

laser setting<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.000” to “045.00” [mm]<br />

“1”…font 1<br />

“2”…font 2<br />

LP-F10 Mode<br />

“-00.00” to “01.92” [mm]<br />

LP-F10W Mode<br />

“-00.00” to “02.00” [mm]<br />

“000” to “200” [%]<br />

“050” to “200” [%]<br />

157


Laser Pulse<br />

Cycle Correction<br />

158<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value corresponding with the marking pulse<br />

cycle specifi ed value here.<br />

“050” to “200” [%]<br />

(LP-F10 mode only)<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

• The condition Nos. 31 and after cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

• When the start line/end line is 31 to 99; font is 3 to 10, marking shape is proportional, arc radius and line<br />

width <strong>of</strong> bold character; laser power correction, speed scan correction and laser pulse cycle correction are<br />

out <strong>of</strong> the setting range <strong>of</strong> the LP-F10/LP-F10W, readout cannot be performed. (NAK15 is returned.)<br />

• At the time <strong>of</strong> setting, the character height, character width and X coordinate are converted according to the<br />

defi nition <strong>of</strong> the LP-S series so that they have the same layout, and at the time <strong>of</strong> readout, they are converted<br />

according to the defi nition <strong>of</strong> the LP-F10/LP-F10W. If any <strong>of</strong> the character height, character width and X<br />

coordinate exceeds the setting range in this conversion, NAK09 is returned at the time <strong>of</strong> setting and NAK15<br />

is returned at the time <strong>of</strong> readout.<br />

• In readout response, the digit <strong>of</strong> 1μm or 0.01° is rounded down. (Excluding the items with conversion<br />

process.)<br />

• When the marking shape is proportional, the kerning level should be set to level 2 that is supported by LP-<br />

F10/LP-F10W.<br />

• When the setting is performed using this command, the start point <strong>of</strong> the character string is set to the leftmost<br />

and the layer No. is “0”.<br />

• In the LP-F10W mode, the laser pulse cycle correction becomes 100%. (The same correction rate is applied<br />

to other marking forms.)<br />

2. When markings from is slope/slope proportional (Data length: 63/66-byte)<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

Condition No. 2 The number <strong>of</strong> array for marking condition is indicated. “01” to “30”<br />

Start Line 2<br />

End Line 2<br />

The start line <strong>of</strong> character string for marking with this<br />

condition is indicated.<br />

The end line <strong>of</strong> character string for marking with this condition<br />

is indicated.<br />

Marking Shape 1 The marking form is indicated.<br />

“01” to “30” [row]<br />

“01” to “30” [row]<br />

“1”…slope<br />

“5”…slope proportional<br />

Character Height 6 The height <strong>of</strong> character for marking is indicated. LP-S500*:<br />

“000.20” to “090.00” [mm]<br />

Character Width 6 The width <strong>of</strong> character for marking is indicated.<br />

X Position 7 The center <strong>of</strong> X coordinate for arc is indicated.<br />

Y Position 7 The center <strong>of</strong> Y coordinate for arc is indicated.<br />

Character Interval 6 Indicates the gap between adjacent characters.<br />

Line Interval 6<br />

The marking interval to mark the next line is indicated when<br />

the character string is marked over two or more lines.<br />

Tilt Angle 6 The tilt angle for character for marking to X axis is indicated.<br />

Font<br />

Specifi cation<br />

1<br />

The number corresponding to the 2 fonts previously<br />

registered is indicated.<br />

Bold Line Width 5 The thickness <strong>of</strong> line for character for marking is indicated.<br />

Laser Power<br />

Correction<br />

Scan<br />

Speed Correction<br />

3<br />

3<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser power specifi ed at the<br />

laser setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value for the scan speed specifi ed at<br />

the laser setting<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.00” to “+045.00” [mm]<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.00” to “045.000” [mm]<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.00” to “045.000” [mm]<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.00” to “045.000” [mm]<br />

“1”…font 1<br />

“2”…font 2<br />

LP-F10 Mode<br />

“00.00” to “01.92” [mm]<br />

LP-F10W Mode<br />

“00.00” to “02.00” [mm]<br />

“000” to “200” [%]<br />

“050” to “200” [%]


Laser Pulse<br />

Cycle Cor.<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value corresponding with the marking<br />

pulse cycle specifi ed value here.<br />

“050” to “200” [%]<br />

(LP-F10 mode only)<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

3. When the marking form is a sector marking (Data length … 70/73-byte)<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

Condition No. 2 The number <strong>of</strong> array for marking condition is indicated. “01” to “30”<br />

Start Line 2<br />

End Line 2<br />

The start line <strong>of</strong> character string for marking with this<br />

condition is indicated.<br />

The end line <strong>of</strong> character string for marking with this condition<br />

is indicated.<br />

Marking Shape 1 The marking form is indicated.<br />

“01” to “30” [row]<br />

“01” to “30” [row]<br />

“2”… Sector CW direction<br />

outside<br />

“3”… Sector CCW direction<br />

inside<br />

Character Height 6 The height <strong>of</strong> character for marking is indicated. LP-S500*:<br />

“000.20” to “090.00” [mm]<br />

Character Width 6 The width <strong>of</strong> character for marking is indicated.<br />

Center Position X 7 The center <strong>of</strong> X coordinate for arc is indicated.<br />

Center Position Y 7 The center <strong>of</strong> Y coordinate for arc is indicated.<br />

“-300.00” to “+300.00” [mm]<br />

Radius 7 The radius <strong>of</strong> arc is indicated. “+000.00” to “+300.00” [mm]<br />

Radius <strong>of</strong> Line<br />

Interval<br />

6<br />

Start Angle 6<br />

Angle <strong>of</strong> Character<br />

Interval<br />

Font<br />

Specifi cation<br />

6<br />

1<br />

The difference <strong>of</strong> radius from the center position <strong>of</strong> marking<br />

position to the next line is indicated when the character string<br />

is marked over two or more lines.<br />

The angle from the positive (+) side <strong>of</strong> X coordinate with<br />

counter-clockwise at the fi rst character in character string for<br />

marking is indicated.<br />

The angle between the center <strong>of</strong> character and the center <strong>of</strong><br />

next character is indicated.<br />

The number corresponding to the 2 fonts previously<br />

registered is indicated.<br />

Bold Line Width 5 The thickness <strong>of</strong> line for character for marking is indicated.<br />

Laser Power<br />

Correction<br />

Scan<br />

Speed Correction<br />

Laser Pulse<br />

Cycle Cor.<br />

3<br />

3<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser power specifi ed at the<br />

laser setting.<br />

Indicates the correction value for the scan speed specifi ed at<br />

the laser setting<br />

Indicates the correction value corresponding with the marking<br />

pulse cycle specifi ed value here.<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“000.00” to “045.00” [mm]<br />

“-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]<br />

“-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]<br />

“1”…font 1<br />

“2”…font 2<br />

LP-F10 Mode<br />

“00.00” to “01.92” [mm]<br />

LP-F10W Mode<br />

“00.00” to “02.00” [mm]<br />

“000” to “200” [%]<br />

“050” to “200” [%]<br />

“050” to “200” [%]<br />

(LP-F10 mode only)<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

159


� CAD Condition (Code: CDC)<br />

• Setting CAD Condition<br />

Set the marking condition <strong>of</strong> CAD fi le with the following format:<br />

STX CDC S<br />

• Read out <strong>of</strong> CAD condition<br />

160<br />

Data<br />

[CAD No.] [XPosition] [Y Position] [Scale] [Rotation Angle]<br />

[Laser Pulse Cycle Correction] [Scan Speed Correction] [Laser<br />

Pulse Cycle Correction]<br />

33/36-byte<br />

Read out the marking condition <strong>of</strong> CAD fi le with the following format:<br />

STX CDC R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX CDC R<br />

Name<br />

Data<br />

[CAD No.]<br />

2-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[CAD No.] [XPosition] [Y Position] [Scale] [Rotation Angle]<br />

[Laser Pulse Cycle Correction] [Scan Speed Correction] [Laser<br />

Pulse Cycle Correction]<br />

33/36-byte<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

CAD No. 2 The number <strong>of</strong> array for CAD condition is indicated. “00” to “15”<br />

X Position 7 The X coordinate <strong>of</strong> origin position on the CAD fi le is indicated.<br />

Y Position 7 The Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> origin position on the CAD fi le is indicated.<br />

Magnifi cation 5<br />

Rotation Angle 6<br />

Laser Power<br />

Correction<br />

Scan Speed<br />

Correction<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)<br />

3<br />

The X magnifi cation with which the CAD fi le is marked is<br />

indicated.<br />

The angle <strong>of</strong> rotation in counter-clockwise direction, centering<br />

on the origin position <strong>of</strong> CAD fi le, is indicated.<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser power specifi ed at the<br />

laser setting.<br />

“-300.00” to “+300.00” [mm]<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“00.10” to “01.98” [times]<br />

“-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]<br />

“000” to “200” [%]<br />

3 Performs correction <strong>of</strong> the set scan speed at specifi ed value. “050” to “200” [%]<br />

(3)<br />

Indicates the correction value corresponding with the marking<br />

pulse cycle specifi ed value here. (LP-F10 mode only)<br />

“050” to “200” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

• Logo fi le for the LP-F series is treated as one for LP-F10/F10W (marking area�90mm).Logo fi le used for<br />

special-order model (marking area other than�90mm) is not supported.<br />

• When a logo fi le for the LP-F series is used, X/Y scales are automatically adjusted to the same size in the<br />

LP-S series.X/Y scales for readout <strong>of</strong> CAD condition are different from values specifi ed in CAD condition<br />

setting.<br />

• In readout response, the digit <strong>of</strong> 1μm or 0.01° is rounded down.<br />

• The laser power correction, speed scan correction and laser pulse cycle correction are out <strong>of</strong> the setting<br />

range <strong>of</strong> the LP-F10/F10W, readout cannot be performed.(NAK15 is returned.)<br />

• When the setting is performed using this command, the layer No. is “0”.<br />

• In the LP-F10W mode, the laser pulse cycle correction is 100%.


� Laser Power (Code: LPW)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> laser power<br />

Set the peak value <strong>of</strong> laser power with the following format:<br />

STX LPW S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> laser power<br />

Data<br />

[Laser Power] 5-byte<br />

Read out the peak value <strong>of</strong> laser power with the following format:<br />

STX LPW R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX LPW A<br />

Data<br />

[Laser Power] 5-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Laser Power 5 The peak value <strong>of</strong> laser power is indicated.<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“012.0” to “100.0” by increment<br />

<strong>of</strong> 0.5<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

• The LP-S series has a different laser power from that <strong>of</strong> the LP-F series so that it is necessary to make some<br />

adjustments before the LP-S series is used at fi rst.<br />

� Scan Speed (Code: SSP)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> scan speed<br />

Set the scan speed with the following format:<br />

STX SSP S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> scan speed<br />

Data<br />

[Scan Speed] 4Byte<br />

Read out the scan speed with the following format:<br />

STX SSP R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX SSP A<br />

Data<br />

[Scan Speed] 4Byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Scan Speed 4 The moving speed <strong>of</strong> laser is indicated. “0001” to “3000” [mm/s]<br />

• More than 3000 cannot be specifi ed. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

• When the setting exceeds 3000 and readout is tried, NAK15 is returned.<br />

• The LP-S series has a different laser power and galvanometer performance from those <strong>of</strong> the LP-F series so<br />

that it is necessary to make some adjustments separately before the LP-S series is used at fi rst.<br />

161


� Laser Pulse Cycle (Code: MPL)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking pulse cycle<br />

Set the marking pulse cycle <strong>of</strong> laser with the following format:<br />

162<br />

STX MPL S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> marking pulse cycle<br />

Data<br />

[Laser Pulse Frequency] 4-byte<br />

Read out the marking pulse cycle <strong>of</strong> laser with the following format:<br />

STX MPL R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX MPL S<br />

Data<br />

[Laser Pulse Frequency] 4-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Laser Pulse Cycle 4 The marking pulse cycle is indicated.<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“02.0” to “20.0” [μS]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

Note that the setting range is different from the LP-F series due to the difference <strong>of</strong> specifi cation for the laser<br />

oscillator.<br />

� CW Pulse Cycle/Duty (Code: CWL)<br />

[LP-F10W mode only]<br />

• CW Pulse Cycle/Duty Setting<br />

Adjust the FAYb-CW type laser pulse cycle duty.<br />

STX CWL S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> W Pulse Cycle/Duty<br />

Read out the FAYb-CW type laser pulse cycle duty.<br />

Data<br />

CW Pulse Cycle [Duty]<br />

7-byte<br />

STX CWL R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX CWL A<br />

Data<br />

CW Pulse Cycle [Duty]<br />

7-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

CW Pulse Cycle 4 Indicates the CW pulse cycle. “0050” to “1000”<br />

Duty 3 Sets CW duty. “050” to “100”<br />

Setting does not affect the marking. Also this setting is not saved in the fi le.


� Line Width Correction (Code: WDC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> line width correction<br />

Set the line width for crossing avoidance at the crossing point <strong>of</strong> marking line and marking pitch for bold character with the<br />

following format:<br />

STX WDC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> line width correction<br />

Data<br />

[Line Width Correction] [Marking Pitch]<br />

8-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Read out the line width for crossing avoidance at the crossing point <strong>of</strong> marking line and marking pitch for bold character with<br />

the following format:<br />

STX WDC R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX WDC A<br />

Name<br />

Correction <strong>of</strong><br />

Marking Line Width<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

4<br />

Marking Pitch 4<br />

Data<br />

[Line Width Correction] [Marking Pitch]<br />

8-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

The line width for crossing avoidance at the crossing<br />

point <strong>of</strong> marking line is indicated.<br />

Sets the density at marking <strong>of</strong> bold characters.<br />

When “0.00” is specifi ed, create the bold character<br />

and set the marking pitch to 1/2 <strong>of</strong> the marking line<br />

width (when the character height = character width).<br />

“0.01” to “2.00” [mm]<br />

“0.00” to “2.00” [mm]<br />

• The bar code marking pitch and the bold character marking pitch are set to the specifi ed values at the time <strong>of</strong><br />

setting, and the bold character marking pitch is read out at the time <strong>of</strong> readout.<br />

• When “0.00” is specifi ed for the marking pitch, the marking line width correction is set to 1/2.<br />

(“0.00” cannot be read out.)<br />

• In readout response, the digit <strong>of</strong> 1μm is rounded down.<br />

163


� Marking Quality Adjustment (Code: WTC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking quality adjustment<br />

Set the adjustment <strong>of</strong> start point, end point, edge and curve with the following format:<br />

164<br />

STX WTC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> marking quality adjustment<br />

Data<br />

[Adjustment <strong>of</strong> Starting Point] [Adjustment <strong>of</strong> Ending Point]<br />

[Edge Adjustment] [Curve Adjustment]<br />

12-byte<br />

Read out the adjustment <strong>of</strong> start point, end point, edge and curve with the following format:<br />

STX WTC R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX WTC A<br />

Data<br />

[Adjustment <strong>of</strong> Starting Point] [Adjustment <strong>of</strong> Ending Point]<br />

[Edge Adjustment] [Curve Adjustment]<br />

12-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Adjustment <strong>of</strong><br />

Laser Start Point<br />

Adjustment <strong>of</strong><br />

Laser End Point<br />

3 The timing <strong>of</strong> starting laser is adjusted. “000” to “200”<br />

3 The timing <strong>of</strong> stopping laser is adjusted. “000” to “200”<br />

Edge Adjustment 3 The wait at edge is adjusted. “000” to “200”<br />

Curve Adjustment 3 The wait at curved line is adjusted. “000” to “200”<br />

• In adjustment <strong>of</strong> starting/ending points <strong>of</strong> edge and curve, the value specifi ed by this command minus 100<br />

will be set and the value specifi ed by this command plus 100 will be read out. However, if the value specifi ed<br />

by this command minus 100 is negative value, 0 is set in the adjustment <strong>of</strong> edge and curve.<br />

• The Wait/Jump Adjustment, jump adjustment and pre-scan time cannot be set and read out.<br />

• In the LP-S series, it is necessary to adjust the marking quality separately because the start-up and fall<br />

characteristics <strong>of</strong> the galvanometer and laser are different from those in the LP-F10/LP-F10W.


� Trigger Condition (Code: TRG)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> trigger condition<br />

Set the trigger condition with the following format:<br />

STX TRG S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> trigger condition<br />

Read out the trigger condition with the following format:<br />

Data<br />

[Moving Direction] [Encoder] [Trigger Type]<br />

3-byte<br />

STX TRG R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX TRG A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Moving direction: 1<br />

Data<br />

[Moving Direction] [Encoder] [Trigger Type]<br />

3-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

The moving direction <strong>of</strong> line at marking to fl ying object<br />

is set.<br />

“0”…still “1”…left<br />

“2”…right<br />

“4”…back<br />

“3”…front<br />

Encoder 1 The ON/OFF <strong>of</strong> encoder signal is indicated. “0”…OFF “1”…ON<br />

Trigger Type 1<br />

Available only when the “moving speed” is “still”.<br />

The applicable mode <strong>of</strong> signal which is input into the<br />

trigger input for marking is indicated.<br />

“0”…trigger marking<br />

“1”…equidistant marking<br />

165


� Delay (Code: DLY)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> delay<br />

Set the delay with the following format:<br />

166<br />

STX DLY S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> delay<br />

Data<br />

[Delay Distance/Time]<br />

6-byte<br />

Read out the delay setting with the following format:<br />

STX DLY R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX DLY A<br />

Data<br />

[Delay Distance/Time]<br />

6-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

[Delay Distance/<br />

Time]<br />

� Marking Interval (Code: INT)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking interval<br />

Set the marking interval with the following format:<br />

STX INT S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> marking interval<br />

6<br />

When the moving speed is “still”, delay time is shown and<br />

the marking start time after the trigger input is displayed.<br />

When the moving speed is other than “still”, delay distance<br />

is shown and the distance where the marking starts after the<br />

trigger input is displayed.<br />

(The delay time is displayed with the LP-S***W type.)<br />

Data<br />

[marking interval]<br />

5-byte<br />

Read out the marking interval with the following format:<br />

STX INT R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX INT A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Marking Interval 5<br />

Data<br />

[marking interval]<br />

5-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Delay Distance…“000.00” to<br />

“500.00” [mm]<br />

Delay Time…“000000” to<br />

“005000” [ms]<br />

Outline Description<br />

The marking interval is indicated, available only when<br />

the moving direction is other than “still” and trigger<br />

type is “equidistant”.<br />

• 1000.0 or more cannot be specifi ed. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

• When the setting exceeds 1000.0 and readout is tried, NAK15 is returned.<br />

“000.0” to “999.9” [mm]


� Line Speed (Code: LSP)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> line speed<br />

Set the moving speed <strong>of</strong> object to be marked with the following format:<br />

STX LSP S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> line speed<br />

Data<br />

[Line Speed]<br />

6-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Read out the setting value <strong>of</strong> moving speed <strong>of</strong> object to be marked with the following format:<br />

STX LSP R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX LSP A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Line Speed 6<br />

Data<br />

[Line Speed]<br />

6-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

The speed with which the object to be marked passes is<br />

indicated, available only when the traveling direction is other<br />

than “still” and encoder signal is “OFF”.<br />

• The value more than 60.000 cannot be specifi ed. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

• When the setting exceeds 60.000 and readout is tried, NAK15 is returned.<br />

“00.060” to “60.000” [m/min]<br />

167


� Encoder Signal (Code: ENC)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> encoder signal<br />

Set the pulse number <strong>of</strong> encoder with the following format:<br />

168<br />

STX ENC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> encoder signal<br />

Data<br />

[Encoder Pulse]<br />

6-byte<br />

Read out the pulse number <strong>of</strong> encoder with the following format:<br />

STX ENC R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX ENC A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Encoder Pulse 6<br />

Data<br />

[Encoder Pulse]<br />

6-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Available only when the moving direction is other than<br />

“still”. The pulse number <strong>of</strong> encoder is indicated.<br />

“005.00” to “600.00” [Pulse/mm]


� Year/Month/Date/Time (Code: YMD)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> year/month/date/time<br />

Set the clock in the system with the following format:<br />

STX YMD S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> year/month/date/time<br />

Data<br />

[Dominical Year] [Month] [Day] [Hour]<br />

[Min.] [Second]<br />

14-byte<br />

Read out the setting <strong>of</strong> clock in the system with the following format:<br />

STX YMD R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX YMD A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Dominical Year] [Month] [Day] [Hour]<br />

[Min.] [Second]<br />

14-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Dominical Year 4 Dominical year is indicated. “1980” to “2037” [year]<br />

Month 2 Month is indicated. “01” to “12” [month]<br />

Day 2 Date is indicated. “01” to “31” [day]<br />

Hour 2 Hour is indicated. “00” to “23” [hour]<br />

Min. 2 Minute is indicated. “00” to “59” [minute]<br />

Second 2 Second is indicated. “00” to “59” [second]<br />

The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.<br />

169


� Era Year (Code: ERA)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> era year<br />

Set the era year with the following format:<br />

170<br />

STX ERA S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> era year<br />

Data<br />

[Era year]<br />

2-byte<br />

Read out the setting <strong>of</strong> era year with the following format:<br />

STX ERA R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX ERA A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Era year]<br />

2-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Era Year 2 The era year is indicated. “01” to “99” [year]<br />

• The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.<br />

• When Year is set to 100 to 9999 and read out, NAK15 is returned.<br />

� Shutter (Code: SHT)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> shutter<br />

Set the control <strong>of</strong> shutter with the following format:<br />

STX SHT S<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Shutter Status]<br />

1-byte<br />

Shutter Status 1 The control <strong>of</strong> shutter is indicated.<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

“0”…close<br />

“1”…open<br />

• <strong>Control</strong> <strong>of</strong> shutter by this command is unavailable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface <strong>of</strong> controller<br />

is turned to OFF.<br />

• Use the marking mode command (MKM) instead <strong>of</strong> the shutter command (SHT) when the number <strong>of</strong> open<br />

and shut <strong>of</strong> the shutter is a lot.<br />

• Response data for abnormal receiving (NAK03) is returned when shutter open command is transmitted in<br />

shutter open status.


� Marking Mode (Code: MKM)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking mode<br />

Set the interruption/restart <strong>of</strong> marking during operation with the following format:<br />

STX MKM S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> marking mode<br />

Data<br />

[Marking Mode]<br />

1-byte<br />

Read out the mode during marking with the following format:<br />

STX MKM R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX MKM A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Marking Mode]<br />

1-byte<br />

Marking Mode 1 The marking mode is indicated.<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Marking ready is set to OFF while the marking mode is interruption.<br />

� Counter Reset (Code: CTR)<br />

• Counter reset<br />

Set the counter <strong>of</strong> fi le currently selected to the initial value.<br />

STX CTR S (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

“0”…interrupt<br />

“1”…restart<br />

Reset the counter 0 to 3 (the value currently selected is set to the initial value). The common counters cannot be reset.<br />

171


� Status Request (Code: STS)<br />

• Status request<br />

Read out the operating status <strong>of</strong> laser marker with the following format:<br />

172<br />

STX STS R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Response to status request<br />

Read out with the following format:<br />

STX STS A<br />

Name<br />

Error occurrence<br />

status<br />

Laser Pumping<br />

Status<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Error occurrence status] [Laser Pumping Status]<br />

[Standby Status] [Marking Ready Status] [Trigger Status]<br />

5-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

1 The status <strong>of</strong> error occurrence is indicated. “0”…no error “1”…error occurrence<br />

1 The status <strong>of</strong> laser pumping is indicated.<br />

Standby Status 1 The status <strong>of</strong> marking operation is indicated.<br />

Marking Ready<br />

Status<br />

1<br />

The status <strong>of</strong> marking trigger acceptability is<br />

indicated.<br />

Trigger Status 1<br />

The status <strong>of</strong> trigger input (TRIG.IN) is<br />

indicated when “equidistant marking” is<br />

selected at trigger condition.<br />

* Marking is enable when the response data is either “02110” or “02111”.<br />

“0”…laser pumping OFF<br />

“1”…laser pumping<br />

“2”…laser pumping completed<br />

“0”…standby<br />

“1”…marking being operated<br />

“0”…marking disable (ready OFF)<br />

“1”…marking enable (ready ON)<br />

“0”…trigger OFF<br />

“1”…trigger ON


� Laser Pumping (Code: LSR)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> laser control<br />

Set the status <strong>of</strong> laser with the following format:<br />

STX LSR S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> marking mode<br />

Data<br />

[Laser Status]<br />

1-byte<br />

Read out the status <strong>of</strong> laser with the following format:<br />

STX LSR R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX LSR A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Laser Status]<br />

1-byte<br />

Laser <strong>Control</strong> 1 The status <strong>of</strong> laser is indicated.<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

“0”…OFF<br />

“1”…ON<br />

• <strong>Control</strong> <strong>of</strong> laser pumping by this command is unavailable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface <strong>of</strong><br />

controller is turned to OFF.<br />

• After the start <strong>of</strong> pumping, marking is not started for about 20 seconds with LP-S*** type and about 15<br />

seconds with LP-S***W type.<br />

� Marking Trigger (Code: MRK)<br />

[LP-S*** type only]<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking trigger<br />

Set the trigger in marking trigger waiting status with the following format:<br />

STX MRK S<br />

Name<br />

Marking<br />

Specifi cation<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

1<br />

Data<br />

[Marking Specifi cation]<br />

1-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

The instruction <strong>of</strong> marking start/stop is executed<br />

when “equidistant marking” is set at the trigger type<br />

in the trigger condition (TRG command). Marking<br />

is performed at command reception, regardless <strong>of</strong><br />

the setting in “trigger marking” when “even interval<br />

marking” is set at the trigger type.<br />

“0”…stop<br />

“1”…start<br />

Marking is performed at command reception, regardless <strong>of</strong> the setting in “marking trigger” when “equidistant<br />

marking” is set at the trigger type.<br />

173


� Marking Status Transmission Permission (Code: MST)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> marking status transmission permission<br />

Set the transmission permission/prohibition <strong>of</strong> response synchronized with marking completion or occurrence <strong>of</strong> area over<br />

for marking with the following format:<br />

174<br />

STX MST S<br />

Data<br />

[Transmission permitted]<br />

1-byte<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> transmission permission/prohibition <strong>of</strong> response<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Read out the transmission permission/prohibition <strong>of</strong> response with the following format:<br />

STX MST R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX MST A<br />

Data<br />

[Transmission permitted]<br />

1-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Trans-mission<br />

Permission/<br />

Prohibition<br />

1<br />

The status <strong>of</strong> transmission permission for<br />

response is indicated.<br />

• Data transmission after setting marking status transmission permission<br />

“0”…Transmission prohibited<br />

“1”…Transmission permitted<br />

The status is transmitted if the marking failure occurs when marking is normally completed or when character string is set<br />

outside the marking area transmission permission when receiving a marking trigger from the RS-232C after marking status<br />

transmission permission is set.<br />

STX MST S<br />

• Readout data<br />

Data<br />

[Status]<br />

4-byte<br />

STX MST R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Status 4 The status after marking operation is indicated.<br />

“0000”…Marking is normally<br />

completed.<br />

Others: Error code at marking<br />

operation<br />

• When marking status function is used, set the transmission permission before every shifting to the remote<br />

mode.<br />

• When the remote mode is released, the marking status transmission is returned to the default transmission<br />

prohibition.<br />

• Refer to “Chapter 4 Troubleshooting” for the detail <strong>of</strong> the error code at marking operation.<br />

The error code is as the same as those in the LP-S Standard mode. (It is different from LP-F10/LP-F10W<br />

Mode.)


� I/O Environment (Code: ENV)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> I/O environment<br />

Set the I/O environment with the following format:<br />

STX ENV S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> I/O environment<br />

Data<br />

[One-shot time] [Detect TRIG. warning during marking]<br />

4-byte<br />

Read out the setting <strong>of</strong> I/O environment with the following format:<br />

STX ENV R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX ENV A<br />

Data<br />

[One-shot time] [Detect TRIG. warning during marking]<br />

4-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

One-shot time 3<br />

Detect TRIG.<br />

Warning during<br />

Marking<br />

1<br />

The delay time <strong>of</strong> terminal output OFF at the<br />

end <strong>of</strong> marking is indicated.<br />

The output status <strong>of</strong> warning at detection <strong>of</strong><br />

trigger during marking operation is indicated.<br />

The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.<br />

“002” to “510” [ms]<br />

“0”…no output<br />

“1”…output<br />

175


� Laser Check Radiation (Code: SPT)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> laser check<br />

The laser check is controlled.<br />

The laser is radiated at the center position. The laser power can be changed by setting the laser condition.<br />

176<br />

STX SPT S Data (1-byte) (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name<br />

Laser Check<br />

Radiation<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

1<br />

Outline Description<br />

The start/stop <strong>of</strong> laser check is<br />

controlled.<br />

“0”…stop:<br />

Spot radiation is stopped and the<br />

internal shutter is closed.<br />

“1”…start: Laser check is started. When the<br />

internal shutter has been closed, it<br />

is opened to perform spot radiation.<br />

(The setting can be transmitted to<br />

the laser marker when the internal<br />

shutter is closed or when the laser<br />

marking is interrupted.)<br />

“2”…interrupt Laser check is interrupted. The<br />

internal shutter, however, is not<br />

closed.<br />

• <strong>Control</strong> <strong>of</strong> laser check by this command is unavailable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface <strong>of</strong><br />

controller is turned to OFF.<br />

• The setting can be transmitted to the laser marker only when the laser check is interrupted.


� Rank Condition (Code: RKC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> rank condition<br />

Set the rank condition <strong>of</strong> specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX RKC S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> rank condition<br />

Data<br />

1-byte<br />

Read out the rank condition <strong>of</strong> specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX RKC R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX RKC A<br />

Data<br />

1-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Parallel Input 1<br />

The condition for parallel input is<br />

indicated.<br />

“0”…no use<br />

“1”…4-bit × 2<br />

“4”…8-bit × 1<br />

177


� Rank Character String (Code: RKS)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> rank character string<br />

Set the rank character string <strong>of</strong> specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

178<br />

STX RKS S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> rank character string<br />

Data<br />

[Rank No.] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 21-byte<br />

Read out the rank character string <strong>of</strong> specifi ed number with the following format:<br />

STX RKS R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX RKS A<br />

Data<br />

[Rank No.]<br />

3-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Rank No.] [Marking Character String]<br />

Max. 21-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Rank No. 3<br />

Marking<br />

Character<br />

String<br />

Max 18<br />

The number in which the character<br />

string is set is indicated.<br />

The setting range varies depending<br />

on the condition <strong>of</strong> parallel input.<br />

The character string to be marked<br />

with the specifi ed period is set.<br />

Specify 0-byte <strong>of</strong> data length<br />

to delete the character string <strong>of</strong><br />

period.<br />

Parallel Input Setting range<br />

8-bit “000” to “255”<br />

Low 4 bit “016” to “031”<br />

higher 4-bit “000” to “015”<br />

Use the shift JIS code.


� Offset Condition (Code: OFC)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong>fset condition<br />

Set the <strong>of</strong>fset condition with the following format:<br />

STX OFC S Data (1-byte) (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong>fset condition<br />

Read out the fi le name currently being edited with the following format:<br />

STX OFC R (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX OFC A Data (1-byte) (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Parallel Input 1 The condition for parallel input is indicated.<br />

“0”…no use<br />

“1”…low 4-bit<br />

“4”…low 8-bit<br />

When “Low 10 bit” and “Serial Data” are set, readout cannot be performed. (NAK15 is returned.)<br />

179


� Offset (Code: OFS)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong>fset<br />

Set the <strong>of</strong>fset <strong>of</strong> specifi ed <strong>of</strong>fset number with the following format:<br />

180<br />

STX OFS S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong>fset<br />

Data<br />

[Offset No.] [X Offset] [Y Offset]<br />

[Offset θ]<br />

21-byte<br />

Read out the <strong>of</strong>fset <strong>of</strong> specifi ed <strong>of</strong>fset number with the following format:<br />

STX OFS R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX OFS A<br />

Data<br />

[Offset No.]<br />

3-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Offset No.] [X Offset] [Y Offset]<br />

[Offset θ]<br />

21-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name Data Length [byte] Outline Description<br />

Offset No. 3<br />

The number in which <strong>of</strong>fset is set is<br />

indicated.<br />

“000” to “255”<br />

X Offset 6 The <strong>of</strong>fset <strong>of</strong> X coordinate is indicated. LP-S500*:<br />

Y Offset 6 The <strong>of</strong>fset <strong>of</strong> Y coordinate is indicated. “-045.00” to “+045.00” [mm]<br />

Offset θ 6 The rotation <strong>of</strong>fset is indicated. “-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).


� Bar Code Marking Condition (Code: BCF)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> bar code marking condition<br />

STX BCF S<br />

Data<br />

[Bar code No.] [Bar Code Type] [Inversion] [Check Character] [Height]<br />

[Narrow Element] [X Position] [Y Position] [Tilt Angle]<br />

[Quiet Ratio] [Wide Element] [Laser Power Cor.]<br />

[Scan Speed Correction] [Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]<br />

47/50-byte<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> bar code marking condition<br />

Read out the specifi ed bar code marking condition with the following format:<br />

STX BCF R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX BCF A<br />

Name<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.]<br />

1-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[Bar code No.] [Bar Code Type] [Inversion] [Check Character]<br />

[Height] [Narrow Element] [X Position] [Y Position] [Tilt Angle]<br />

[Quiet Ratio] [Wide Element] [Laser Power Cor.]<br />

[Scan Speed Correction] [Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]<br />

47/50-byte<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Bar Code No. 1 Bar code which sets the condition “0” to “3”<br />

Bar Code Type 1 Specifi es bar code type<br />

Inversion 1 Indicates valid or invalid <strong>of</strong> inversion<br />

Check Character 1 Indicates existence <strong>of</strong> check character.<br />

Height 6 Height <strong>of</strong> bar code<br />

Narrow Element 4<br />

Indicates the width <strong>of</strong> narrow element <strong>of</strong> bar<br />

and space<br />

X Position 7 X coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> bar code<br />

Y Position 7 Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> bar code<br />

“0”: CODE39<br />

“1”: ITF<br />

“0”: invalid<br />

“1”: valid<br />

“0”: Absence<br />

“1”: Presence<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“001.00” to “090.00” [mm]<br />

“0.05” to “1.00” [mm]<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.00” to “+045.00” [mm]<br />

Tilt Angle 6 Tilt angle <strong>of</strong> bar code “-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]<br />

Quiet/<br />

Narrow Ratio<br />

Wide/<br />

Narrow Ratio<br />

Laser Power<br />

Corrrection<br />

4 Ratio <strong>of</strong> quiet width to narrow element width “00.0” to “20.0”<br />

3<br />

3<br />

Ratio <strong>of</strong> wide element width to narrow<br />

element width<br />

Indicates the correction value for laser power<br />

specifi ed at the laser setting.<br />

“1.8” to “3.4”<br />

“000” to “200” [%]<br />

181


182<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Scan Speed Correction 3<br />

(Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

Correction)<br />

3<br />

Outline Description<br />

Indicates the correction value for the scan<br />

speed specifi ed at the laser setting<br />

Indicates the correction value corresponding<br />

with the marking pulse cycle specifi ed value<br />

here. (LP-F10 mode only)<br />

“001” to “200” [%]<br />

“050” to “200” [%]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

• The bar code No. 4 to 7 cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

• Readout is available only when CODE39/ITF is set in the bar code type.<br />

(When other bar code is set, NAK15 is returned.)<br />

• In readout response, the digit <strong>of</strong> 1μm or 0.01° is rounded down.<br />

• When the setting is performed using this command, the layer No. is “0”.<br />

• In the LP-F10W mode, the laser pulse cycle correction becomes 100%.


� Bar Code Data Setting (Code: BCS)<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> bar code marking data<br />

STX BCS S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> bar code marking data<br />

STX BCS R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX BCS A<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Bar Code Data]<br />

Max. 61-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.]<br />

1-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Bar Code No.] [Bar Code Data]<br />

Max. 61-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• A one-byte character which can not be converted to one-byte, including Katakana, is read out using the<br />

corresponding double-byte character (shift JIS).<br />

• Use the BRS command (two-byte Character) because this command cannot use the control code.<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Bar Code No. 1<br />

Bar Code Data Max 60 Data <strong>of</strong> bar code<br />

Outline Description<br />

Function No. <strong>of</strong> bar code which sets the<br />

data.<br />

“0” to “3”<br />

20 one-byte characters within the<br />

range from (HEX) to 7E(HEX).<br />

(Functional characters should not be<br />

included.)<br />

Refer to “Setting method <strong>of</strong> character string for marking (specifi ed with shift JIS code)” (P.146) for the detail <strong>of</strong><br />

the setting method <strong>of</strong> character string.<br />

183


� Serial Data Input (Code: SIN)<br />

Function characters (serial data) are preset to the marking character string or bar code data. Marking <strong>of</strong> the transmitted<br />

character string corresponding with the serial data starts.<br />

• Setting <strong>of</strong> serial data input<br />

184<br />

STX SIN S Serial Data No. Data (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Outline Description<br />

Serial Data No. 2 Sets the serial data No. “00” to “15”<br />

Data Max 60<br />

Be sure that total <strong>of</strong> the number <strong>of</strong><br />

characters in the specifi ed line must be<br />

less than 30.<br />

one-byte or double-byte (shift JIS<br />

code) characters less than 30 (mixed<br />

not available)<br />

• Only when the internal shutter is opened during the remote control (excluding during marking interruption),<br />

the serial data can be transmitted to the laser marker.<br />

• For using this command, set “serial data” <strong>of</strong> function characters at setting screen beforehand.<br />

• When setting function characters (serial data), transmit this command by every marking. Otherwise it does<br />

not become marking ready condition, and marking is not available.<br />

• When transmit this command without any data, marking ready become ON, then nothing to be marked with<br />

serial data input.<br />

• For resetting the data, either close the shutter or transmit the marking mode command (marking interruption).<br />

• This input cannot be used with the external <strong>of</strong>fset and marking on moving object.<br />

• In case <strong>of</strong> transmitting character using the RS-232C which is differed to the specifi ed number <strong>of</strong> digit, the<br />

character is marked with the differed number <strong>of</strong> digit.<br />

• Refer to the timing chart for this command transmission.(P.34).


� QR Code Marking Condition (Code: QRF)<br />

• QR Code Marking Condition Setting<br />

STX QRF S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> QR code marking condition<br />

STX QRF R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX QRF A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[QR Code No.] [Model] [Input Mode] [Error correction]<br />

[Position/Angle] [Module H/W]<br />

32-byte<br />

Data<br />

[QR Code No.]<br />

1-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[QR Code No.] [Model] [Input Mode] [Error correction]<br />

[Position/Angle] [Module H/W]<br />

32-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

QR Code No. 1 QR code No. which sets the condition. “0” to “3”<br />

Mode 1 Specifi es bar code type.<br />

Data Input Mode 1 Data input mode <strong>of</strong> QR code.<br />

Error Correction<br />

Level<br />

1 Error correction level <strong>of</strong> QR code.<br />

X Position 7 X coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> QR code.<br />

Y Position 7 Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> QR code.<br />

“1”: model 1<br />

“2”: model 2<br />

“3”: micro QR code<br />

“0”: Number<br />

“1”: Alpha<br />

“2”: Binary (prohibited)<br />

“3”: Kanji<br />

“0”: High density<br />

“1”: Standard<br />

“2”: High responsibility<br />

“3”: Super high responsibility<br />

For micro QR, the high reliability<br />

cannot be specifi ed.<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.00” to “+045.00” [mm]<br />

Rotation Angle 6 Rotation angle <strong>of</strong> QR code. “-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]<br />

Module H. 4 Interval <strong>of</strong> module in longitudinal direction.<br />

Module W. 4 Interval <strong>of</strong> module in lateral direction.<br />

“0.05” to “1.00” [mm]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

• The QR code version becomes automatic and the minimum size is specifi ed.<br />

• The data matrix No. 4 to 7 cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

• Readout is available only when the QR code is set to the bar code type.<br />

(When other bar code is set, NAK15 is returned.)<br />

• In readout response, the digit <strong>of</strong> 1μm or 0.01° is rounded down.<br />

• When the setting is performed using this command, the layer No. is “0”.<br />

185


� QR Code Pattern (Code: QRP)<br />

• QR Code Pattern Setting<br />

186<br />

STX QRP S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> QR code pattern<br />

Data<br />

[QR Code No.] [Margin.] [Finder]<br />

[Alignment] [Dark module] [Light module]<br />

66-byte<br />

STX QRP R QR Code No. (Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX QRP A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

QR Code No. 1<br />

Margin Pattern 13<br />

Finder Pattern 13<br />

Alignment Pattern 13<br />

Dark module 13<br />

Light Module<br />

Pattern<br />

13<br />

Data<br />

[QR Code No.] [Margin.] [Finder]<br />

[Alignment] [Dark module] [Light module]<br />

66-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Function No. <strong>of</strong> QR code which sets the<br />

pattern.<br />

Specifi es a character code (a pattern code)<br />

to use for the margin pattern.<br />

Specifi es a correction value <strong>of</strong> laser and scan<br />

speed when marking the margin pattern.<br />

• Laser Power Correction (3-byte)<br />

• Scan Speed Correction (3-byte)<br />

• Laser Pulse Cycle Correction (3-byte)<br />

Specifi es the fi nder pattern. When “0000”<br />

is specifi ed for the character code, marking<br />

is performed at the pattern setting <strong>of</strong> dark<br />

module/light module. The other settings are<br />

the same as those for the margin pattern.<br />

When “0000” is specifi ed for the character<br />

code in the alignment setting, marking is<br />

performed at the pattern setting <strong>of</strong> dark<br />

module/light module. The other settings are<br />

the same as those for the margin pattern.<br />

Specifi es the dark module pattern and the<br />

details are the same as those for the margin<br />

pattern.<br />

Specifi es the light module pattern and the<br />

details are the same as those for the margin<br />

pattern.<br />

“0” to “3”<br />

Refer to “Character Code Table”<br />

(P.220) for the character code. When<br />

the marking cannot be done, set the<br />

character code to “0000”.<br />

“000” to “200”<br />

“050” to “200”<br />

“050” to “200” (Specify “100” in<br />

LP-F10W mode.)<br />

Same as above<br />

Same as above<br />

Same as above<br />

Same as above


� QR Code Data (Code: QRS)<br />

• QR Code Data Setting<br />

STX QRS S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> QR code data<br />

STX QRS R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX QRS A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

QR Code No. 1<br />

Data<br />

[QR Code No.] [Line No.] [QR Code Data]<br />

62-byte<br />

Data<br />

[QR Code No.]<br />

1-byte<br />

Data<br />

[QR Code No.] [Line No.] [QR Code Data]<br />

62-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Function No. <strong>of</strong> QR code which sets the<br />

data.<br />

“0” to “3”<br />

Line No. 1 Specifi es the line for data setting “1” to “9”<br />

QR Code Data Max 60<br />

Specifi es the character setting in the<br />

specifi ed line.In case <strong>of</strong> QR code marking,<br />

each line is connected in the order <strong>of</strong><br />

number, and barcode is generated. Be sure<br />

that the connected QR code data length<br />

must be less than 510-byte.<br />

Refer to the below.<br />

Refer to “Setting method <strong>of</strong> character string for marking (specifi ed with shift JIS code)” (P.146) for the detail <strong>of</strong><br />

the setting method <strong>of</strong> character string.<br />

187


� Data Matrix Code Marking Condition (Code: DMF)<br />

• Set the data matrix code marking condition.<br />

188<br />

STX DMF S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> data matrix code marking condition<br />

STX DMF R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX DMF A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

Data<br />

[Data Matrix No.] [Data Input Mode]<br />

[Number <strong>of</strong> Row] [Number <strong>of</strong> Column] [X Position]<br />

[Y Position] [Rotation Angle] [Module H.] [Module W.]<br />

36-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Data Matrix No.]<br />

1-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Data<br />

[Data Matrix No.] [Data Input Mode]<br />

[Number <strong>of</strong> Row] [Number <strong>of</strong> Column] [X Position]<br />

[Y Position] [Rotation Angle] [Module H.] [Module W.]<br />

36-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

[Data Matrix No.] 1 Bar code which sets the condition. “0” to “3”<br />

Data Input Mode 1<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> Row 2<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> column 2<br />

Type <strong>of</strong> character to be encoded in the data<br />

matrix code.<br />

Longitudinal symbol size (the number <strong>of</strong> modules)<br />

<strong>of</strong> the data matrix code.<br />

When “0” is specifi ed for the number <strong>of</strong> both row<br />

and column, the symbol size is encoded in the<br />

minimum size.<br />

Lateral symbol size (the number <strong>of</strong> modules) <strong>of</strong><br />

the data matrix code.<br />

X Position 7 X coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> data matrix code.<br />

Y Position 7 Y coordinate <strong>of</strong> center <strong>of</strong> data matrix code.<br />

“0”: Binary<br />

“1”: Kanji<br />

“00” or “08” to “88”<br />

Only “0” or the combination<br />

allowed in ECC200 can be<br />

specifi ed for both the number <strong>of</strong><br />

row and the number <strong>of</strong> column.<br />

“00” or “10” to “88”<br />

LP-S500*:<br />

“-045.00” to “+045.00” [mm]<br />

Rotation Angle 6 Rotation angle <strong>of</strong> data matrix code. “-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]<br />

Module H. 5 Interval <strong>of</strong> module in longitudinal direction.<br />

Module W. 5 Interval <strong>of</strong> module in lateral direction.<br />

“0.001” to “1.000” [mm]<br />

* For the setting range <strong>of</strong> the other model, refer to “Input Setting Value by Series (LP-F10/F10W Mode)” (P.216).<br />

• The data matrix No. 4 to 7 cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)<br />

• Readout is available only when the data matrix is set to the bar code type.<br />

(When other bar code is set, NAK15 is returned.)<br />

• In readout response, the digit <strong>of</strong> 1μm or 0.01° is rounded down.<br />

• When the setting is performed using this command, the layer No. is “0”.


� Data Matrix Code Pattern (Code: DMP)<br />

• Data Matrix Code Pattern Setting<br />

STX DMP S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> data matrix code pattern<br />

STX DMP R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX DMP A<br />

Name<br />

Data Matrix No.<br />

Quiet Zone<br />

Pattern<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

1<br />

13<br />

Mark Module<br />

Pattern 13<br />

Space Module<br />

Pattern 13<br />

Data<br />

[Data Matrix No.] [Quiet Zone]<br />

[Mark Module] [Space Module]<br />

40-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Data Matrix No.]<br />

1-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Data Matrix No.] [Quiet Zone]<br />

[Mark Module] [Space Module]<br />

40-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Function No. <strong>of</strong> data matrix code which sets<br />

the pattern.<br />

Specifi es a character code (a pattern code)<br />

to use for the quiet zone pattern.<br />

Specifi es a correction value <strong>of</strong> laser and<br />

scan speed when marking the quiet zone<br />

pattern.<br />

• Laser Power Correction (3-byte)<br />

• Scan Speed Correction (3-byte)<br />

• Laser Pulse Cycle Correction (3-byte)<br />

Specifi es the character code to be used for<br />

the mark module pattern and the correction<br />

value to mark the mark module pattern.<br />

Specifi es the character code to be used for<br />

the space module pattern and the correction<br />

value to mark the mark module pattern.<br />

“0” to “3”<br />

Refer to “Character Code Table” (P.220)<br />

for the character code.<br />

When the marking cannot be done,<br />

set the character code to “0000”.<br />

“000” to “200”<br />

“050” to “200”<br />

“050” to “200”<br />

(Specify “100” in LP-F10W mode.)<br />

Same as above<br />

Same as above<br />

Refer to “Setting method <strong>of</strong> character string for marking (specifi ed with shift JIS code)” (P.146) for the detail <strong>of</strong><br />

the setting method <strong>of</strong> character string.<br />

189


� Data Matrix Code Data (Code: DMS)<br />

• Data Matrix Code Data Setting<br />

190<br />

STX DMS S<br />

• Readout <strong>of</strong> data matrix code data<br />

STX DMS R<br />

• Readout data<br />

STX DMS A<br />

Name<br />

Data Length<br />

[byte]<br />

[Data Matrix No.] 1<br />

Data<br />

[Data Matrix Code No.] [Line Number]<br />

[Data Matrix Code Data]<br />

Max. 62-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Data Matrix No.]<br />

1-byte<br />

Data<br />

[Data Matrix Code No.] [Line Number]<br />

[Data Matrix Code Data]<br />

Max. 62-byte<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

(Check Sum) Delimiter<br />

Outline Description<br />

Function No. <strong>of</strong> data matrix code which sets<br />

the data.<br />

“0” to “3”<br />

Line No. 1 Specifi es the line for data setting. “1” to “9”<br />

Data Matrix Data Max 60<br />

Specifi es the character setting in the<br />

specifi ed line. In case <strong>of</strong> data matrix code<br />

marking, each line is connected in the order<br />

<strong>of</strong> number, and barcode is generated. Be<br />

sure that the connected data matrix code<br />

data length must be less than 510-byte.<br />

Refer to the below.<br />

Refer to “Setting method <strong>of</strong> character string for marking (specifi ed with shift JIS code)” (P.146) for the detail <strong>of</strong><br />

the setting method <strong>of</strong> character string.


3-6 Notes<br />

3-6-1 Marking Operation and Command Transmission<br />

� Commands acceptable with shutter opened<br />

There is a restriction <strong>of</strong> command type acceptable while the shutter is opened.<br />

The nine commands acceptable for the laser marker while the shutter is opened are as follows:<br />

• Change <strong>of</strong> File No.<br />

• Shutter (close only)<br />

• Marking Mode<br />

• Laser Pumping<br />

• Counter Reset<br />

• Status request<br />

• Marking Trigger<br />

• Serial Offset<br />

• Serial Data Input<br />

Transmit the marking mode command (marking interruption) before either setting or reading out the command<br />

other than the listed above.<br />

� Commands acceptable during warning/alarm occurrence<br />

The laser marker accepts only the following commands while an alarm or warning occurs.<br />

• Alarm<br />

Status request<br />

• Warning<br />

Status request<br />

Shutter (close only)<br />

Marking mode (interruption <strong>of</strong> marking and read out <strong>of</strong> marking mode only)<br />

• The laser marker should be in the remote status when controlling it by the RS-232C.<br />

• The “shutter control” command is not acceptable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface <strong>of</strong> controller<br />

is turned to OFF.<br />

• Close the internal shutter by shutter control command or remove the cause <strong>of</strong> warning after interrupting the<br />

marking by marking mode setting command to release the warning (except error codes E800 to E811) by<br />

controlling the RS-232C.<br />

• An alarm can not be released by the control from the RS-232C.<br />

191


3-6-2 Combined Use <strong>of</strong> RS-232C and I/O Connector<br />

• The priority should be decided between the RS-232C and input terminal block for the commands “laser pumping” and<br />

“shutter control”. (They cannot be used combined.)<br />

• Turn the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface <strong>of</strong> controller before turning on the power to select the control (RS-232C or<br />

terminal block).<br />

• The laser radiation command (SPT), test marking (TST), guide LD indication (GID) and power check (PWM) can be<br />

used only when the DIP switch No. 2 is set to ON.<br />

192


Troubleshooting


Troubleshooting<br />

If any operation errors occur, check items below fi rst.<br />

When the problems cannot be resolved by the following the below measures, please contact us.<br />

� Start-up<br />

194<br />

Troubles Causes Measures<br />

• Power supply is not<br />

turned on.<br />

• The unit does not<br />

start up.<br />

� Pumping<br />

Power cable is not connected. Connect the power supply cable.<br />

Key switch is not turned on. Turn on the key switch.<br />

Outlet is not powered. Check power to outlet.<br />

Troubles Causes Measures<br />

Laser is not pumped.<br />

Emergency stop switch is pressed.<br />

[IN COM.] [OUT COM.] <strong>of</strong> terminal<br />

block is not connected to the power<br />

supply.<br />

Reset emergency stop switches located on the<br />

head and controller. If an emergency stop switch<br />

remains on, laser cannot be pumped.<br />

Connect [IN COM.] and [OUT COM.] in Input/<br />

Output Terminal to internal power supply or supply<br />

power from outside.<br />

The laser marker does not work unless [IN COM.]<br />

and [OUT COM.] are powered.


� Display<br />

Troubles Causes Measures<br />

Touch panel shows<br />

nothing.<br />

Touch panel does not<br />

respond to screen tap.<br />

Monitor shows nothing.<br />

Laser marker has not be started.<br />

Power cable <strong>of</strong> console is not<br />

connected.<br />

Return harness is not connected.<br />

Return harness is not connected.<br />

See remedial action against “Laser marker fails to<br />

start up”.<br />

Check that console cable is securely connected to<br />

connector [CONSOLE] on front <strong>of</strong> controller.<br />

Connect return harness ([COM1 OUT] [VGA<br />

OUT]) on the rear <strong>of</strong> the controller.<br />

Connect return harness ([COM1 OUT] [VGA<br />

OUT]) on the rear <strong>of</strong> the controller.<br />

Monitor is not turned on. Check power to monitor.<br />

Monitor cable is not connected.<br />

Mouse does not work. Mouse relay cable is not connected.<br />

Check that monitor cable is securely connected to<br />

connector [VGA OUT] on back <strong>of</strong> controller.<br />

Use mouse adaptor cable. If mouse is plugged<br />

directly into mouse connector on back <strong>of</strong><br />

controller, it does not work.<br />

195


� Marking<br />

196<br />

Troubles Causes Measures<br />

Marking cannot be done.<br />

(Laser maker fails to<br />

start marking even when<br />

TEST button is pressed.)<br />

Laser has not been pumped. Refer to “The laser is not pumped”.<br />

The marking mode is “RUN”. Select [TEST] <strong>of</strong> the marking mode.<br />

Lens cap has not been removed. Remove lens cap.<br />

Distance to object is not appropriate.<br />

Object is not in place.<br />

Obstacle hinders laser beam.<br />

Adjust distance between bottom surface <strong>of</strong> laser<br />

maker and target surface <strong>of</strong> object as specifi ed.<br />

Correct position <strong>of</strong> object. Guide indication feature<br />

may be helpful for this purpose.<br />

Remove obstacle between head <strong>of</strong> laser marker<br />

and object.<br />

Laser power is insuffi cient. Increase laser power (including correction factor).<br />

Scan speed is too high. Decrease scan speed (including correction factor).<br />

Trigger setting is for marking on fl ying<br />

objects.<br />

Laser wavelength is not appropriate for<br />

material <strong>of</strong> objects.<br />

Set “Moving direction” to “STILL.” on the Trigger<br />

Setting screen.<br />

Materials on which barcode can be marked differ<br />

depending on type <strong>of</strong> laser marker.<br />

<br />

Metal, resin (excluding transparent and translucent<br />

types)


Troubles Causes Measures<br />

Marking cannot be<br />

done.<br />

(Marking trigger<br />

signal is refused.)<br />

Marking trigger signal is not inputted.<br />

[IN COM.] [OUT COM.] <strong>of</strong> Input/<br />

Output Terminal is not connected to<br />

the power supply.<br />

• The marking mode is “TEST”.<br />

• Laser marker is not in remote<br />

mode.<br />

Internal shutter is closed.<br />

Next marking trigger signal is entered<br />

before completion <strong>of</strong> current marking<br />

cycle.<br />

Mark trigger signal is inputted.<br />

Mark trigger signal is inputted.<br />

(When using Rank Function/Offset<br />

Function/Serial Data Input Function.)<br />

Mark trigger signal is ON while the<br />

marking mode is set to “Marking<br />

Interruption”.<br />

(When communication control is<br />

used)<br />

• Check connections with external equipment for misconnection,<br />

disconnection or contact failure due to<br />

any loose connector.<br />

• Check if marking trigger signal meets write<br />

conditions.<br />

<br />

Check if one-shot signal <strong>of</strong> 10 ms or longer is provided<br />

per marking cycle.<br />

<br />

Check if status <strong>of</strong> the signal remains on during marking.<br />

Connect [IN COM.] and [OUT COM.] in Input/Output<br />

Terminal to internal power supply or supply power from<br />

outside.<br />

The laser marker does not work unless [IN COM.] and<br />

[OUT COM.] in Input/Output Terminal are powered.<br />

• Set the marking mode into [RUN].<br />

• Press Remote to cause marker to enter remote<br />

mode.<br />

Open the internal shutter.<br />

<br />

Select RUN and press [Start].<br />

<br />

Turn <strong>of</strong>f DIP switch No. 2 and turn on terminal SHUTTER<br />

in terminal block.<br />

<br />

Turn on DIP switch No. 2 and send shutter command<br />

(code: SHT).<br />

A restart <strong>of</strong> laser marker is required for setting changes to<br />

become effective.<br />

Enter next marking tripper signal after making sure that<br />

READY output is on. (E800 occurs.)<br />

Enter marking tripper signal after making sure that<br />

[READY] output is on if you want to change registration<br />

fi le to another one.<br />

If rank, <strong>of</strong>fset and serial data functions are enabled while<br />

marking conditions are not yet specifi ed, enter respective<br />

data per marking cycle.<br />

Enter marking tripper signal after making sure that<br />

[READY] output is on or checking status <strong>of</strong> READY using<br />

status request command.<br />

Use mode command [MKM] to set laser marker to resume<br />

mode. Before entering marking trigger signal, use status<br />

request command [STS] to make sure that READY is on.<br />

197


� Marking Quality<br />

198<br />

Troubles Causes Measures<br />

Character is partially<br />

chipped.<br />

Marking is dotted.<br />

Marking fades entirely/<br />

partially.<br />

• Obstacle hinders laser beam.<br />

• Lens is contaminated.<br />

Setting <strong>of</strong> laser pulse cycle and scan<br />

speed are inadequate.<br />

Lens and/or lens protection cover are<br />

contaminated.<br />

Glass is not clean.<br />

Target surface <strong>of</strong> object is inclined.<br />

Fumes occurring during marking hinder<br />

laser beam.<br />

Distance to object is not appropriate.<br />

There are variations in properties <strong>of</strong><br />

objects.<br />

• Remove obstacle between head <strong>of</strong> laser<br />

marker and object.<br />

• Clean contaminants <strong>of</strong>f lens and/or lens<br />

protection cover (glass). Refer to “4-1-2<br />

Cleaning <strong>of</strong> Lens” <strong>of</strong> the Starting Guide.<br />

If contaminants persist, replace lens and/or lens<br />

protection cover (glass).<br />

Contact your local dealer.<br />

Decrease scan speed or marking pulse interval.<br />

Clean contaminants <strong>of</strong>f lens and/or lens protection<br />

cover (glass). Refer to “4-1-2 Cleaning <strong>of</strong> Lens” <strong>of</strong><br />

the Starting Guide.<br />

If contaminants persist, replace lens and/or lens<br />

protection cover (glass).<br />

Contact your local dealer.<br />

Make adjustment so that bottom surface <strong>of</strong> laser<br />

marker head and target surface <strong>of</strong> object are<br />

parallel with each other.<br />

Lack <strong>of</strong> parallelism may result in marking density<br />

variation between center and perimeter areas <strong>of</strong><br />

target surface.<br />

Fumes may cause marking to fade.<br />

• Install dust collector.<br />

• Check that dust collector works well.<br />

Adjust distance between bottom surface <strong>of</strong> laser<br />

maker and target surface <strong>of</strong> object.<br />

Readjust marking conditions according to<br />

variations found.<br />

<br />

Distance to object may vary resulting in a change<br />

<strong>of</strong> marking quality.<br />

<br />

Marking quality may change. Variations in surface<br />

roughness include those in gloss.<br />

<br />

Slight variations may result in a change <strong>of</strong> marking<br />

quality. Variations in material include those in<br />

chemical composition.


Troubles Causes Measures<br />

Marking fades entirely/<br />

partially.<br />

Marking disorder<br />

(Characters crushed,<br />

unreadable)<br />

Object feeder is not stable.<br />

Performance <strong>of</strong> laser oscillator<br />

deteriorates.<br />

There are vibrations coming from<br />

surrounding equipment.<br />

(Marking is disturbed from beginning to<br />

end <strong>of</strong> marking.)<br />

There are irregular vibrations coming<br />

from surrounding equipment.<br />

(Marking is disturbed at irregular<br />

intervals.)<br />

Start and/or stop timing <strong>of</strong> feeder does<br />

not match with marking operation.<br />

(Marking is disturbed at beginning/end<br />

<strong>of</strong> marking.)<br />

There are noises coming from<br />

surrounding equipment.<br />

Variations in position <strong>of</strong> objects may vary distance<br />

to object, resulting in instability <strong>of</strong> marking quality.<br />

Adjust object feeder so that position <strong>of</strong> objects<br />

become stable.<br />

Performance <strong>of</strong> laser oscillator may deteriorate<br />

due to aging.<br />

• Increase laser power setting.<br />

• Decrease scan speed.<br />

If initial marking quality cannot be reached even<br />

if laser power is set to 100 (upper limit), laser<br />

oscillator must be replaced. Contact your local<br />

dealer.<br />

Surrounding equipment such as motor and press<br />

may generate continuous vibrations.<br />

Perform vibration prevention measures.<br />

Surrounding equipment such as air cylinder and<br />

forklift may generate irregular vibrations. Perform<br />

vibration prevention measures.<br />

<br />

Marking trigger signal is likely to be entered before<br />

object is fully stopped. Marking may disturbed due<br />

to remaining vibration even if object is in full stop.<br />

Use delay timer etc. so that marking trigger signal<br />

turns on after vibrations are completely damped.<br />

<br />

Object is likely to start moving before completion<br />

<strong>of</strong> marking.<br />

Delay start timing <strong>of</strong> feeder or decrease scan<br />

speed so that marking is fi nished before object<br />

starts moving.<br />

Noises applied to head or controller <strong>of</strong> laser<br />

marker or lines connecting to external equipment<br />

may cause malfunction or marking disturbance.<br />

Protect laser marker against noises as follows:<br />

• Securely ground frame ground (FG) <strong>of</strong> laser<br />

marker or surrounding equipment.<br />

• Isolate power and signal lines from each other<br />

if they have been routed in parallel.<br />

• Shield signal line.<br />

• Isolate power supply for laser marker from<br />

other equipment.<br />

• Use noise cut transformer to absorb noises<br />

from power supply.<br />

199


� Moving objects (encoder not used)<br />

200<br />

Troubles Causes Measures<br />

Marking disorder<br />

(Characters crushed,<br />

unreadable)<br />

There are vibrations coming from<br />

surrounding equipment.<br />

(Marking is disturbed from beginning to<br />

end <strong>of</strong> marking.)<br />

There are irregular vibrations coming<br />

from surrounding equipment.<br />

(Marking is disturbed at irregular<br />

intervals.)<br />

Start and/or stop timing <strong>of</strong> feeder does<br />

not match with marking operation.<br />

(Marking is disturbed at beginning/end<br />

<strong>of</strong> marking.)<br />

There are noises coming from<br />

surrounding equipment.<br />

Actual speed and preset speed for<br />

feeding objects are different due to<br />

slippage <strong>of</strong> objects.<br />

Surrounding equipment such as motor and press<br />

may generate continuous vibrations. Perform<br />

vibration prevention measures.<br />

Surrounding equipment such as air cylinder and<br />

forklift may generate irregular vibrations. Perform<br />

vibration prevention measures.<br />

<br />

Marking trigger signal is likely to be entered before<br />

object is fully stopped. Marking may disturbed due<br />

to remaining vibration even if object is in full stop.<br />

Use delay timer etc. so that marking trigger signal<br />

turns on after vibrations are completely damped.<br />

<br />

Object is likely to start moving before completion<br />

<strong>of</strong> marking.<br />

Delay start timing <strong>of</strong> feeder or decrease scan<br />

speed so that marking is fi nished before object<br />

starts moving.<br />

Noises applied to head or controller <strong>of</strong> laser<br />

marker or lines connecting to external equipment<br />

may cause malfunction or marking disturbance.<br />

Protect laser marker against noises as follows:<br />

• Securely ground frame ground (FG) <strong>of</strong> laser<br />

marker or surrounding equipment.<br />

• Isolate power and signal lines from each other<br />

if they have been routed in parallel.<br />

• Shield signal line.<br />

• Isolate power supply for laser marker from<br />

other equipment.<br />

• Use noise cut transformer to absorb noises<br />

from power supply.<br />

Remove cause <strong>of</strong> object slippage.


� Moving objects (encoder used)<br />

Troubles Causes Measures<br />

Marking cannot be done. Encoder signal is <strong>of</strong>f. Check for proper connection to encoder.<br />

Characters unreadable<br />

One object is skipped<br />

to be marked every two<br />

objects.<br />

(E800 occurs.)<br />

Actual spacing between<br />

characters is larger or<br />

small than setting.<br />

Marking disorder<br />

Marking position is<br />

unstable.<br />

Feed direction is not correct. Match feed direction with laser marker operation.<br />

Pulse setting <strong>of</strong> encoder is not correct.<br />

Marking trigger signal is entered before<br />

current marking is fi nished.<br />

Pulse setting <strong>of</strong> encoder is not correct.<br />

Either A or B phase signal is refused. (A<br />

and B phase used)<br />

Measured number <strong>of</strong> encoder pulses<br />

differs from calculated one.<br />

Measure the number <strong>of</strong> encoder pulses and adjust<br />

“Number <strong>of</strong> encoder pulses”.<br />

Marking trigger signal is entered before current<br />

marking is fi nished. Do as follows:<br />

• Increase scan speed setting <strong>of</strong> laser marker.<br />

• Decrease delay distance setting <strong>of</strong> laser<br />

marker.<br />

• Reduce feeder speed.<br />

• Increase marking interval (interval between<br />

objects on feeder).<br />

Check setting to be sure that:<br />

<br />

Number encoder pulses = Number <strong>of</strong> pulses/mm - Twice<br />

<br />

Number encoder pulses = Number <strong>of</strong> pulses/mm - Four times<br />

Check that signal is applied to A and B phase<br />

terminals <strong>of</strong> encoder.<br />

Increase or decrease values in “Encoder fi ne<br />

adjustment” fi eld as appropriate.<br />

<br />

Increase the setting.<br />

<br />

Decrease the setting.<br />

Encoder is out <strong>of</strong> order. Check encoder for proper function.<br />

Speed changes at conveyor junction.<br />

Positional misalignment is likely to<br />

occur due to meandering motion <strong>of</strong><br />

conveyor.<br />

If conveyors are coupled, avoid marking near<br />

conveyor junction.<br />

Secure objects to prevent misalignment.<br />

201


� Communication control<br />

202<br />

Troubles Causes Measures<br />

Communication control<br />

fails<br />

Laser marker is not in remote mode.<br />

Type <strong>of</strong> connection cable used is in<br />

appropriate.<br />

Communication command is not allowed unless<br />

laser marker is in remote mode.<br />

Press Remote button on front <strong>of</strong> controller or enter remote<br />

mode in a manner described in <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong> <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />

<br />

Use commercially available cross cable.<br />

(A straight cable cannot be used.)<br />

Laser marker has three-wire connection. (Only pins<br />

Nos. 2, 3 and 5 <strong>of</strong> RS-232C connector are used.)<br />

<br />

• To use an external device and the laser marker one to one,<br />

connect them with a commercially available cross cable (STP<br />

cross cable <strong>of</strong> the Category 5e or higher is recommended).<br />

• To use an external device and the laser markers one to<br />

many, prepare a hub or rooter compliant to 1000BASE-T,<br />

100BASE-TX, or 10BASE-T and connect them with a<br />

commercially available straight cable (STP cross cable <strong>of</strong><br />

the Category 5e or higher is recommended).<br />

Connection cable is disconnected. Check for continuity using tester or the like.<br />

Selected communication port is<br />

inappropriate.<br />

Communication parameter settings are<br />

incorrect.<br />

Command data is not received from<br />

external equipment.<br />

Communication data format is incorrect.<br />

For communication with external devices, select<br />

either RS-232C or Ethernet port.<br />

(They cannot be used at the same time, or<br />

switched.)<br />

The port selected in “Environment 3” in the<br />

environment setting screen indicates the valid<br />

communication port.<br />

RS-232C is selected at factory shipment.<br />

Match communication parameter settings to external equipment.<br />

Communication parameter settings <strong>of</strong> laser marker<br />

can be viewed by selecting [Confi guration 3] from<br />

[Confi guration] menu. Default settings are as follows:<br />

<br />

[Baud Rate=9600bps] [IP Address=192.168.1.5]<br />

[Data Length=8bit] [Subnet Mask=255.255.255.0]<br />

[Parity=None] [Default Gateway=None (blank)]<br />

[StopBits=1bit] [Port=9094]<br />

[Delimit=CR]<br />

[Check Sum:None]<br />

Using commercially available line monitor or network<br />

analyzer, check if external equipment transmits data.<br />

Check if format <strong>of</strong> communication data command<br />

transmitted from external equipment is correct.<br />

• Is start code STX (02: HEX) placed at<br />

beginning <strong>of</strong> transmitted data?<br />

• Is the delimiter added to the end <strong>of</strong> the<br />

transmission data? ([CR] (0D:HEX) or<br />

[CR+LF] (0D:HEX 0A:HEX) for RS-232C, [CR]<br />

(0D:HEX) for Ethernet)


Troubles Causes Measures<br />

Communication control<br />

fails<br />

Almost all commands<br />

including [STR] are<br />

rejected (NAK responce).<br />

� Others<br />

There are noises coming from<br />

surrounding equipment.<br />

DIP switch No. 2 on back <strong>of</strong> laser<br />

marker is <strong>of</strong>f.<br />

The marking mode is not set to “Marking<br />

Interruption”.<br />

Alarm or error occurs.<br />

Noises applied to head or controller <strong>of</strong> laser<br />

marker or lines connecting to external equipment<br />

may cause malfunction or marking disturbance.<br />

Protect laser marker against noises as follows:<br />

• Securely ground frame ground (FG) <strong>of</strong> laser<br />

marker or surrounding equipment.<br />

• Isolate power and signal lines from each other<br />

if they have been routed in parallel.<br />

• Shield signal line.<br />

• Isolate power supply for laser marker from<br />

other equipment.<br />

• Use noise cut transformer to absorb noises<br />

from power supply.<br />

Turn on DIP switch No. 2.<br />

Laser marker refuses all commands except the<br />

following unless it is in interruption mode.<br />

Use marking mode command [MKM] to set the<br />

marking mode to [Marking Interruption] before<br />

command transmission.<br />

• File No. Change [FNO]<br />

• File No. Change (comment) [FNN]<br />

• Shutter <strong>Control</strong> [SHT]<br />

• Marking Mode [MKM]<br />

• Laser <strong>Control</strong> [LSR]<br />

• Counter Reset [CTR]<br />

• Status Request [STS]<br />

• Marking Trigger [MRK]<br />

• Serial Data Input [SIN]<br />

• Serial Offset [SEO]<br />

All commands except the following are refused<br />

while alarm or error is active.<br />

<br />

• Status Request [STS]<br />

<br />

• Status Request [STS]<br />

• Shutter control [SHT] (for closing motion only)<br />

• Marking Mode [MKM]<br />

(for marking interruption and mode read-out only)<br />

Troubles Causes Measures<br />

Mark Flying Object<br />

Laser marker sometimes<br />

starts marking arbitrarily.<br />

Photoelectric sensor for marking trigger<br />

signal malfunctions.<br />

Date is reset. Internal battery has run out.<br />

Fumes may cause malfunction <strong>of</strong> photoelectric<br />

sensor for marking trigger signal.<br />

• Install dust collector.<br />

• Check that dust collector works well.<br />

Contact failure may also be a cause <strong>of</strong> this<br />

symptom. When laser marker have been in use for<br />

fi ve years or more, internal battery is easy to run<br />

out.<br />

Contact your local dealer for replacement <strong>of</strong><br />

internal battery.<br />

203


Error Indication<br />

There is cases that alarm/warning occurs by operation status <strong>of</strong> the laser marker or main unit status <strong>of</strong> the laser marker.<br />

When alarm/warning occurs, an error code corresponding with alarm/warning appear on the “fi le No./error code occurrence<br />

area” or the “console” <strong>of</strong> the front <strong>of</strong> the controller.<br />

This chapter provide the contents <strong>of</strong> errors, their causes and measures to be taken against them.<br />

Alarm<br />

When an alarm is produced, the marking operation stops and the laser pumping is turned <strong>of</strong>f.<br />

ERROR<br />

CODE<br />

204<br />

E002<br />

E004<br />

E011<br />

E021<br />

Error Indications Causes Measures<br />

Emergency stop button<br />

<strong>of</strong> controller is pushed.<br />

Laser Stop 2 <strong>of</strong> the<br />

input terminal is<br />

opened.<br />

Laser Stop 1 <strong>of</strong> the<br />

input terminal is<br />

opened.<br />

Cover <strong>of</strong> scanning<br />

section or fi ber unit is<br />

detached.<br />

E210 Galvanometer error.<br />

Emergency stop button <strong>of</strong> the<br />

controller Switch is pushed.<br />

Laser Stop 2 <strong>of</strong> the input<br />

terminal is opened.<br />

Laser Stop 1 <strong>of</strong> the input<br />

terminal is opened.<br />

Cover <strong>of</strong> scanning section is<br />

opened.<br />

The fi ber unit comes <strong>of</strong>f.<br />

Head control signal cable or<br />

head power cable is not<br />

connected correctly.<br />

Abnormality occurred in<br />

galvanometer on head.<br />

Release emergency stop button <strong>of</strong> controller by<br />

turning it in arrow direction.<br />

Check the wiring <strong>of</strong> the laser stop 2 input terminal<br />

and contact <strong>of</strong> the switch.<br />

Check the wiring <strong>of</strong> the laser stop 1 input terminal<br />

and contact <strong>of</strong> the switch.<br />

Contact to our sales agency.<br />

See “2-3-1 Fiber Unit Installation Method” <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Starting Guide for correct installation.<br />

Check and correct the power status.<br />

Or change the outlet <strong>of</strong> AC power supply.<br />

Connect head control signal cable or head power<br />

cable properly, and restart with key switch.<br />

Check and correct the power status. Or change<br />

the outlet <strong>of</strong> AC power supply.<br />

Connect head control signal cable or head power<br />

cable properly, and restart with key switch.<br />

When not recovered, contact our sales agency.<br />

E220<br />

Internal shutter error.<br />

Head control signal cable is not<br />

connected correctly.<br />

Connect head control signal cable properly, and<br />

restart with key switch.<br />

E221 Internal shutter is faulty. Contact to our sales agency.


ERROR<br />

CODE<br />

E233 Laser error.<br />

E234<br />

E235<br />

E240<br />

E250<br />

Error Indications Causes Measures<br />

Detected unintended-<br />

irradiation.<br />

There is a short line<br />

segment that cannot<br />

be marked.<br />

The temperature <strong>of</strong> the<br />

laser has reached its<br />

upper limit.<br />

A fall in power supply<br />

voltage was detected.<br />

Detected a decrease in<br />

power supply voltage.<br />

The internal temperature <strong>of</strong><br />

the laser oscillator exceeds the<br />

upper limit.<br />

Instantaneous interruption <strong>of</strong><br />

laser power supply is detected.<br />

Head control signal cable is not<br />

connected properly.<br />

Fiber is broken.<br />

The abnormality <strong>of</strong> the laser<br />

oscillator is confi rmed.<br />

There might be occurred the<br />

malfunction <strong>of</strong> the internal<br />

shutter.<br />

The protective function is activated because<br />

the laser oscillator in the controller received<br />

excessive heat load and the internal temperature<br />

exceeds the upper limit. Turn the key switch to<br />

the OFF position and check the followings: Cool<br />

the laser oscillator thoroughly before restarting<br />

the controller.<br />

• Check that the ambient temperature<br />

surrounding the controller is 40°C or less.<br />

• Check the air fi lter <strong>of</strong> the controller for clogging.<br />

• Check the air intake and exhaust system and<br />

the rear fan <strong>of</strong> the controller for clogging.<br />

• Check and correct the power status. Or change<br />

the outlet <strong>of</strong> AC power supply.<br />

• Connect head power cable properly, and restart<br />

with key switch.<br />

Insert the head control cable properly and restart<br />

the controller by turning the key switch to the on<br />

position.<br />

Contact to our sales agency.<br />

Detected unintended-irradiation. Contact to our sales agency.<br />

There is a short line segment<br />

in marking data that cannot be<br />

marked.<br />

Temperature measured by laser<br />

oscillator arises and temperature<br />

error occurs.<br />

Instantaneous interruption <strong>of</strong><br />

laser power supply is detected.<br />

There are many short line segments in marking<br />

data that cannot be marked. Delete any<br />

unrequited line segments in logo fi le.<br />

Set scan speed smaller, or “0” to “Pre-Scan time”<br />

on Laser Setting.<br />

Lower ambient temperature.<br />

Make sure cooling fan operates.<br />

When not recovered, contact our sales agency.<br />

Check and correct the power status.<br />

Or change the outlet <strong>of</strong> AC power supply.<br />

Connect head power cable properly, and restart<br />

with key switch.<br />

When not recovered, contact our sales agency.<br />

205


ERROR<br />

CODE<br />

206<br />

E260<br />

E300<br />

E310<br />

Error Indications Causes Measures<br />

Interlock has occurred<br />

on external terminal.<br />

A head is not<br />

connected. Shut <strong>of</strong>f a<br />

power and connect a<br />

head.<br />

Unsupported head.<br />

Change either head or<br />

controller.<br />

E311 System error.<br />

E312 System error.<br />

E320<br />

E400<br />

to<br />

E443<br />

E450<br />

to<br />

E456<br />

Unit combination is<br />

incorrect.<br />

System error.<br />

Memory error.<br />

Test marking starts while<br />

interlock connector on controller<br />

is in OPEN status.<br />

Interlock on controller is in<br />

OPEN status. (Marking in<br />

remote status)<br />

Cable between head and<br />

controller has not been<br />

connected correctly.<br />

Head control signal cable is not<br />

connected properly.<br />

Wrong head has been<br />

connected to controller.<br />

Head control signal cable is not<br />

connected properly.<br />

Wrong head has been<br />

connected to controller.<br />

Abnormality has occurred on the<br />

laser marker system.<br />

Cable between head and<br />

controller has not been<br />

connected correctly.<br />

Wrong head has been<br />

connected to controller.<br />

Abnormality has occurred on the<br />

laser marker system.<br />

Abnormality has occurred on<br />

counter memory.<br />

Check wiring <strong>of</strong> the interlock input on the<br />

controller and contact <strong>of</strong> the switch.<br />

Confi rm operation logic <strong>of</strong> connection device.<br />

(contact input)<br />

Check wiring <strong>of</strong> the interlock input on the<br />

controller and contact <strong>of</strong> the switch.<br />

Confi rm operation logic <strong>of</strong> connection device.<br />

(contact input)<br />

Connect head control signal cable properly, and<br />

restart with key switch.<br />

Connect head control signal cable properly, and<br />

restart with key switch.<br />

Check if head with correct model has been<br />

connected.<br />

If it is wrong, replace head or controller with<br />

correct one.<br />

Connect head control signal cable properly, and<br />

restart with key switch.<br />

Check if head with correct model has been<br />

connected.<br />

If it is wrong, replace head or controller with<br />

correct one.<br />

Contact to our sales agency.<br />

Connect head control signal cable properly, and<br />

restart with key switch.<br />

Check if head with correct model has been<br />

connected.<br />

If it is wrong, replace head or controller with<br />

correct one.<br />

Contact to our sales agency.<br />

Contact to our sales agency.<br />

When other error not listed in this section was occurred, restart the laser marker.<br />

If the symptom persists after restart, contact your local dealer.


Warning<br />

Warning is occurred when there is a trouble in the setting <strong>of</strong> marking priority. During Warning making operation cannot be<br />

started. (However, laser pumping is kept.)<br />

ERROR<br />

CODE<br />

E251<br />

E500<br />

E501<br />

E502<br />

E503<br />

Error Indications Causes Measures<br />

Detected a decrease in<br />

clock battery voltage.<br />

Reset date and time.<br />

There is not enough<br />

free space.<br />

The fi le cannot be<br />

registered.<br />

Cannot register setting<br />

because <strong>of</strong> memory<br />

error.<br />

Invalid fi le format.<br />

E600 No setting fi le.<br />

E601 No font fi le.<br />

The internal clock battery voltage<br />

(for backup) has decreased.<br />

Internal memory has become<br />

full and registration has become<br />

impossible.<br />

Abnormality occurred in internal<br />

memory.<br />

Data error occurred in font fi le<br />

and logo fi le.<br />

No characters have been set in<br />

fi les.<br />

Font fi le has not been specifi ed/<br />

registered.<br />

E602 Rack <strong>of</strong> font memory. Font fi le has been too large.<br />

E603 No logo fi le.<br />

E604<br />

E605<br />

E606<br />

Included character not<br />

registered into font fi le.<br />

Exceed valid number<br />

<strong>of</strong> characters.<br />

(Max. 30 characters/<br />

line.)<br />

Existed mar king data<br />

outside <strong>of</strong> marking<br />

area.<br />

Logo fi le has not been<br />

registered.<br />

No font corresponding to set<br />

characters were found.<br />

Set numbers <strong>of</strong> characters<br />

exceeds limited number <strong>of</strong><br />

characters that can be set on<br />

one line.<br />

Setting <strong>of</strong> marking data exceeds<br />

limited range for marking area.<br />

Contact to our sales agency.<br />

While laser Marker power is on, reset “Date and<br />

Time” in Environment Setting. When the power is<br />

<strong>of</strong>f, reset “Date and Time”.<br />

Delete registered fi le and logo fi le.<br />

Restart with key switch.<br />

When not recovered, contact our sales agency.<br />

Contact to our sales agency.<br />

Set characters.<br />

Register font fi le.<br />

Set a registered font to the font in character<br />

condition.<br />

Make font fi le smaller, or delete unnecessary font<br />

fi le.<br />

Register logo fi le.<br />

Change characters.<br />

Make numbers <strong>of</strong> characters smaller.<br />

Contain marking data within marking area.<br />

• Change marking position.<br />

• Make characters smaller.<br />

• Narrow character interval.<br />

etc.<br />

207


ERROR<br />

CODE<br />

208<br />

E607<br />

E610<br />

to<br />

E612<br />

E620<br />

to<br />

E622<br />

E623<br />

E630<br />

Error Indications Causes Measures<br />

Existed marking data<br />

outside <strong>of</strong> marking<br />

area.<br />

Lack <strong>of</strong> marking<br />

memory.<br />

Cannot follow line<br />

speed.<br />

Too narrow<br />

marking interval for<br />

proportioned fl ying<br />

object.<br />

Too much quantity<br />

<strong>of</strong> Step and Repeat<br />

marking.<br />

Bold character could not<br />

be created because invalid<br />

character for bolding exists with<br />

setting.<br />

Marking data is too large.<br />

The line length is too long.<br />

(spiral, etc.)<br />

Can not follow line speed <strong>of</strong><br />

fl ying object marking.<br />

Setting <strong>of</strong> marking interval is too<br />

narrow.<br />

Numbers <strong>of</strong> Step & Repeat<br />

marking exceeded limited<br />

numbers.<br />

Set any standard font without original 4 font.<br />

Use Font Maker provided to create the proper<br />

pattern font.<br />

• Reduce numbers <strong>of</strong> characters and logo<br />

data.<br />

• Reduce numbers <strong>of</strong> step & repeat.<br />

• Reduce numbers <strong>of</strong> a start point and a end<br />

point <strong>of</strong> characters or logo data.<br />

Separate the long segment into short data.<br />

Shorten marking time with the following methods.<br />

• Speed up scan speed.<br />

• Narrow character interval.<br />

• Make characters smaller.<br />

• Reduce numbers <strong>of</strong> characters.<br />

• Change setting <strong>of</strong> curve/edge.<br />

• Reduce numbers <strong>of</strong> character lines.<br />

• Displace a start point <strong>of</strong> marking, etc.<br />

Adjust the line speed <strong>of</strong> the fl ying object.<br />

Adjust the waiting time <strong>of</strong> the fl ying object.<br />

Increase setting value <strong>of</strong> marking spacing.<br />

Shorten marking time with the following methods.<br />

• Speed up scan speed.<br />

• Narrow character interval.<br />

• Make characters smaller.<br />

• Reduce numbers <strong>of</strong> characters.<br />

• Change setting <strong>of</strong> curve/edge.<br />

• Reduce numbers <strong>of</strong> character lines.<br />

• Narrow character spacing, etc.<br />

Reduce numbers <strong>of</strong> characters to be marked.<br />

(Max.: 4000)


ERROR<br />

CODE<br />

E640<br />

E650<br />

E651<br />

Error Indications Causes Measures<br />

Invalid function for<br />

combining with fl ying<br />

object.<br />

Invalid setting <strong>of</strong><br />

processing element.<br />

Too short line segment<br />

<strong>of</strong> processing element.<br />

E660 Cannot convert dxf fi le.<br />

E690<br />

E700<br />

E701<br />

Cannot fi nish<br />

measurement during<br />

specifi ed time.<br />

Started marking in<br />

laser pumping OFF<br />

state.<br />

Started laser power<br />

check in laser pumping<br />

OFF state.<br />

Step & Repeat, Rank Offset,<br />

Serial data marking, Reset at<br />

date update function, arbitrary<br />

point radiation, or overwrite<br />

function is set and fl ying object<br />

marking starts.<br />

The distance between startingending<br />

points <strong>of</strong> the arc is larger<br />

than double <strong>of</strong> radius.<br />

The line length is smaller than<br />

width <strong>of</strong> the line segment.<br />

Element which can not be<br />

converted for DXF fi le is<br />

included.<br />

Since the marking data is too<br />

large, the measurement cannot<br />

be fi nished within the limited<br />

time at simulation.<br />

Marking starts without setting<br />

laser pumping on.<br />

Power check is started with<br />

laser pumping OFF.<br />

E710 Marking energy error. Marking energy error.<br />

E800 -----------------------------<br />

Trigger input occurred while<br />

marking ready output is set to<br />

<strong>of</strong>f.<br />

Release Step & Repeat, Rank Offset, Serial data<br />

marking, Reset at date update function, arbitrary<br />

point radiation, or overwrite function.<br />

Release fl ying object marking function with<br />

trigger setting.<br />

Set the distance between start and end points <strong>of</strong><br />

the arc smaller than double <strong>of</strong> radius.<br />

Set the larger value to the length <strong>of</strong> the line than<br />

width <strong>of</strong> the line.<br />

Re-create the DXF fi le.<br />

Reduce marking contents and measure marking<br />

time.<br />

Speed up scan speed.<br />

Turn on laser pumping switch, and start marking<br />

in lighting status.<br />

Turn on laser pumping switch, and start power<br />

check.<br />

Check the thresholds (upper and lower limit) <strong>of</strong><br />

the marking energy.<br />

Change marking timing so that trigger input is<br />

performed after marking ready output is turned<br />

on.<br />

Check wiring and control procedure for input<br />

terminal, wiring to communication port, and the<br />

procedure <strong>of</strong> the communication command.<br />

209


ERROR<br />

CODE<br />

210<br />

E811<br />

E900<br />

E901<br />

E902<br />

E903<br />

E910<br />

Error Indications Causes Measures<br />

Laser Stop 1 <strong>of</strong> the<br />

input terminal is<br />

opened.<br />

Existed invalid<br />

function character for<br />

simultaneous use.<br />

Existed invalid<br />

character for converted<br />

into 2D code.<br />

Cannot create a 2D<br />

code.<br />

No specifi ed 2D code<br />

pattern.<br />

Existed invalid<br />

character for converting<br />

into bar code.<br />

E911 Cannot create ar code.<br />

E912<br />

E913<br />

E914<br />

Too small dimension <strong>of</strong><br />

narrow element/basic<br />

module with for bar<br />

code.<br />

No quiet zone in bar<br />

code.<br />

Too small separate<br />

pattern or composite<br />

row height.<br />

Laser stop1 on terminal block is<br />

in OPEN.<br />

Laser stop 1 on terminal block is<br />

in OPEN status.<br />

(In remote/operating marking)<br />

The data includes function<br />

characters that cannot be used<br />

simultaneously.<br />

The data includes a character<br />

that cannot be converted into 2D<br />

code.<br />

The system fails to create a 2D<br />

code.<br />

The pattern which has not<br />

registered as 2D code font is<br />

specifi ed.<br />

The data includes a character<br />

that cannot be bar coded.<br />

The system fails to create a bar<br />

code.<br />

The setting value for width <strong>of</strong> the<br />

narrow element/basic module is<br />

too small.<br />

Although inversion mode has<br />

been set, the quiet zone has not<br />

been defi ned.<br />

The setting value <strong>of</strong> comparison<br />

ratio between “one bar code<br />

height” and “separator pattern<br />

height ratio” is not proper.<br />

Check the wiring <strong>of</strong> the laser stop 1 input terminal<br />

and contact <strong>of</strong> the switch.<br />

Confi rm operation logic <strong>of</strong> connection device.<br />

Check the wiring <strong>of</strong> the laser stop 1 input terminal<br />

and contact <strong>of</strong> the switch.<br />

Confi rm operation logic <strong>of</strong> connection device.<br />

Set either rank function character or serial data<br />

function character.<br />

Set the character that can be converted into 2D<br />

code.<br />

Use the condition where 2D code can be created.<br />

Specify 2D pattern code which has been already<br />

registered.<br />

Set the character that can be bar coded.<br />

Use the condition where a barcode can be<br />

created.<br />

Specify the setting value for the width <strong>of</strong> the<br />

narrow element/basic module larger than that <strong>of</strong><br />

the line width <strong>of</strong> the laser.<br />

Set the proper value for “Quiet/Narrow Ratio”.<br />

Adjust the height <strong>of</strong> one step bar code.<br />

When other error not listed in this section was occurred, restart the laser marker.<br />

If the symptom persists after restart, contact your local dealer.<br />

Specify the proper value for “Separation Ptrn<br />

H/W” so that the “Separation Pattern Height”<br />

becomes “0” or “Marking Width” is larger than<br />

“Separation Pattern Width”.


Appendix


Input Setting Value by Series (LP-S Standard Mode)<br />

(LP-S*** type only)<br />

Setting Screen Item Unit<br />

212<br />

Input Range<br />

LP-S200 LP-S500 LP-S202 LP-S502 LP-S205 LP-S505<br />

Standard area type Small spot type Wide area type<br />

� Work Distance mm 190 130 350<br />

� Marking Field mm 90×90 55×55 160×160<br />

Layer No. � 0 to 15<br />

Operation X/Y Offset mm -045.000 to +045.000 -027.500 to +027.500 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Screen -<br />

Operator<br />

Adjustment<br />

Laser Power<br />

Laser Pulse Cycle<br />

�<br />

μs 02.0 to 50.0<br />

012.0 to 100.0 by increment <strong>of</strong> 0.5<br />

02.0 to 20.0 02.0 to 50.0 02.0 to 20.0 02.0 to 50.0 02.0 to 20.0<br />

Screen Scan Speed mm/s 00001 to 12000 00001 to 06000 00001 to 12000<br />

Line Speed m/min. 000.060 to 240.000 000.060 to 120.000 000.060 to 240.000<br />

Guide Scan Speed mm/s 0001 to 6000 0001 to 3000 0001 to 6000<br />

File File No. - 0000 to 2047<br />

Character<br />

Setting<br />

Set Number <strong>of</strong><br />

Row<br />

row 01 to 99<br />

Function<br />

Setting -<br />

<strong>External</strong> Offset<br />

Marking<br />

Condition -<br />

Overall<br />

Condition -<br />

General<br />

Condition<br />

Marking<br />

Condition -<br />

Overall<br />

Condition -<br />

Step & Repeat<br />

Marking Condition -<br />

Overall Condition -<br />

Step & Repeat<br />

Fine-Adjustment<br />

Marking<br />

Condition -<br />

Character<br />

Condition<br />

Marking<br />

Condition -<br />

Logo Condition<br />

X/Y Offset mm -045.000 to +045.000 -027.500 to +027.500 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Offset θ ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

X/Y Offset mm -045.000 to +045.000 -027.500 to +027.500 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Offset θ ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

Overwriting Frequency times 0001 to 9999<br />

Overwriting Interval s 0.0 to 9.9 or 010 to 060<br />

Marking Pitch mm 0.010~2.000<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> Row row 001 to 400 (maximum value <strong>of</strong> number <strong>of</strong> row x column that can be set is 4000)<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> Column column 001 to 400 (maximum value <strong>of</strong> number <strong>of</strong> row x column that can be set is 4000)<br />

Row/Column Step mm 000.000 to 090.000 000.000 to 055.000 000.000 to 160.000<br />

X/Y Offset mm -045.000 to +045.000 -027.500 to +027.500 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Adjust X/Y mm -045.000 to +045.000 -027.500 to +027.500 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Rotation Angle ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

Laser Power<br />

Adjustment<br />

% -50 to +50<br />

Character Height/Width mm 000.100 to 090.000 000.100 to 055.000 000.100 to 160.000<br />

X/Y Position mm -045.000 to +045.000 -027.500 to +027.500 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Character Interval mm 000.000 to 090.000 000.000 to 055.000 000.000 to 160.000<br />

Line Interval/Radius<br />

<strong>of</strong> Line Interval<br />

mm 000.000 to 090.000 000.000 to 055.000 000.000 to 160.000<br />

Tilt Angle ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

Character String Width mm 000.000 to 090.000 000.000 to 055.000 000.000 to 160.000<br />

Center X/Y mm -999.999 to +999.999<br />

Radius mm 000.000 to 999.999<br />

Bold Line Width mm 0.000 to 2.000 0.000 to 2.000 0.000 to 4.000<br />

X/Y Position mm -330.000 to +330.000<br />

Rotation Angle ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

Height/Width mm 000.100 to 090.000 000.100 to 055.000 000.100 to 160.000<br />

X/Y Scale time 0.100 to 10.000


Setting Screen Item Unit<br />

Marking<br />

Condition -<br />

Bar Code<br />

Condition<br />

Marking<br />

Condition -<br />

Bar Code<br />

Condition<br />

(Human<br />

Readable Text)<br />

Marking<br />

Condition -<br />

Processing<br />

Condition<br />

Marking<br />

Condition -<br />

Arbitrary Point<br />

Radiation<br />

Conditions<br />

Laser Setting<br />

Trigger Setting<br />

Environment<br />

Setting-<br />

System <strong>of</strong>fset<br />

Input Range<br />

LP-S200 LP-S500 LP-S202 LP-S502 LP-S205 LP-S505<br />

Standard area type Small spot type Wide area type<br />

Narrow Element (W) mm 0.050 to 1.000<br />

Bar Code Height<br />

Lower Bar Code Height<br />

One Bar Code Height<br />

mm 001.000 to 090.000 001.000 to 055.000 001.000 to 160.000<br />

Module Height/Width mm 0.001 to 9.999<br />

Center X/Y mm -045.000 to +045.000 -027.500 to +027.500 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Tilt Angle ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

Relative X/Y Position mm -045.000 to +045.000 -027.500 to +027.500 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Character Height mm 000.100 to 090.000 000.100 to 055.000 000.100 to 160.000<br />

Character Width mm 000.100 to 090.000 000.100 to 055.000 000.100 to 160.000<br />

Character Interval mm 000.000 to 090.000 000.000 to 055.000 000.000 to 160.000<br />

Line Interval mm 000.000 to 090.000 000.000 to 055.000 000.000 to 160.000<br />

X/Y Offset mm -045.000 to +045.000 -027.500 to +027.500 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Rotation Angle ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

Start Pt. <strong>of</strong> X/Y<br />

End Pt. <strong>of</strong> X/Y<br />

mm -045.000 to +045.000 -027.500 to +027.500 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Center Pt. <strong>of</strong> X/Y mm -045.000 to +045.000 -027.500 to +027.500 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Radius (Circle) mm 0.010 to 45.000 0.010 to 27.500 0.010 to 80.000<br />

Radius (Arc) mm 0.010 to 330.000<br />

Solid part <strong>of</strong><br />

dashed line<br />

mm 000.010 to 090.000 000.010 to 055.000 000.010 to 160.000<br />

Blank <strong>of</strong><br />

dashedline<br />

mm 000.000 to 090.000 000.000 to 055.000 000.000 to 160.000<br />

X/Y Offset mm -045.000 to +045.000 -027.500 to +027.500 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

X/Y Point mm -045.000 to +045.000 -027.500 to +027.500 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Laser Power - 012.0 to 100.0 by increment <strong>of</strong> 0.5<br />

Scan Speed mm/s 00001 to 12000 00001 to 06000 00001 to 12000<br />

Laser Pulse Cycle μs 02.0 to 50.0 02.0 to 20.0 02.0 to 50.0 02.0 to 20.0 02.0 to 50.0 02.0 to 20.0<br />

Line Width mm 0.010 to 2.000<br />

Line Speed m/min. 000.060 to 240.000 000.060 to 120.000 000.060 to 240.000<br />

Flying Object Wait ms 000.00 to 500.00<br />

Line Speed m/min. 000.060 to 240.000 000.060 to 120.000 000.060 to 240.000<br />

Delay Time (Still) ms 000000 to 005000<br />

Delay Distance<br />

(Flying Object)<br />

mm 000.00 to 500.00<br />

Flying Object Wait ms 000.00 to 500.00<br />

X/Y Offset mm -30.000 to +30.000 -27.500 to +27.500 -30.000 to +30.000<br />

Rotation Offset ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

X/Y Magnifying<br />

Factor<br />

% 070.000 to 130.000<br />

213


(LP-S***W type)<br />

Setting Screen Item Unit<br />

214<br />

Input Range<br />

LP-S500W LP-S505W<br />

Standard area type Wide area type<br />

�<br />

the central point between<br />

the works*<br />

mm 193 357<br />

� Marking Field mm 90×90 160×160<br />

Operation Layer No. - 0 to 15<br />

Screen -<br />

Operator<br />

Adjustment<br />

X/Y Offset<br />

Laser Power<br />

mm<br />

-<br />

-045.000 to +045.000 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

020.0 to 100.0 by increment <strong>of</strong> 0.5<br />

Screen Scan Speed mm/s 00001 to 03000<br />

Guide Scan Speed mm/s 00001 to 03000<br />

File File No. - 0000 to 2047<br />

Character Setting<br />

Set Number <strong>of</strong> Row row 01 to 99<br />

Function Set- X/Y Offset mm -045.000 to +045.000 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

ting -<br />

<strong>External</strong> Offset<br />

Offset θ ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

Marking Condi- X/Y Offset mm -045.000 to +045.000 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

tion -<br />

Offset θ ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

Overall Condi- Overwriting Frequency times 0001 to 9999<br />

tion -<br />

General Condi-<br />

Overwriting Interval s 0.0 to 9.9 or 010 to 060<br />

tion<br />

Marking Pitch mm 0.010~2.000<br />

Marking Condition<br />

-<br />

Overall Condition<br />

-<br />

Step &<br />

Repeat<br />

Marking Condition<br />

-<br />

Overall Condition<br />

-<br />

Step &<br />

Repeat Fine-<br />

Adjustment<br />

Marking Condition<br />

-<br />

Character Condition<br />

Marking Condition<br />

-<br />

Logo condition<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> Row row<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> Column<br />

column<br />

001 to 400 (maximum value <strong>of</strong> number <strong>of</strong> row x column that can be set<br />

is 4000)<br />

001 to 400 (maximum value <strong>of</strong> number <strong>of</strong> row x column that can be set<br />

is 4000)<br />

Row/Column Step mm 000.000 to 090.000 000.000 to 160.000<br />

X/Y Offset mm -045.000 to +045.000 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Adjust X/Y mm -045.000 to +045.000 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Rotation Angle ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

Laser Power Adjustment<br />

% -50 to +50<br />

Character Height/<br />

Width<br />

mm 000.100 to 090.000 000.100 to 160.000<br />

X/Y Position mm -045.000 to +045.000 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Character Interval mm 000.000 to 090.000 000.000 to 160.000<br />

Line Interval/Radius <strong>of</strong><br />

Line Interval<br />

mm 000.000 to 090.000 000.000 to 160.000<br />

Tilt Angle ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

Character String Width mm 000.000 to 090.000 000.000 to 160.000<br />

Center X/Y mm -999.999 to +999.999<br />

Radius mm 000.000 to 999.999<br />

Bold Line Width mm 0.000 to 2.000 0.000 to 4.000<br />

X/Y Position mm -330.000 to +330.000<br />

Rotation Angle ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

Height/Width mm 000.100 to 090.000 000.100 to 160.000<br />

X/Y Scale times 0.100 to 10.000


Setting Screen Item Unit<br />

Marking Condition<br />

-<br />

Bar Code Condition<br />

Marking Condition<br />

-Bar Code<br />

Condition(Human<br />

Readable Text)<br />

Marking Condition<br />

-<br />

Processing<br />

Condition<br />

Marking Condition<br />

-<br />

Arbitrary Point<br />

Radiation Conditions<br />

Laser Setting<br />

Trigger Setting<br />

Input Range<br />

LP-S500W LP-S505W<br />

Standard area type Wide area type<br />

Narrow Element (W) mm 0.050 to 1.000<br />

Bar Code Height<br />

Lower Bar Code Height<br />

One Bar Code Height<br />

mm 001.000 to 090.000 001.000 to 160.000<br />

Module Height/Width mm 0.001 to 9.999<br />

Center X/Y mm -045.000 to +045.000 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Tilt Angle ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

Relative X/Y Position mm -045.000 to +045.000 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Character Height mm 000.100 to 090.000 000.100 to 160.000<br />

Character Width mm 000.100 to 090.000 000.100 to 160.000<br />

Character Interval mm 000.000 to 090.000 000.000 to 160.000<br />

Line Interval mm 000.000 to 090.000 000.000 to 160.000<br />

X/Y Offset mm -045.000 to +045.000 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Rotation Angle ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

Start Pt. <strong>of</strong> X/Y<br />

End Pt. <strong>of</strong> X/Y<br />

mm -045.000 to +045.000 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Center Pt. <strong>of</strong> X/Y mm -045.000 to +045.000 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Radius (Circle) mm 0.010 to 45.000 0.010 to 80.000<br />

Radius (Arc) mm 0.010 to 330.000<br />

Solid part <strong>of</strong> dashed<br />

line<br />

mm 000.010 to 090.000 000.010 to 160.000<br />

Blank <strong>of</strong> dashed line mm 000.000 to 090.000 000.000 to 160.000<br />

X/Y Offset mm -045.000 to +045.000 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

X/Y Point mm -045.000 to +045.000 -080.000 to +080.000<br />

Laser Power - 020.0 to 100.0 by increment <strong>of</strong> 0.5<br />

Work Distance mm 173 to 213 327 to 387<br />

Scan Speed mm/s 00001 to 03000<br />

Line Width mm 0.010 to 2.000<br />

Delay Time<br />

(Still)<br />

ms 000000 to 005000<br />

Environment X/Y Offset mm -30.000 to +30.000 -30.000 to +30.000<br />

Setting -<br />

System<br />

Rotation Offset ° -180.00 to +180.00<br />

Offset<br />

X/Y Scale % 070.000 to 130.000<br />

* The work distance can arbitrarily be set by laser setting, provided that the center position is within the range <strong>of</strong> 193mm +/-<br />

20mm (173 to 213mm) for LP-S500W, and 357mm +/- 30mm (327 to 387mm) for LP-S505W.<br />

(To set the distance between adjacent works, refer to “2-10 Laser Setting” in Operation <strong>Manual</strong>.)<br />

215


Communication<br />

Command<br />

LSP<br />

DLY<br />

Item Unit<br />

Input Range<br />

LP-S200 LP-S500 LP-S202 LP-S502 LP-S205 LP-S505<br />

Standard area type Small spot type Wide area type<br />

Line Speed m/min. 00.060 to 60.000<br />

Delay Time<br />

(Still)<br />

Delay Distance<br />

(Flying Object)<br />

ms 000000 to 005000<br />

mm 000.00 to 500.00<br />

217


(LP-S***W type)<br />

Communication<br />

Command<br />

218<br />

FRG<br />

FNO<br />

STR<br />

MCS<br />

STC<br />

Item Unit<br />

Input Range<br />

LP-S500W LP-S505W<br />

Standard area type Wide area type<br />

File No. - 000 to 255<br />

Set Number <strong>of</strong><br />

Row<br />

row 01 to 30<br />

OFS<br />

X/Y Offset<br />

Offset θ<br />

mm<br />

°<br />

-045.00 to +045.00<br />

-180.00 to +180.00<br />

-080.00 to +080.00<br />

X/Y Offset mm -045.00 to +045.00 -080.00 to +080.00<br />

Offset θ ° -180.0 to +180.0<br />

Overwriting Frequency<br />

times 1 to 9<br />

ALC<br />

Marking Pitch mm 0.00~2.00<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> Row row 001 to 100 (maximum value <strong>of</strong> number <strong>of</strong> row x column that can be set is 900)<br />

Number <strong>of</strong> Column column 001 to 100 (maximum value <strong>of</strong> number <strong>of</strong> row x column that can be set is 900)<br />

Row/Column Step mm 00.00 to 90.000 00.00 to 99.99<br />

SRA Adjust X/Y mm -45.00 to +45.00 -80.00 to +80.00<br />

Character Height/<br />

Width<br />

mm 000.20 to 090.00 000.20 to 160.00<br />

STC<br />

CDC<br />

BCF<br />

QRF<br />

DMF<br />

LPW<br />

SSP<br />

WDC<br />

X/Y Position mm -045.00 to +045.00 -080.00 to +080.00<br />

Character Interval mm 000.00 to 090.00 000.00 to 160.00<br />

Line Interval/Radius<br />

<strong>of</strong> Line Interval<br />

mm 000.00 to 090.00 000.00 to 160.00<br />

Tilt Angle ° -180.0 to +180.0<br />

Character String<br />

Width<br />

mm 000.00 to 090.00 000.00 to 160.00<br />

Center X/Y mm -300.00 to +300.00<br />

Radius mm 000.00 to 300.00<br />

Bold Line Width<br />

(LP-F10 mode)<br />

mm 00.00 to 01.92<br />

Bold Line Width<br />

(LP-F10W mode)<br />

mm 00.00 to 02.00 00.00 to 03.20<br />

X/Y Position mm -300.00 to +300.00<br />

Rotation Angle ° -180.0 to +180.0<br />

Magnifi cation times "00.10" to "02.27" "00.10" to "04.04"<br />

Narrow Element<br />

(W)<br />

mm 0.05 to 1.00<br />

Module Height/<br />

Width<br />

mm<br />

QR code: 0.05 to 1.00<br />

Data Matrix: 0.001 to 1.000<br />

Center X/Y mm -045.00 to +045.00 -080.00 to +080.00<br />

Rotation Angle ° -180.0 to +180.0<br />

Laser Power - 020.0 to 100.0 by increment <strong>of</strong> 0.5<br />

Scan Speed mm/s 0001 to 3000<br />

Line Width mm 0.010 to 2.000


Communication<br />

Command<br />

LSP<br />

DLY<br />

Item Unit<br />

Input Range<br />

LP-S500W LP-S505W<br />

Standard area type Wide area type<br />

Line Speed m/min. 00.060 to 60.000<br />

Delay Time ms 000000 to 005000<br />

219


Character Code Table<br />

ASCII Code<br />

220<br />

Bottom<br />

Top<br />

00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70<br />

0 (NUL) (SP) 0 @ P ' p<br />

1 ! 1 A Q a q<br />

2 (STX) " 2 B R b r<br />

3 # 3 C S c s<br />

4 $ 4 D T d t<br />

5 (NAK) % 5 E U e u<br />

6 (ACK) & 6 F V f v<br />

7 ' 7 G W g w<br />

8 ( 8 H X h x<br />

9 ) 9 I Y i y<br />

A (LF) * : J Z j z<br />

B + ; K [ k {<br />

C , < L I l |<br />

D (CR) (GS) - = M ] m }<br />

E . > N ^ n ~<br />

F / ? O _ o<br />

• Only the ASCII Code that is compliant to JIS Standard shown above is supported by the laser marker. (The<br />

ASCII Code defi ned by the IEC/ANSI Standard differs from the ASCII Code shown above.)<br />

• When using the external device set by 2byte, NUL00 (HEX) can be used.Please add NUL00 (HEX) before<br />

STX or after delimiter<br />

• In case <strong>of</strong> CODE128, Data Matrix Code, and Composit (2D bar code), the control code can be specifi ed<br />

to the marking data, however, it cannot be transmitted/received by RS-232C. Therefore, use the following<br />

alternate codes.<br />

<strong>Control</strong> Code : 00 (HEX) to 1F (HEX), 7F (HEX), FUNC1<br />

Alternate code : F050 (HEX) to F06F (HEX), F071 (HEX) F072 (HEX)


Index


Index<br />

Numbers<br />

238<br />

2D Code Pattern (Code: BRP) [LP-S STD Mode] ………… 120<br />

Roman<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

Alarm ………………………………………………………… 204<br />

Arbitrary Point Radiation Condition Setting (Code: PRF)<br />

[LP-S STD Mode] ………………………………………… 130<br />

Arbitrary Point Radiation Coordinate Setting (Code: PRD)<br />

[LP-S STD Mode] ………………………………………… 131<br />

ASCII Code …………………………………………………… 220<br />

Bar Code Marking Condition (Code: BRF)<br />

[LP-S STD Mode] ………………………………………… 110<br />

Bar Code Marking Condition (Code: BCF)<br />

[LP-F10 Mode] …………………………………………… 181<br />

Bar Code Marking Data (Code: BRS)<br />

[LP-S STD Mode] ………………………………………… 119<br />

Bar Code Marking Data (one-byte Character) (Code: BCS)<br />

[LP-S STD Mode] ………………………………………… 121<br />

Bar Code Marking Data (one-byte Character) (Code: BCS)<br />

[LP-F10 Mode] …………………………………………… 183<br />

CAD Condition (Code: CDC) ……………………………… 160<br />

CAD File (Code: CDF) ……………………………………… 153<br />

Character Code Table ……………………………… 219, 220<br />

Character Condition (Code: STC) [LP-S STD Mode] …… 85<br />

Character Condition (Code: STC) [LP-F10 Mode] ……… 157<br />

Character Condition (Shortened Form) (Code: SPC)<br />

[LP-S STD Mode] ………………………………………… 87<br />

Command List (Code: OFS) [LP-S STD Mode] …………… 64<br />

Command List (Code: OFS) [LP-F10 Mode] ……………… 140<br />

Common Bar Code Condition (Code: BCC)<br />

[LP-S STD Mode] ………………………………………… 124<br />

Communication Data Format ……………………………… 58<br />

Communication Sequence ………………………………… 62<br />

Connecting Sample with <strong>External</strong> Devices………………… 24<br />

Connection Check (RS-232C) ……………………………… 54<br />

<strong>Control</strong> Sample (RS-232C) ………………………………… 55<br />

Counter (Code: CNT) [LP-S STD Mode] ………………… 73<br />

D<br />

E<br />

F<br />

G<br />

H<br />

I<br />

Counter (Code: CNT) [LP-F10 Mode] ……………………… 149<br />

Counter Reset (Code: CTR) [LP-F10 Mode] ……………… 171<br />

CW Pulse Cycle/Duty (Code: CWL) ……………………… 162<br />

Data Matrix Code Data (Code: DMS) [LP-F10 Mode] …… 190<br />

Data Matrix Code Marking Condition (Code: DMF)<br />

[LP-F10 Mode] …………………………………………… 188<br />

Data Matrix Code Pattern (Code: DMP) [LP-F10 Mode] … 189<br />

Delay (Code: DLY) [LP-S STD Mode] ……………………… 93<br />

Delay (Code: DLY) [LP-F10 Mode] ………………………… 166<br />

DIP Switch …………………………………………………… 12<br />

DXF Logo Condition Setting(code: CDD)<br />

[LP-S STD Mode] ………………………………………… 78<br />

Emergency Stop Switch …………………………………… 59<br />

Encoder Signal (Code: ENC) ……………………………… 95<br />

Encoder Signal (Code: ENC) [LP-F10 Mode] …………… 168<br />

Era Year (Code: ERA) [LP-F10 Mode] …………………… 170<br />

Era Year (Code: ERA) [LP-S STD Mode] ………………… 97<br />

Error Indication ……………………………………………… 204<br />

Ethernet<br />

Connecting Sample with <strong>External</strong> <strong>Control</strong>ler …………… 52<br />

RS-232C Connector ……………………………………… 49<br />

RS-232C Specifi cation …………………………………… 50<br />

Setting <strong>of</strong> Communication Conditions …………………… 51<br />

File Name (Code: FNM) [LP-S STD Mode] ……………… 66<br />

File Name (Code: FNM) [LP-F10 Mode] …………………… 143<br />

File No. Change (comment) (Code: FNN)<br />

[LP-S STD Mode] ………………………………………… 68<br />

File Registration (Code: FRG) [LP-S STD Mode] ………… 67<br />

File Registration (Code: FRG) [LP-F10 Mode] …………… 144<br />

Flying Object Wait (Code: MWT) [LP-S STD Mode] ……… 94<br />

Functional character (specifi ed with ASCII code) ………… 70<br />

Functions for Safety Measures ……………………………… 54<br />

Guide LD Display (Code: GID) [LP-S STD Mode] ………… 101<br />

Human Readable Text Setting (Code: BRV)<br />

[LP-S STD Mode] ………………………………………… 122


J<br />

K<br />

L<br />

M<br />

Input Circuit …………………………………………………… 26<br />

Input/Output Terminal ………………………………………… 20<br />

Input Rating …………………………………………………… 26<br />

Input Signal …………………………………………………… 28<br />

Input Terminal/Output Terminal …………………………… 15<br />

Input Terminal/Output Terminal Power …………………… 33<br />

Interlock Connector ………………………………………… 15<br />

Interlock Connector Connecting Samples ………………… 18<br />

I/O Connector ………………………………………………… 15<br />

I/O Environment (Code: ENV) [LP-F10 Mode] …………… 175<br />

I/O Environment (Code: ENV) [LP-S STD Mode] ………… 103<br />

I/O Connector Output Signal ………………………………… 33<br />

JIS Level-1 Font ……………………………………………… 222<br />

JIS Level-2 Font ……………………………………………… 228<br />

Key Switch …………………………………………………… 59<br />

Laser Check (Code: SPT) [LP-S STD Mode] ……………… 105<br />

Laser Check (Code: SPT) [LP-F10 Mode] ………………… 176<br />

Laser <strong>Control</strong> (Code: LSR) [LP-S STD Mode] …………… 100<br />

Laser <strong>Control</strong> (Code: LSR) [LP-F10 Mode] ……………… 173<br />

Laser Power (Code: LPW) [LP-S STD Mode] …………… 89<br />

Laser Power (Code: LPW) [LP-F10 Mode] ………………… 161<br />

Laser Pulse Cycle (Code: MPL) [LP-S Mode] …………… 90<br />

Laser Pulse Cycle (Code: MPL) [LP-F10 Mode] ………… 162<br />

Line Speed (Code: LSP) [LP-F10 Mode] ………………… 167<br />

Line Width Correction (Code: WDC) [LP-S STD Mode] … 91<br />

Line Width Correction (Code: WDC) [LP-F10 Mode] …… 163<br />

Logo Condition (Code: CDC) [LP-S STD Mode] ………… 79<br />

Logo File (Code: CDF) [LP-S STD Mode] ………………… 77<br />

Lot Character String (Code: LTS) [LP-S STD Mode] …… 75<br />

Lot Character String (Code: LTS) [LP-F10 Mode] ………… 151<br />

Lot Condition (Code: LTC) [LP-S STD Mode] …………… 74<br />

Lot Condition (Code: LTC) [LP-F10 Mode] ………………… 150<br />

Low alarm limit (Code: PWL) [LP-S STD Mode] ………… 133<br />

LP-F10 Mode ………………………………………………… 139<br />

Main Power Indicator ………………………………………… 59<br />

Marking Character String (1-byte Character) (Code: MCS)<br />

[LP-S Mode] ……………………………………………… 71<br />

Marking Character String (Code:STR) [LP-S Mode]……… 69<br />

Marking Character String (1-byte Character) (Code: MCS)<br />

N<br />

O<br />

P<br />

Q<br />

[LP-F10 Mode] …………………………………………… 147<br />

Marking Character String (Code:STR) [LP-F10 Mode] … 145<br />

Marking Mode (Code: MKW) [LP-F10 Mode] ……………… 171<br />

Marking Mode (Code: MKW) [LP-S Mode] ………………… 98<br />

Marking Interval (Code:INT) [LP-S STD Mode] …………… 93<br />

Marking Interval (Code:INT) [LP-F10 Mode] ……………… 166<br />

Marking Operation and Command Transmission ………… 191<br />

Marking Quality Adjustment (Code: WTC) [LP-S Mode] … 104<br />

Marking Quality Adjustment (Code: WTC)<br />

[LP-F10 Mode] …………………………………………… 164<br />

Marking Status Transmission Permission (Code: MST)<br />

[LP-F10 Mode] …………………………………………… 174<br />

Marking Status Transmission Permission (Code: MST)<br />

[LP-S STD Mode] …………………………… 102, 132, 133<br />

Marking Trigger (Code:MRK) [LP-S STD Mode] ………… 100<br />

NPN Connection Sample …………………………………… 24<br />

Offset (Code: OFS) ………………………………………… 108<br />

Offset Condition (Code: OFC) [LP-S STD Mode] ………… 107<br />

Offset Condition (Code: OFC) [LP-F10 Mode] …………… 179<br />

Offset (Code: OFS) [LP-F10 Mode] ………………………… 180<br />

Original Font ………………………………………………… 221<br />

Output Circuit ………………………………………………… 27<br />

Output Rating ………………………………………………… 27<br />

Output Terminal Output Signal ……………………………… 32<br />

Character Condition (Code: SCC) [LP-S STD Mode] …… 88<br />

Overall Condition (Code: ALC) [LP-F10 Mode] …………… 154<br />

Overall Condition (Code: ALC) [LP-S STD Mode]………… 80<br />

PNP Connection Sample …………………………………… 25<br />

Power Check (Code: PWM) ………………………………… 136<br />

Power Check (Code: PWR) ………………………………… 134<br />

Processing Condition Setting (Code: LAY)<br />

[LP-S STD Mode] ………………………………………… 126<br />

Processing Element Setting (Code: FIG)<br />

[LP-S STD Mode] ………………………………………… 127<br />

QR Code Data (Coded:QRS) [LP-F10 Mode] …………… 187<br />

QR Code Marking Condition (Coded:QRF)<br />

[LP-F10 Mode] …………………………………………… 185<br />

239


R<br />

S<br />

T<br />

W<br />

Y<br />

240<br />

QR Code Pattern (Coded:QRP) [LP-F10 Mode] ………… 186<br />

Rank Character String (Code: RKS) [LP-S STD Mode] … 106<br />

Rank Character String (Code: RKS) [LP-F10 Mode] …… 178<br />

Rank Condition (Code: RKC) [LP-S STD Mode] ………… 105<br />

Rank Condition (Code: RKC) [LP-F10 Mode] …………… 177<br />

Response data format for abnormal receiving (NAK) …… 60<br />

Response data format for normal receiving (ACK) ……… 59<br />

Scan Speed (Code: SSP) [LP-S STD Mode] ……………… 89<br />

Scan Speed (Code: SSP) [LP-F10 Mode] ………………… 161<br />

Serial Data Input (Code:SIN) [LP-S STD Mode] ………… 125<br />

Serial Data Input [Code:SIN] [LP-F10 Mode] ……………… 184<br />

Serial Offset (Code: SEO) …………………………………… 109<br />

Setting input value for each model ………………………… 214<br />

Setting method <strong>of</strong> character string for marking<br />

(specifi ed with shift JIS code) …………………………… 69<br />

Shift to Remote Mode ……………………………………… 10<br />

Shift to RUN Mode …………………………………………… 11<br />

Shutter (Code: SHT) [LP-S STD Mode] …………………… 97<br />

Signals on I/O Connector …………………………………… 22<br />

Status Request (Code: STS) [LP-S STD Mode] ………… 99<br />

Status Request (Code: STS) [LP-F10 Mode]……………… 172<br />

Step and Repeat Setting (Code: SRA) [LP-F10 Mode] … 155<br />

Step & Repeat Condition (Code: SRC)<br />

[LP-S STD Mode] ………………………………………… 81<br />

Step & Repeat Setting (Code: SRA) [LP-S STD Mode] … 82<br />

Terminal Connector ………………………………………… 15<br />

Test Marking (Code: TST) [LP-S STD Mode] ……………… 138<br />

Timing Chart ………………………………………………… 34<br />

Transmission timeout ………………………………………… 62<br />

Trigger Condition (Code: TRG) [LP-S STD Mode] ……… 92<br />

Trigger Condition (Code: TRG) [LP-F10 Mode] …………… 165<br />

Troubleshooting ……………………………………………… 194<br />

Warning ……………………………………………………… 207<br />

Week Setting (Code: WKM) [LP-S STD Mode] ………… 129<br />

Year/Month/Date/Time (Code: YMD) [LP-S STD Mode] … 96<br />

Year/Month/Date/Time (Code: YMD) [LP-F10 Mode] …… 169<br />

No.9000-0027-35V


No.9000-0027-35V


���������������������������������������<br />

����������������������������������������<br />

�������������������������������������<br />

��������������������������������������������������������<br />

�������������������������������������������<br />

������������������������������������������������������<br />

��������������������������������������������������<br />

���������������������<br />

���������������������������������������������������������������<br />

�������������������������������������������������������<br />

����������������������<br />

����������������<br />

© ��������������������������������������������<br />

�������������

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!